-

•
OF
TJRUMANGALAT NiLAKANTHAN
•
MiJSAT

DR.A.ACHVUTHAN
Executive Director,
Vastuvidyap ratisthanam , Calicut.
DR. BALAGOPAL T.S. PRABHU
Professor of Architectural Engineering
Regional Engineering College , Calicut .

VASTUVI DYAP RATISTHANA M

ACADEMIC CENTRE, SARASWATHAM ,
KILIYANAD, CALICUT- 673 001.
 Manu_§ylllayacandrikiibha$yam

PREFACE

Classical literature available on Vastuvidya deals mainly

with temples and other symbolic buildings. But, by far the
most numerous constructions made by the silpins are
residences. The art of designing and building of residences
remained a hereditary craft, though the related theories did
form part of the classic text. The separation of the craft from
the theory relegated house-building as a code of practice to
'
be blindly followed by the artisans. Manu$yalayacandrika
was probably the first attempt to elevate the house-building
English from the leve1 of a craft to that of a science, synthesising
the science contained in classical texts with the skills of the
MANU$YALAYACANDRIKABHASYAM
• silpins .
AN ENGINEERING COMMENTARY
- Manu$y8/ayacandrika is written as a thesis on
ON MANUSYALAYACANDRIKA
• residential architecture in technical Samsk(t after referring
OF TIRUMANGALAT NiLAKANTHAN
•
MUSAT all the available classic texts. Several translations in
Malayalam helped the craftsmen to understand the theory
Authors : Dr. A. Achyuthan. and make ready-reckoner tables for L:Jse in the field. No
•

: Dr. Balagopal T.S. Prabhu. wonder, the text became popular among the acaryas as well
Copies : 1000. as artisans for the last 4 centuries. Keen interest on this
First Published : December 1998. text has been evinced by many professionals recently.
DTP Type set at : Academic Centre,
Vastuvidyapratisthanam, The uniqueness of Manu~yalayacandrika is that it gives
CALl CUT- 673 001. a systematic procedure for planning, designing and
Printed at : Geethajali Offset Prints, Feroke. constructing houses together with ancillary structures. It was
: Padma.
felt that an English version with critical comparisons and
Graphics
:
- - -
VASTUV!OYAPRATI$THANAM,
commentaries would be of great use to practitioners of the
Publishers
SARASWATHAM, KILIYANAD, profession all over India.
CALl CUT- 673 001.
For this commentary, the original text compiled from
Price : Rs.500/- palm leaf manuscripts in 1917 by Shri. T. Ganapati Sastri
0utside India $40. for the Trivandrum Sanskrit Series has been adopted.
© : Authors. • ••

•
11 ]
 1ltlan u ~·ydlayacandrikiib ha~·ya1n
Brhatsamhita, Mimasara and Mayamata have been mainly
used for comparison in this critical study. Attempt has been
made to relate the content of the text with modern
engrneering theories and practices so that this book can
serve as a text book on the subject in the curriculum of
modern architectural and engineering courses.
The guidance given by Shri. Kanippayyur Krishnan
Namboodiripad in the preparation of this work is gratefully
acknowledged. The discussion with Shri. K.P. Kayalad of
Meppayur and Shri. V. Raman Achary of Elamkulam on the
construction details have been very helpful in elucidating
the contents of the relevant sections. Thanks are due to
Ms.M.Sreeja and Ms.Limcy John for the secretarial
assistance.
Cali cut A. Achyuthan,
13-11-1998 •
Balagopal T.S. Prabhu .
•
IV
Manu~yalayacandrikiibha~ya1n
•
INTRODUCTION
Sanskrit studies are generally co11fined to Vedas, ltihasas,
Pura~1as. Kriv))as. Niitakas, Alartkaras~astra, V)'akarana,
Darsanas and the like only. It is not well known that San krit
ha also a vast literature on scientific and technological ubject
like astronomy and mathematics, architecture and engineering,
medicine, chetnistry and botany, mu ic and dance, law and
politics etc. Of course, studies of medicine (A.vurveda) and
astronomy and tnathematics (Jyoti~·a and Ga~1ita) were there in
the syllabii i11 ancient and medieval India. And now al.. o they
are going on. But they have not been in the main- trean1. The
re ult is: Scientist are not aware of the pre ence ofthi ~ abundant
literature in Sanskrit and the Sanskriti ts are not competent to
study these and thereby to impart it to the world of cientist .
So there should be a co11 cious effort on the part of both the
Scientists and San. kritists to it together and explore all the
po si bilities that thi bulk of literature contain .
Now'l 110t 1nany sttldie on this literature have con1e out,
The History of Hi11du Chernistry by P.C. Ray~ The HL. tory of
Hindu Mathen1atic~ by Datta and Sing, The Po itive c1en c of
Ancient Hindus hy B. . Seal~ A Conci e Hi . tory of Sci ~11c in
India edited by D.N. Bose, .N. Sen and B.V Subarayappa~ A
History of the Kerala School of Hindu A tronomy by K.V.
Sar111a, Fou11ders of Science in Ancie11t lnd1a by atya Praka. 'I
Scie nce and ociety i11 Anc1e11t India by De hi Pra ' ad
. .__.. attopadyaya, Technical Literature in an 'kr!l ed1ted by
v
 Manu~yalayacandrikahha~yam
s. Venkitasubramo11ia lyer~ Scientific Heritage of l11dia in -two
volumes (Mathematics and Ayurveda) edited hy K.G. Paulo e~
Observational Astronomy in Ancient India by K.V. Sarma are a
few among them. But~ a comprehensive and elaborate work
like Science and Civilisation in China by Joseph Needham is
yet to be produced.
The late Debi Prasad Chattopadhyaya had undertaken such
a project. The first two volume of his work, History of Science
and Technology in Ancient l11dia have already been published.
As far as architecture is concerned, An Encyclopedia of
Hindu Architecture by P.K. Acharya, Indian Architecture (3
volume ) by M.A. Ananthalwar and A. Rea, Eleme11ts of Hi11du
Iconography (2 voJutnes) by T.A. Gopinatha Rao, Indian
Architecture(2 volumes) by Percy B rown, An Architectural
Survey of Temples of Kerala by H. Sarkar and Temple
Architecture of Kerala by K.V. Soundararaja11 are among the
promine11t studies. Fa1nous original works in Sa11skrit on
architecture and engineering are Mayan1ata by Maya111uni,
SaJnarii.J?gaJ,1asutradh.arcl and Yuktikalp(ltaru both by Bhoja,
Krb!.akalpata rg by La k~'117.idh. a ra a11d M anasarg_ by
Manasaramu11i. Kerala contributed substantially to tpis branch
of knowledge. Sanskrit works like Srikumara's Silparatnat
is~Q11,Q ~/ivag u rztd eVClS Pclddh a ti~ Ce 1111QS N af'Q)J Q~1. Q11
I purely technological treatment throughout and not my . tic
Nan1bzi.dirip(ld's TanJrciSLlln.ucca)'G, Sankara's SesliSatnuccaya
and Tf.rwnang.talam Nllakqntha's Manu~ytilayacandrika: and
works like Vastulab·a11.a1n Silpclvisa)'an7 edited by Rarnakr1shna
Sastri. Grhaninna;w.vaddhati b), Parakkal Krishna Wan·ier.
iilvakau.mudi by ·N~G. Karta. Vilvakarmlva edited I_.by V.
:a.
Chandrasekhara Batta and Balakrishnanacl1ari and Taccusastrzun.
BhQsa hy S. Balakri ·hnanasari are some of the contributions of
Kerala to arcl1itecture and engineering.
Among these. Tantrasanwccaya in seven chapters having
• Vll
V1
Manusyalayacandrikabhasyam
243 stanzas is generally considered the most popular treatise
of Kerala on building construction. This work has many
co1nmentaries in Malayalam and Sanskrit. The authors of all
these commentaries are Sanskrit scholars, a good number of
them seems to be well-versed in traditional architecture of
Vastuvidya. Those who are trained in modern engineering do
not appear to study the work with or without the help of these
commentaries, presumably because of the stereotyped traditional
style of them. In this circumstance, the present Engineering
Commentary on Manuf·yalayacandrika becomes highly
significant. The authors of this valuable commentary, Dr. A.
Achyuthan and Dr. Balagopal T.S. Prabhu, teachers of
engineering by profes ion, and founders of Vastuvidyii-
prati~_th.artarn) Calicut have already published A Text Book of
Vdstuvid)'a and Design in Vastuvidya. They are competent to
write a work of this kind which will, I am sure, spread the
message of ancient Indian technology of house construction
stored in this well-known Sanskrit treatise among all tho e who
are i11terested in this discipline irre pective of their belonging
to traditional or modern chool.
011e who goes through this E11gineering Commentary 011
Manusvalavacanclrika
. ~
can see that the authors have adopted
treatn1e11t which is comn1only seen in traditional works of th1
kin d. The authors have given stre. to the technological a pect
because building is primarily a technological proce s.
Another pecial feature of this work is a large nun1b r )f
illustrations (In ore than l ()0). Thi . undoubtedly enhance ~ the
value of this conJtnentary.
The third fact to be noted i .. that during th c )Inmentary.
the authors have studied n1any points in the text in com pari - on
• •
 Man usyalayac an drikab hasy anz Manusyalayacandrikabhasyatn

with sitnilar contexts in other treatises on Vd ·tuvid\'Q

- like
Mava1nata and Ma11asara.
•
ABOUT THE TEXT AND ITS AUTHOR
The detailed glos ary of Sanskrit terms u ed in the work is
given at the end is very much useful especially for those who INTRODUCTION
are only familiar with modern book of architecture and
The fountain head of Vastus'astra is the Sthapatyaveda, the
engineering as well as for laymen.
annexure of Atharvaveda. This compilation contained treatments
I congratulate the distinguished author for undertaking on mathematics, computations, geometry, graphic arts, structural
this happy but strenuous venture and wi h that thi, Engineering engineering, astronomy, sculptural arts, etc. Vastuvidya i al o
found described inpura~1QS, SGStras and san1hitas of later period '.
commentary on Ma11U~'),iila)'acandrika will reach all the
Matsyapura1Ja, for exan1ple, contains
, extensive treatment on
deserving hands. architecture and sculpture. Natyasastra of Bharata includes a
chapter on the design and construction of theatres. Padmasan1hita
contains elaborate treatment on planning and construction of
temples.
A concise but highly authoritative treatn1ent of Vc'isruvid 'a
DR. N.V.P. UNITHIRI, i included as part of Varaha1nihira' Brhatscnnhita of about 6th
Principal Dean of Studie ~ -
century A.D. MatsyaJJUrarza refers to 18 Acar) as (Master teachers)
KALADY,' Sree Sankaracharya Univer ity of Sanskrit possibly representing different schools of architecture. However
15-04-98 Kalady~ Kerala. th c t r ~at 111 en t i n Br h at san l hit a is e s, en t i ally ,b a" ed n the
authorities of only three of the1n viz. !via) a, Vis"vakarnza and
Garga.
- -.,
Son1e of the later con1pilati ons on Va01uvicl a are (i) Jsa71a-
Sivagurudevapaddhati, (ii) Ktlmikfigama (iii) SamarOnka~za­
sittrarlhara. (iv) May{unata and (v) MZuzasara. The 11rst t\VO are
the agan1ic texts which also deal \Nith arc hit ctural a pect '"' .
Sr.unariinkauasutradhara, attributed to Bhoja ~tand, out a a
uniqu con1pilation dealing e/hau "' tiv l ' on t )\A' l1 plannin~
con truction o r fort , p a Iaces and 111 any 111 e chan i c a l crafts .
!via) unzata and Manasara ar h ld as , tandard refer nee \V\ rk
on \1/i.stuvid) a all over India. All th e \V< rk ar con1pr hensi\
and n1asterly con1pilatiun in highly technical Sanz ·k.rt .
The archit ctural dev lopn1 nt o1 India fron1 th cla '"' ical
•
1
• • •
Vlll
 Manusyalayacandrikabhasya1n
Man usyalayac andrikab hasy atn
peri od are based on the treatises of Ma)'Glnata and Manasfira.
However, geographical and climatic feature . of the different THE AUTHOR
•
regions of the land have necessitated certain amount of variations The author himself indicates that his name is Nilakanfha
in details. Such variations are accon1modated in regional texts. and the name of his family s'rimangala (Tirumangala in
In Kerala , four such boo ks are accepted as reference works. Malayalam)
T,antrasamucc;a)'a (Cennas Nara)' G~1an Nampz7diri]Jad) and f
I ~ ~

Silparatna (Srikumara) cover the temple architecture and "Srl1naizglaspada - sadasraya- nilakan!ha -
Vastuvidya
.,. (Anon) and Manu~ytila)'a c andrika (Tirumangalat Pre map rakar~ an ila yassaka lab hi vandya~1!
Nilakanthan
•
Musat) deal with domestic architecture. These four Srlmadgirindra- tanayatanayonghribhGjtim
books compiled in 13-16th centuries were preserved as palm leaf
Kamaprado jayati mattamatangajasyafl. (M.C.ch.l. sl.3. )
manuscripts till the beginning of this century. They remain the
veritable resource material on Vastuvidya, as practiced in Malabar In sl.l of ch.l of MC. he pays obeisance to the deities of
coast to this day. Narasimha andYadava installed in theRajarajamangalam temple
near Tirur, now a municipal town in Malappuram District of
Of these, Manu~yalayacandrika (MC) is the most popular Kerala. In M.C. and in Kavyollasa (which is another work of the
work among the artisans as well as sthapatis in Kerala. author), Nilankan{ha~ invokes the deities of severa~ ~e~ples
DATE
-
OF MANUSYALAYACANDRIKA
which are all in Prakasa-vi~aya (Ve.t{attunadu), Prakasavt~aya
• is the region around Tirur. Prakas'a means light, (Vettam in
In the first chapter of the book, the author mentions many Malayalam) and Vi$aya means co':!ntry, (natu i~ M~layala':").
works which formed the source material for his work. Tantra- Therefore, it can be deduced that Nilakan!han Musat ts a native
samuccaya is one of these works. This shows that MC was written of Tirumangalam near Tirur.
•

. after Tantrasamuccaya was con1piled. The Kali year of the birth

of the author of Tantrasamuccava indicated in the text i 4529 OTHER WORKS OF THE AUTHOR
.;

corresponding to 1426 A.D. Also , Tuncat Eluttacchan , in his Ntlakanthan Miisat has several other works to his credit. The
work HarinO.maklrtanam , invokes the bles si~gs of Nilakan[ha- •

g uru. E.luthac chan _lived in the 17th century. Therefore, it can be most important an1ong them are:
deduced that Nilakanthan Musat lived between 15th and 1. Si!pacandrika which was compiled before Manu$yZllaya-
17th century AD . · candrika:
•

Ullur S. Parameswaran Iyer in his work ,

'Keralasahitya-
,
2. Manu syalayalaghucandrika which i similar to Vastulak~ak1.1a
caritram' has reported that Tirt-tn?an galat Nilakan[han Musat, the of unknown authorship. (Twenty one verses of this are ta en
author of MC was a disciple of Kelallur Comatiri. The Kali year from Manusyiilayacandrika ):
•
given in Tantrasamgraha of Comfitiri is the one corre ponding
to 1501 AD. R Narayana Panikkar, in hi Bhasasahityacaritran1, 3. Mtitan galila which i a conci e treati ~ on elephant and i
refers to a verse inscribed on the COinpound wall ofTri.pfJUnittura based on Hastyayurveda of sage Palakapya ~
'
Santana go]Jala temple which state that the temple was 4. Vetlkkampavidhi which deal with the ingredients u ed fo~·
constructed with black granite (~r_srzasila) by Nflakan{ha . This making tire works and n11X111g then1 to torm dttlerent type o
was around 1565AD. All these show that MC was con1posed in
tire works:
the I 6th century AD.
•
Xl
X
 ftt1anusyalayacandrikabhasyaJn
Manu~yalayacandrikabhiisya1n
5. Kavyollasa which is an abridged version of Kavya]Jrakilsa of The chapter 4 deaL with the characteri "tic of different
Mamn1ata.
classes of buildings while chapters 5,6 and 7 describe the detail
- of the different elements of the building. They also give details
MANUSYALAYACANDRIKA
•
ot location of the different facilities in a house and also of the
Manu~yalayacandrika is a unique work dealing exclusively subsidiary buildings like cattle hed, entrance gate etc. The book
with construction of residential buildings. In the text itself, the is thus a comprehensive treatise on planning, designing and
author makes it clear that he has referred to all the well-known constructing residential buildings.
texts including aga1nas, sa1nhitas and treatL e available at that
time. He adopts the procedure followed in TantrasaJttuccaya THE RELEVANCE OF THIS WORK
written by Cennas NZln1budiripad. In Tan trasan1uccaya, all
There are more than a dozen comn1entarie on Manll§yalaya-
available knowledge on tantra (practice) has been condensed.
candrika written in Malayalam. This . how the popularity and
Thus the rituals followed by different schools were unified into a
_. acceptance of the work as a standard one not only among craftsmen
single text. Similarly, while co1npiling MC, Nilakanfhan Musat but al 0 acaryas. The tyle and language of these book are uch
has studied all available literature and used the knowledge so that they can be followed only by tl1ose who have orne knowledge
gained in writing thi book. The practices in different parts of of Vastu!/istra. Moreover, illu trations are very rare 1n these work .
the country were critically studied and those which appeared to Hence an illu trated engineering con1me11tary vvhich gives empha i
be appropriate and relevant were coinpiled. The basic techniques, to the technological aspects and which can be ea. ily follo\ved by all
theories and philosophy of Indian Vastuvidya related to residential becon1es 1mportant. Thi will specially enable engineer and architect
buildings (Manu~yiilaya) have thus been unified in this text. In to understand the philo ophy, de ign theorie. and practice\ toll owed
this respect, thls is not a regional text relevant to the west coast in India so as to enable them to integrate thi knowledge with n1odern
only, but is one containing the knowledge 011 gJ--havastu all over developn1ents in engineering and architecture. Th1 will definitely
India. pave way tor evolving an Indian . ty le which i relevant and appropriate
in to<.iay' India.
The text is divided into 7 chapters. The chapter 1 starts with
the list of texts re1erred to by the author. It deals with the guilds
of craftsmen and duties of each guild. It also gives rules for Author
selection of· Land. In chapter 2, procedure tor fixing the cardinal
directions and the n1ajor reference lines are detailed. This chapter
also contains prescriptions on the zoning rule~ in deciding the
locations of the building. It deals extensively with the concept o1
ViistufJUru~arna!1(1ala. The systen1 of n1easuren1ent u ed in
Vastuvidya is described in chapter.3. It also deals with the rules ,
•
for planning settlen1ents. The architectural forn1ul a for orientation
Vi/. the )'Olli COncept and the astrological !actors of aya, vyayo
etc. are also included in this chapter.
• • •
••
X11 Xll 1
 M anu~yalayac andrikab ha~'\Y arn M anusyalayac andrikab hasyam
•

CONTENTS
PREFACE
INTRODUCTION BY DR. N.V.P. UNITHIRI
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN REFERENCES r ABOUT THE TEXT AND ITS AUTHOR

-
CHAPTER -1
M.M. Mayamata.
INVESTIGATION AND SELECTION OF LAND 1
V.V. - Vastuvidya.
lnv-DvP.Itiolt/j r~ er j vlttts-s · U/ttttiolt/ D
K.A. - Kumaragama.
J· avterUtia D ; loca;tiof(;- D
M.S. - Manasara.
tYetUj lDCAJtiolt/ () IUJU/Stu near t .
B.S. - Brhatsamhita.
•
•
CHAPTER-2
P.S. - Padamasamhita.
ANALYSIS OF SITE 37
M.P. - Matsyapurana. • • •
..,... I'Uj tbi'U ()
T.S.(S) -
J

Tantrasamuccayam, Silpabhagam. - ...

r¥1. Dtj v-ic~ ' lira, ..., . . -~U-YaiJt~ p-oincs;
V.R. - Vasturajavallabham. ....
f 'fir~·~~
•
I.S. - lsanasivagurudevapaddhati.
•
ceiU.
CHAPTER-3
DIMENSIONAL AND ORIENTATION SYSTEMS
'
AND AYAD/COMPUTATIONS 83

j rys- basd Dn,

• • •
j r~ s-1/ze, ~ fYDf'DYtUJit/s-j
• •
~ util/r D ~ .....Tj f'YDfOYtiD ~
I
eudilt-ti i)'Pfli;
•

CHAPTER-4
LAYOUT AND PLANNING OF SALAS 131
- •
If~ ·~~·_1 . - U>ft.,.D

XV
X tv
-
 11,11a nusyalayacandrikah hasyatn

.
~.,; order o p-rwr
. "-
o r. ~,~ . - •

. ~/-

~ 91 t> cabu-r. / fUJ

~ -· '- IJ./d crUaia5.

INVESTIGATION AND
CHAPTER-S
PARTS OF A HOUSE 187
SELECTION OF LAND
St> v~/ IL.I" l>r jM~; voartyard;
- ~· M b~ btUe-/,U'LSd

CHAPTER-6
I nv-tJ 11/j YL..;']J
ELEMENTS OF ROOF 229
- o lar3e- $f'tUf/, ra.Ued att-ara, eavu, •
PA/terUtiu t> ; lo~tio/1/ D truu;
r · e-l mea, r, tersl UJUar . j r s. ~ ~· 11/ b housu near f4 •
•

CHAPTER-7
ANCILLARY STRUCTURES 267
j reco.....,
•
j wrt

APPENDICES

1. REFERENCES 315
2. TREES ASSIGNED TO BIRTH STARS 317 •

3. BOTANICAL f~AMES OF TREES AND PLANTS

REFFERED TO IN THIS BOOK 318
4. DESIGN TABLES 320
5. GLOSSARY 333

•
XV1
 Manu~~yalayacandrikabha$ya1n

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig. Page
~

01.01 GANESA, THE FAMILY DEITY OF THE AUTHOR 6

CHAPTER -1
#

01.02 CHART SHOWING THE FLOW OF CONSTRUCTION 18

01.03 CLASSIFICATION OF LAND ACCORDING TO SLOPE 24
01.04 RECOMMENDED PLANTING OF TREES AROUND INVESTIGATION AND SELECTION OF LAND
A HOUSE 27
• •
01.05 RELATIVE LOCATIONS OF TREES BASED ON
THEIR STRUCTURE 27
•

INVOCATION TO DEITIES
Stanza- 1
I
'
~1\J"Id ~d~i ~1\lt~l\iiit\S·cl~l't~ II
'
In the Rajarajamangala temple, there shines profusely
the unified eternal energy (tejas) in the twin forms of
•
Narasintha and Yadava (Krsna) .
Stanza- 2
•
: 'tR
~ ICll ~ I fi)J -:q tll f12) ll oil ~ d ~ i 'I t-t'fl f4 ~I~ I C1 ~ I
•

3l~~~~«t~Cn~sftr ~ ~Cn~Cttl~~·
II
Let the uitimatetejas shining profusely at Trikkandiyur,
Trprangot, Nava (Tiru1ta_vaya temple), Mullappalli, Alattur
and Srikeralapura together fill my mind, which is engaged
in the enlightening topic (of Vastusastra).
Stanza- 3
~~\S·~J cll fqC: '(iC: J~ll41 c;JCf)Od -
'
~~~Ch~~cllt: '(iChC'tlfllCI· ~: I

3
 -
A1anu~'Y aLay a can d rik ab h a~'Y a1n
I equal reverence to all of them.
Enshrined i11 Srlnza1zgala (Tirumangala) ksetra, the •
elephant-faced Gafzda, who is the refuge of good people,
who is beloved of Siva, who is worshipped by all, who is the
son of revered Ptirvati and who grants the wishes of the
devotees, remains with glory.
Stanza- 4
ct~CIYIGChii~Cf>x=tiil~: Cfil-
S I
' is writing the book not in obedience to the direction of some
fcl ~I q ~ .l?>lli q ;{1 ~~ kli ~~<11-
+JCJ~ ~lclfcl6(JtF{ ~ II
' writing the book. The book is written in the great and noble
One, whose only refuge is the lotus feet of that deva
(viz. Ga!ze§a) and who is engrossed in different fields of
kno\¥1edge through the kindness of his preceptor (gztru),
becomes engaged in the teaching of children with purity of
mind.
Commentary (Stanzas 1, 2, 3 and 4)
In these 4 stanzas, the author invokes the blessings of
the presiding deities of the temples in and around his native
place. This is a custom followed by all authors of Samsk(t
texts in the early days.
The author was born at Tirumangalam near Trprangot
temple in the present Tirur taluk of Malappuram district of
Kerala State. Since he begins the narration with the
'
invocation of the Supreme Being manifested as the twin
deities of Narasimha and Krsna
• • •
at the Rajarajamangala (now
known as Rairamangala) temple, it is to be assurned that
those two deities were his istadevatas
• •
(beloved Gods). The
4
temples referred to in the second stanza are all near and
around Tirumangala. Different deities like Siva, Mukunda,
Hanuman are worshiped in these temples. The author gives
Since it is customary to invoke the blessings of Gal)esa
(who clears all obstacles) at the beginning of any auspicious
act, the author invokes the presiding deity ( Gaoesa) of
Tirumangala (fig.01.01 ). The statement that he is writing
the book with purity of mind (atmasudhya) indicates that his
objective is only to impart knowledge to the children
(uninitiated) and not to gain glory, favour or wealth. In one
version of the text, the word, 'atmabudhya' is used in place
of 'atmasudhya'. In this case, it can be interpreted that he
patron (as was vogue in those days) but out of his own free
will. Both versions mean that he has no selfish motive in
Indian tradition of giving knowledge for the welfare of the
world without any selfish motive.
OBEISANCE TO PRECEPTORS
Stanza- 5
............................. ~ ft)tiOJJ ll<fl~-
~~rJ""rht-;:;tr;:r;:r;:r: ~ _......sfq 1
~ ~~...,........,1"'""'1"'1"· Ji ~ 41tt +I I~=t 1-
n;:r;:r:r:n TT':J":[]';::I1r:l'TT~"t;.r.::;::rn II
'
I bow at the extremely holy lotus feet of those people
with great minds, whose intellects are engrossed in the vedas
and according to whose in1agination even the Supreme Lord
manifests his form.
Commentary
Here the au th or bows before his preceptors for whom
5
 Manusyiilayacandrikdbhii~yatn
•
In Brhatsamhita, Varahamihra acknowledges that the
knowledge of building science has been inherited from
Brahma through generations of sages (Ref.01.01 ).
Sthapatyaveda dealt with mathematics (ga(lita), material
science (dravyavij;1am), d·rawing and painting (citra),
iconography (silpasastra) and principles of building construction
all of which form the basis of Vastusastra. This has been
handed over through the generation of sages like Garga,
Parasara ' Brhadratha
. and Viswakarma. Matsyapurana '
mentions 18 acaryas: Bh_rgu, Atri, Vasistha, Viswakarma,
Maya, Nilrada, Nagn,ajit, ViS81ak~a, Pf!randara, Brahma,
Kurnara, Nandikesa, Saunaka, Garga, Vasudeva, Aniruddha,
Sukra and Brhaspati. This list contains the supreme creator
"
Brhama, God heads like Vasudeva and Kumara, great sages
like Bhrgu, Atri and Narada, preceptors of devas (BrhaspatJ)
• ~ / I
as well as asuras (Sukra), and the devasilpi ( Viswakrarma) as
well as asurasilpi (Maya). This shows that in the evolution of
Vastuvidya, all available knowledge, whether it be from Aryan
sources or from parallel Dravidian (asura?) sources, has been
absorbed. It also incorporated the noblest philosophical
concepts and the highest craftskiils. Some interpreters take
that 'druhi(Ja' in this verse means the Supreme Creator
ViSwakarma who is considered to be self-born and is neither
Brahma, Vi$(7U nor Rudra.(Ref.01.02)
REFERENCES
Stanzas- 7, 8
lilJ fl ctqJ Icl 11lfl Jlf!SZif -
~ ·tt~lllf<h~ I in writing this book. The different practices in different parts
S3fi-
i5 ~ ll \if '11 ~ 4=1 f51ll Jf I \1f ll f::z, I I
T ~~::rrr;nt;::mT:~r:::::::IAr;:T;::rt_
"T"'"'r"'~~r""'"''""''' •
'HI '\! I '1_ Cb I ~ lJ q ~ n_,................__._ __...;.· 1> ~ I '! I J I""i If
Manu~yalayacandrikiibha~yanz
xi&ll{,«li ~~xi~ai f4ct~ou~ ~~~~­
c c te Cl I r:r;::::~:r;:;:t-nt:;:hlr.n:r:::tr::n-:::r xi f&1 Ql \9 II
' '
Two texts on Mayantata, PrayogantaJzjari, two
NibandhanZis, tw? _Bhaskariyas, Manumata, Iliizasivaguru-
devapaddhati, Srihariyajanam and other great 5gamas are
well known (texts of Vtistu1astra ). Also referring to the two
texts on Mlirkai14eyapttraJza, the essence of RatJia·vali of
Parasara and Murari, the Ta1ztra texts of KaJyapa and
Viswakar111a, Ku111araganta, Vis1zusanthita with annotation
Vivara1za and other annotations, Yastuvidya and other
(available) texts, it (Vastusastra, the building science) is
condensed here on the lines of Tantrasanzuccaya.
Commentary
Though the author has mentioned references to a large
number of ancient texts including agamas, samhitas and
scientific treatises, he follows the method of Tantrasa-
muccaya written by Cennas Narayanan Nambudiripad in
1462. In Tantrasamuccaya, all available knowledge on tantra
(practice) has been condensed. Tantra, the applied aspects
of knowledge sums up the agama (idol worship) rituals. By
tradition, the ritualistic compilation in Saivism are called
agamas, those of Vai$navism are called samhitas and t~ose
of Sakti worship are called Tantras. Tantrasamuccaya un.lf.led
all these into a single text. Similarly, while com~lltng
Manu~yaJayacandrika, the author has studied all ava1lable
literature and used the knowledge gained by such stud1es
of the country were studied critically an? those wh1c.h
appeared as most appropriate were synthes~sed. ~he b~s1c
philosophy, theories and techniques of lnd1an ~~stuv1d~a
related to residential buildings have been thus un1f1ed In this
text. In this respect, this is not a regional text releva~! to
I Kerala alone, but is one contaming the wisdom of Q[havastu
9
 Manu~yizlayacandrikahha~ya1n
Manu ~yalayac andrikab hasy
7

•
atn
applicable all over India. Commentary
Any person who wishes to construct a building should
The practice of listing the references was not common
take the advice of a noble person, well-versed in the science
in ancient Indian texts. But this author has acknowledged
of building and related topics. The owner being a layman,
all the references
may not be in a position to properly analyse and balance
THE ROLE OF AcARYAS his requirements and resources and to select skilled
craftsmen and building materials. Therefore, the advice and
Stanzas- 9,10
guidance of an acarya ·are necessary in selecting the plot
¥i ("ll'f f4 MIf4 CJ UT fiif ~ ll"rl:CJ~::rtf4*crr:::rl-=l~ <T: Xl ~ and the team of builders. The acarya's advice will be proper
and unbiased because he is endowed with all good qualities.
I
Ws"li dGct ot<flJ<Ji In the design of buildings, the owner (yajam8.na), the
' adviser (acarya) and the master-builder (sthapatl) have
ctlxm: ~~~x~th~~~ : ct>l~~= ct>l'!~a 11 specific roles. The text Vastuvidya (Ref.01.03) compares
them to Vi?nU · , Rudra and Brahma respectively, the trinity
CtGIJiillf4f4~di~Cit. ~,. :
of Indian theology.
Cf>llif : ~=tCf>cl~ct~'!lcllll~l~ I
' The yajamana feels the necessity for the building and later
d 1ct I CRI ct : '<=t Cf> &I tll Ji Xj llt=;~::rr.:r - arranges the materials and the money for its execution. The
acarya is the guide who conceives the design suitable to the
~ Cf>IXlip~tt II
status (varaa) and requirements of the owner and selects a
Wh~n any pers;>n belonging to the vartzas starting master-builder (architect-engineer viz. sthapati), who will
~rom ~rahma~za (brahma~za, k$atriya, vais'ya, and siidra) transform the concept into reality with the help of the craftsmen.
~~ ~es1rous of building a house, he must first accept an
acarya (learned preceptor), who is associated with the GUILD SYSTEM (SRENI) IN BUILDING TRADE
locality and who has all the (required) virtues. Then after Stanzas- 11, 12
selecting the plot suitable for the class of the person who
seeks his advice, he (the acarya) should perform the rites x~ q ~: (f&1Cbxi ~I ~1 :q ct~f&;: Sbli ~I:
of worship (of viistzt) and get the building constructed ~:ciJ~dCf>4fUt G~ !:11~\Q l~"(l Cbi'!CI~ II
according to the prescriptions in the texts by skilled '
craftsmen. It is the acarya, who should give the ~icf~llf?ff4 ~dfml114 c: ...:;)

prescriptions of the houses of gods as well as humans,

tt4GICI~<i~l'i~i: : I
after carefully considering what have been stated in the
ancient texts like the vedas and the aganzas. Constructing ~ 1fl1 cnl f4 J 1<1 il <xi x1f4 ct>l
the buildings in accordance with his (acarya 's)
prescriptions by joining the mud, stone etc. is considered fi~CIICf> II
'
as tl1e job of the craftsmen.

10 ll
 Man usya layac andrikab ha~y a1n
•
The four classes of builders viz . .sth~pati, siitragriihi,
J aki each one adept In h1s work, are to be
ta k sa ka, and Vard 1 '
selected systematically.
Let the one, who is adept in the techniques prescribed
in all texts, whose mind is always calm, who is pure and
~ightful, who is free from unfair competiti?n and who speaks
only truth, be the sthapati (architect-engmeer).
Commentary (Stanzas 11 and 12 )
For the craftsmen engaged in the design and execution
of buildings, a four tier classifications is prescribed. Each
class had specific and distinct responsibilities and roles.
Sthapati is the master-builder who makes the design and
coordinates the works of the other builders. He should know
all the sciences including mathematics, climatology,
geography, geology, material science etc. In addition to this,
he should be perfect in body and mind, righteous, kind,
warm-hearted and free from malice and unfair competition.
Only such a person will be able to properly weigh all the aspects
impassionately and take proper decisions without bias, and
co-ordinate the work of others. Other texts also stresses the
important role of sthapati (Ref. 01-04,05). He is comparable
to the architect-engineer of the present day. The stringent
standards of physical, intellectual and moral qualities
prescribed for the sthapati indicate his key role in the
vastusthapana. His profession is elevated from the mundane
level to the realm of dharma.
Stanza- 13
\ilt41llta ~~~q~~~ x~qfft~~ : 1'11ll~t~fl~ :::r:::1T:
'
Ch~d: xi·,td
crctr?T;~rr*JJ-;:r.l'TJ"::I~r::rt C1 tf f4> : fll C1 tt I~ : I I
12
•
1\1anu~yalayacandrikah ha _·ya1n
Know thatsthapati is the one competent to dosthapa11a
(layout and design). Then eitl1er his son who is almo t equal
to the sthapati in all qualities or the desciple who correctl
follows the thinking of the sthapati is the sutragrahi
(supervisor). Tak~aka is so called because he is engaged in
reducing and shaping the materials (or construction). He
should always have a happy mind. One who is clever and
careful in joining together 'vood etc. is called vardl1aki.
Commentary
The sutragrahi is the site-supervisor. He should be abte
to understand the sthapati properly and see that the latter's
ideas are transformed into concrete form. He may be the
son or a desciple of the sthapati. His job is to ensure that
the parts of the building are properly joined and aligned and
to supervise the work of the craftsmen of the next two
classes. Sutra is the thread and sutragrahi is one who holds
the threads for alignment.
Tak$aka is the one who shapes the building materials
like stone, wood, metal etc. into forms suitable for building.
Vardhaki is the joiner who increases (v[dh) by joining
together the different materials and parts shaped by the
taksaka to form the building.
•
This system of classification appears to have evolved
from the vedic times, when timber was the major construction
material. Timber work is mainly an assembly process.
Probably this is the reason why the building science is called
TaccuSf:J.stra ( Tak~akaSistra) in Kerala The elements are
shaped by tak~aka, joined together by vardhaki aligne
SUtragrahJ and erected With due regard to the rien a ion
stability and strength by sthapati. Thi cia ifi i n
carried forward even when stone becon1e a n1 · r L il 1
material.
This four tier systen1 can be con1 r tt

Manusya.layacandrikabllasya1n
• •
prevailing now. Modern architect-engineer has taken the
place of sthapati. The supervisor does the work of sutragrahi.
The technicians who are engaged in masonry (masons),
joinery (carpenters and metal workers), concreting etc. are
vardhakis. The workers who cut, saw, shape, dress and
smoothen the materials are tak~akas. In the upper tiers,
theoretical knowledge is given importance while in the lower
layers, practical skills are stressed. The training imparted
to each class was according to its functions. Tak~aka should
be able to write, draw sketches, calculate the dimensions
and proportions and should essentially develop technical
skill in cutting, dressing, shaping etc. of the materials of
construction. Vardhaki should have all these skills and
should develop the necessary foresight and skill in joinery
works. To verify the levels, plumb, dimensions, quality etc.
of the individual and joined parts, sutragrahi should have
theoretical and practical knowledge about the construction
materials and process. Sthapati should have high theoretical
knowledge on all technical aspects and also on the
prescriptions. Above all, he should be able to understand
and interpret the philosophy ( darsana) of building science.
He should also be well-versed in the allied sciences and
arts.
Though there is no bar in the vertica.l movement of
tak~aka to the level of sthapati, this seldom took place
because of the high standards of theoretical knowledge
demanded by the profession of sthapati. But sutragrahi,
the son or desciple, can take the role of sthapati, after
acquiring knowledge and training.
•
I'
OWNER'S DUTY TO KEEP SILPINS SATISFIED
Stanza- 14
14
•
!'lfllf4et~:()'!~ f4MCJ~:
V..l v .... ~ili: Cf) I'! ll d i II
Without these foursome beginning with the stlzapati,
it is not possible to construct houses etc. efficiently. Hence
intelligent aciiryas should get the houses constructed
through (satisfied and) happy craftsmen.
Commentary
Since the services of the builders are essent1al for
construction, it is the responsibility of the acarya, who
advises the owner, to see that the builders are always
contended and happy, so that they can turn out good
workmanship. On their turn, the builders took their 10b as
dharma (devotional duty). Though the levels of creativity,
education and work-experience were different for the
different classes of workers, theirs was a job of creation
(sargaprakr1ya). It is the abstract picture of the needs,
aspirations and the background of the owner that is
transmitted to the sthapatithrough the acarya. The planning
and detailed design call for creativity on the part of the
sthapati. Converting the concepts into three dimensional
•
buildings require not only skill, but a certain amount of
creativity also on the part of the artisans. The act of creativity
•
-
was considered as a divine sadhana in ancient India. Thus,
the buildtng is not merely a technical process but goes
beyond it to became a divine function. The owner is only a
cause (nimitta) andI the acarya a guide for the creative
process by the 'silpins' . Their job is not merely an
employment or profession but a sublime act of worship of
VastupurU$8 , the presiding spirit of the vastu. The building
is not merely a material object but a symbol of divine
blessing. It was this kind of total dedication that was
responsible for the development of the sublime science of
Vastu in India.
- -- -- -
. - - -- -- --
- - -- - - ~ - - - - ~ ---
15
 Manu~yalayacandrikablza$ya1n
CALL FOR QUALITY CONTROL
Stanza- 15
Those who live in houses that are built against the
canons will surely meet with ill fate. Hence from the
beginning to the end, (building) work sho~ld. be done
deciding every aspect (according to the prescriptions).
Commentary
This indicates the importance of planning before
undertaking the construction and of the necessity for strict
adherence of the rules. All aspects should be considered
and satisfactory solutions worked out while selecting the
site, designing the horizontal and vertical compositions and
working out the details. This prescription is a stricture for
ensuring quality in construction. The bad effects (asubham)
I -
mentioned here are wastage of materials, time and money
and also inconvenience and anxiety. Lack of proper planing
and disregard for the prescriptions will lead to these
undesirable effects.
LOGIC FLOW IN CONSTRUCTION
Stanza- 16
tl\! oft q{l~
' •
J>:q I
til ' ·I r rmmr1trtt~~;r.;t::nr.~::r;rD"T";:tt_
'
"41\S·llff;J (;!JtiJf4tllJ.Q_~ ct~J fc)itlJI : II
'
There (in the matter of building construction),
different methods of investigation of the land, fixing the
cardinal directions, adopting propitious vithi for the
16
Manu ~t;;yalayac andrikab ha~yatn
building and the yard as well as details and pre cn~tion
for ancillary structures should be done sy tematJcally
(krameiJa ).
Commentary
This prescribes that the various steps in the construction
should be done systematically. A flow chart can be constructed
to guide the process as shown in fig.01.02
SELECTION OF LAND
Stanza- 17
:~ 11 tot (tJ: q; c~ ~&l <i:T A-iJ Ii! lJ I {f tot I 5011 Cftcl 4 I
~. fltll ~~~41 I
~'!tl~l
2_hc::rr fi)~ar &ft~l'ir
The land, rich with the presence of cattle, u
beings, flowering and fruit-bearing tree and tre
extruding milky sap, level, loping toward ea t, 1 o
producing good sound (while walking or tamping), ·· t
water flowing in clockwise dire f on cau i e
germination of seeds, well compacted, ha i p re \
source of water and with moderate c imate i · • •
•
very good. If the characteri tic are opp ·te t
mentioned) the land is aid to be bad and ·r •
mixed, it is said to be in between (good and b .
Commentary
Th e desirabl e biotic, terrain, hydrologic, and climatic
conditi ons are en umerated in this stanza.
_Of th e fo_u r classes of vastu -,land, building, vehicles,
furn1tu re (bhumi, harmya, y8na, sayana), the land is very
17
 Man u~ya,layac andrikab ha~y am Manu~ya.layacandrikabha~yatn

important because it is on this that the other vastus are built.

Start In the text 'Vastuvidya', it is prescribed that the investigation
' II of land should be done first and then only the building started
The need Utility I
(Ref.01.06).
for Safety
the building Aesthetics The selection of site is based on climatic considerations,
'-V
topography, geology (all pertaining to the land), the
Approaching Owner availability, purity and flow of water (all pertaining to the
- water) and fertility of soil, medicinal value and abundance
the acarya, Acarya
Selecting the Sthapati Sthapati of flowering and fruit-bearing trees (all related to the flora).
v In addition, richness of cattle life (related to the fauna) and
'
Investigation & Selection the neighbours (related to social interactions) also are to
Land
of Water be looked into.
Land (Bhiimi) Flora & Fauna
Based on these, Padmasamhita classifies the land into
'~
Fixing boundaries of plot, - four types (Ref.01.07). If the factors related to land, water
K$etravinyasa
selecting location, and flora are good and the land is situated adjoining a sea
Ma!J{Ialavinyasa
fixing buildable area or river, it is called bhadra. Land with favourable conditions,
Canons
if situated in hilly areas, is called purna and if located in the
~

Jesign o' t>ui l< ing

L·
Shape
plains is known as supadma. If the land - water - flora
and characteristics are unfavourable with extremes of climate,
Design
rocky surface, scarcity of water, wild animals or poisonous
Fixing Prime Dimensions Dimensions •

plants, the area is classified as dhumra.

\.1/

Foundation, Basement, Materials The land should slope downwards to east. This is
Wall, Entablature, Neck, Rules probably to ensure that the rising sun is visible from the
Roof, Finial Requirements house. 'Vastuvidya' mentions that the east slope and north
"'...,.
.I
slope are good (Ref.01.08).
Stages of Work of craftsman
Construction Land with loose soil, filled up ground v;ith voids, rocky
Co-ordination of work
II surfaces and marshy or wet conditions will not produce good
'
Ancillary sound when treaded upo'n or tamped. Hence the prescription
Social and Family
Structures Requirements that the land should give good sound when one walks over it
ensures good ground conditions. This is a quick field test.
"
~

I
Grhapravesa Soil which causes quick germination of seeds is good
FIG.01.02 CHART SHOWING THE LOGIC FLOW OF for vegetation. A level ground requires no levelling
CONSTRUCTION operations and hence economical.
18 19
 - -
Manu~~yalayacandrikabha~ya1n
For testing the consolidation of soil, a pit with one
square hasta area and one hasta depth is dug and then
filled up with the excavated soil. Excess soil (bahupamsu)
indicates good consolidation. This test is identical to the
field density determination used in modern geotechnical
engineering practice. Availability of perennial source of
potable water was a necessary condition in those times when
centralised water supply systems were not in vogue.
SITE TO BE AVOIDED
Stanza- 18
~"Tt.t::;:rt::rm ~ q-=>-1:1 \! '<=t CJ>) o11 -,:rr::7""Q'T1nT':;:t~_
' •
: x=t~a1
Cl Gtll ¥0ft2J ~ d I ~t';:r;:r":JT f4 ~I f4 ~ CR~ I~ ~ I I
Land with circular, semi-circular, triangular,
pentagonal, hexagonal, spear- like and of winnowing basket
shapes, formed like the back of fish, elephant and tortoise,
a~pearing like the face of a cow, having presence of ash,
cmder: husk, bones, hair, vermins and ant-hill, depressed in
th~ mid~le, or having cavities, foul-smelling and not-
onented In the cardinal directions, shall be avoided.
Commentary
Odd sha~es ar_e not good. A rectangular shapes with
south-north drmensron greater than west-east dimension is
prefe:red so th~t a square can be easily marked from it for
the sr_te analysrs based on padaviny8.sa or v7thiviny8sa
descnbed subsequently.
The ana.lysis of the plot is done generally on the basis
frrst method rs called padavinyasa and the second one is
2()
M anu~yalayac andrikab ha~yam
known as v7thivTny8sa. For this, the plot should be square.
Plots which are not square can be analysed by these
methods by taking a convenient square plot in it or, in the
case of small plots, by taking the largest square that can be
inscribed in the area. Thus it should be taken that the
prescriptions with regard to the shape given in this stanza
is only a general directive and not a strict condition.
•
The presence of ash, cinder, bones, hair etc. indicates
the probability of the land having been used for sacrificial
altars (yagabhum!) or as burial ground or as dumping
ground. Vermins and anthills can cause trouble either due
to the attack of vermins and termites or due to bad
foundation conditions. Depression in the middle will cause
stagnation of water. Cavities will make the foundation weak.
Foul smell may be due to decaying of organic matter and
indicates an unhealthy filled up area. So sites with all these
characteristics are to be avoided (Ref.01.09).
Since the building should face only one of the cardinal
directions, the sides of the plot should preferably be along
the cardinal directions. Plots with sides oriented to corner
directions (vidik) are not auspicious.
Thus the detailed prescriptions given in this stanza are
practical hints to avoid lands which cause problems in
analysing and developing them.
DESIRABLE AND UNDESIRABLE SLOPES OF LAND
Stanza- 19
e-;:c~i'llt;~r:rrrr.:tt '=rt::T::I-:TT'1::rTT;::I"T;::::1r::rr :::rt Sf> 1=1 IC:
'
~·111(1~·1ftll•lii~C1lll: I
'C1 tl ~ t51 ~·<II~~~~ Sl GI
, tlx~ttl+! II
21
 Man u~yalayac andrikab hafy am Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyam
•

The lands sloping in the eight directions, starting
from the one low in east and high in west, are called
gov[:thi, agnivithi, yamavithi, bhiitavithi, jalavithi,
nagavtthi, gajavithi, and dhanyavzthi. To those who occupy
such lands, these will give prosperity, loss of wealth, loss
of life, loss of property, poverty, loss of children, wealth
and welfare in that order.
Stanza- 20
!'let l~i~ I 'itll~d I tl~~
+t tlltl ~ d I et.;:r:r.r:lr;:rrB r;:r:::~ I and north is highly emphasised by vastu pundits. The
~~~;::r:;:r~ tl ~3ft
!'II iJ oI ~ I ~ ~ lllfi cl !'I ~ I ~=ttl d I I
' '
The land with central depression will cause out -
migration and that with raised middle will cause loss of
wealth and happiness. The land sloping (down) towards
south-east (Agni) corner and to north-west (Vayu corner)
will cause poverty.
Stanza- 21
+tanot:lttti tr~=xti 3'1~1i+t~ ~ ~~ ................... <~II~
'
' by a temple. This allows good drainage conditions. This is
ffl~'<511~ tl'!fUta&l ctt'6Ul fllld ~
' elaborated further in stanzas 29 and 30 of this chapter.
~tft~CJ>ltettCcht: ~I'!G ~ aa: 'r<!1 d>~,q 4><'i fllld II
' '
If the house is first built on land raised in the middle
and in the east, there will be prosperity for ten years. If
construeted on land high in south-east or south, there will
these periods, the result will be as mentioned earlier (in
stanzas 19 & 20).
Commentary
-
V8stuvidya also classifies the land into 16 types according
to the slope (fig.01.03). This may be to indentify the land with
different slopes or it may be merely to indicate the directions
from a reference point. In B.rhatsamhita, it is stated that slopes
in all cardinal directions are acceptable, provided of course the
drainage conditions are satisfactory. Ground slope towards east
importance given to ground slope may have mystical meaning;
it may as well be a system of classifying land by different names.
The weightage gives to different ground slope may also be a
means of fixing priority in site selection and thus a decision
making tool. The beneficial effect of ground slope, apart from
that of drainage, is to intercept solar radiation or to get protection
from it.
Brhatsamhita prescribes that the lands sloping towards
north, east, south and west are good for the brahmaras,
k$afriyas, vaisyas and sudras respectively.(Ref.01.1 0). This
is practically zoning different classes into definite areas around
the central Brahmasthala, which in villages used to be occupied
THE POSITION OF TREES IN THE COMPOUND
Stanza- 22
•
•
'l'"r'+.............. ere~T.T ~ sctl ill I --rn,~~-
f

be progress for 100 years, if the south-west corner is high, iiit ->TU '(] ft'l rq cii a'6 : ff t<1 -c.\J G1 sfit : 1
the prosperity will be for 1000 years and if the west side
c6l~lll ~~I ~ttl=<ifStttd~: ~&f~T:f . 'lf~l:
is high, there will be progress for 500 years. On other
slopes, the prosperity will be for 12, 8 or 6 years. After ~r:::r:::tt Sf> Jt I d I I
'
22 23
 ManusyalayacandrikabhasyaJn Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyam

Bakula (Mimusops elengi) and banyan tree (Ficus

beJzgale1zsis) in the east and udunzbara (F. racenzosa) and
• tamarind (Tanzarindus indica) in the south will bestow
prosperity. In the west, aswattha (F. religiosa) and
saptacchada (Alstonia scholaris) and in the north naga
(Mesua 1zagassariunz) and plaksa (F. nzicrocarpa) are
prescribed. Jack tree (Artocarpus heterophyllus),
•
arecanut palm (Areca catechu), coconut palm (Cocos
nucifera) and mango tree (Ma1zgijera indica) are especially
'15 ~ 1 propitious in the directions of east etc. (east, south, west,
N north) respectively.
•

Stanza- 23
NW
3TJtil~Sfi~lt~ CJ>~Rt iSI~I ~lff: l>lttiG!>IGl
E ·ll!ittr: : I
• ~=t •m(t> st Rt ~ Cf) r~ al =<* CJ rq ~ a :q 1.-il '3l'rT1~:rt:h'T-
'
E II
When located in positions opposite to what has been
I
mentioned (above), aswatha will cause fire, plaksa (will
1
........... J 10 ...........
9
cause) several types of insanity, banyan tree (will cause)
5. 9. YAMA 13. JALA
1.GAJA
., - GO
- blow by weapons of enemies, and udunzbara (will cause)
2. DIRGHAYUS 6. APATHA 1 0. ARGALA 14. PITAMAHA
3. DHANA 7. AGNI 11. BHUTA
- -
, , _ 15. NAGA
stomach trouble. They (such trees) and the trees which
•
4. PUNYAKRT
••
8. ROGAKRT
• 12·. SMASANA 16. SUPATHA •
are located at distances from the house less than their
FIG.01.03 CLASSIFICATION OF LAND ACCORDING TO SLOPE heights should be cut, even if they are of gold.
•
Stanza- 24

&t f4 CZCII'+f lll

~ttnr-rr~~~~~rnrr~~~~:l
'

_s
24
 Manu~ya.layacandrikabha~yam
Man usyizlayac andrikab ha~y am
•

On the two sides and rear of the building, Srivrksa, (Euphorbia neriifollia), piSticadruma (?papaya, Carica
•
(Gmelina arborea), bilwa (Aegle marmelos), abhaya papaya), hemadugdha (Argemone mexicana) are not
(Terminalia chebula), konna (Cassia fistula), Indian desirable any where. Moringa (Moringa oleifera) too is
gooseberry (Phyllanthus embilicca ), deodar (Cedrus deodar), undesirable inside the boundary.
I /
paliisa (Butea frontosa), asoka (Saraca asoca), sandal
PLAKSA MANGO
(Santalum album), punnaga (Calophyllum inophyllum), •
(F microcarpa) (Mangifera Indica)
asana (Pte rocarpus marsupium), canzpaka (Michellia -
NAGA
SAPTACCHANDA
champaka) and khadira (Acacia cateche) are propitious. (Ezhilampala (Mesua ferrea)
- Alstonia schlaris)
Similarly all varieties of plantains (Musa sp. ), jtiti (Myristica ~

fragrans), betel (Piper betel) etc. are good every where.

•
N /
ASWATTHA
COCONUT
(Locos nucifera) ( F - re/igiosa)
Stanza- 25
JACK
3RJ:~~I~It-<j C]lffi: q•H~d:O¥'-JI: ~icf~t~fA."'if ~IICf>l- BANYAN (Artocarpus
· (F- bengalensis) heterophyl/us)
~->il lffi: I
TAMARIND BAKULA
~=~il~l: : . JYq Cbllli- (lmli- Tamarindus (Mimusopas
Indica) elengi)
'(=(lfCJitll JtU11il~ q~~rq -:q ao: ~ictttl~l~,,ffis~ 11
ARECA UDUMBARA
The trees like jack tree have hardwood in the core (Areca catechu) (F. racemosa)

(antassara), tamarind, teak etc. have hardwood throughout FIG.01.04 RECCOMMENDED PLANTING OF TREES
the cross section, (sarvasara ), palm, coconut, areca etc. are AROUND A HOUSE
strong in the outer section (bahissara), nzoringa (Moringa
oleifera),saptacchada,sukataru (Albizia), kimkuka (Erythrina
variegata) etc. are softwoods (nissara). Out of these, the first
ones (hardwood inside) should be planted in the inner circle, ..................
.. . .
. . .... ........
............
•. •....
•..
.
•••••••••• •... •.•...•.. . •. .•...• 1 2 3 4
sarvasaras outside them and the rest outside both.
•
.............
•............
•• • ••• •••
............. ••

·.·.·.·.•
.• .....·.·.·.• .....·.•.······••·
t • • • • • • • • •
·~

• •
....·,.·.·.•.•.·
• •
.....•...•....•·.-·.......•
• •

Stanza- 26
~~~:h' ~:-::r;"~:-rr:::~rr.:.t-::r~ til II d Cb I :I •
•

~ : ~icf?l : II -
•
2. Sarvasara trees
1. Antassara
trees
3. Bahissara trees 4. Nissara trees
KaTaskara (Strychnos nux-vomica),aruskara (Semecarpus
anacardium ), kantakidruma (Flacourta jangomas ), ;lesnlataka
. - FIG.01.05 RELATIVE LOCATION OF TREES
(Cordia dichotoma), rudrak~a (Elacocarpus sparicus), pilu BASED ON THEIR STRUCTURE
(Salvadroa persica), nimba (Azadiracta indica), Snuhi

26
 Man u~yalayac andrikah ha~y a1n
Commentary (Stanzas 23,24,25 and 26)
These verses give the desirable and undesirable positions
of trees in the compound. The auspicious trees and their
positions are given in fig.01.04. Trees with thick foliage are to
be planted in the north side to resist the cold winds from north.
Trees which shed leaves (eg. tamarind) and trees without thick
foliage (eg. areca) are to be planted in the south side to allow
sunlight during winter months (when the sun is in the
southern hemisphere). Fruit-bearing trees are generally of
antassara type and can be planted near the building. Of
course, no tree should be planted very near the building
lest they cause damage to the building in case they fall.
Trees whose contact causes allergy (eg. aruskara- Ceru in
Malayalam) and certain trees which are not auspicious (eg.
karaskara -Strychnos nux- vomica), pisacadruma (Carica
papaya), cactus (Euphorbia nivulia) should not be planted
anywhere in the plot.
Depending on their structure, the trees are classified
into 4, according to the position of hard wood: antassara
(hardwood at core), bahissara (hardwood outer side),
sarvasara (hardwood throughout) and nissara (soft wood).
Antassara type of trees (eg. jack) can be planted nearest to
the house sarvasara trees (eg. tamarind), outside them and
the others far outside. The desirable positions are shown in
figure.01.05.
In India every star (naksatra) is assigned a tree
(appendix.1 ). It is believed that persons born under a particular
star should plant and protect the tree assigned to that star.
This ensured that different types of trees are protected, thereby
ensuring bio-diversity. Useful and auspicious trees like
srivrksa, amala, konna, candana can be planted on all
sides except the front side. Herbs like plantain, jasmine can
be planted anywhere because they are seasonal, very useful
and will not cause any damage, to the building by their fall.
28
RESTRICTIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF HOUSES
NEAR TEMPLES
•
Stanza- 27
•
~~CI~'i~~stc:l ~~o) TJT-
: I
Pl~<t~cl~ +tj'itiJ~ c;ffl1uls"!ts~ d'(IIJ-
~ath:ci ~tefll~ PICbet=tftl dG·~?I d{qiG~I\Jtl+t II
'
Houses in the rear and left side of Visnu
,. and in the
front and right sides of Kali, Narasimha, Siva and all other
fierce deities will cause misfortunes. If the deity is placed
in a low location, houses in the right and front sides are
not auspicious and, therefore, high position (of houses
with respect to the temple ) is not desirable. For those
who depend on 'Him' (deity), proximity (of house) is
permissible but only in other locations (viz. locations
other than that indicated as bad).
Commentary •
The prescriptions given in this stanza are probably to
restrict the buildings to certain specified sectors. In India,
after the 5th century AD, temples used to be the centres of
settlements. Hence the zoning regulations are prescribed
relative to the temple. This has the advantage that the rules
will be strictly followed because of their link with the temple.
For obvious reasons, the restriction need not be applied
strictly for those who work in temples, but even they should
avoid close proximity within restricted zones. The general
rule is that the rear and left sides of saumyamurtt'is (gentle
I
deities) and front and right sides of ugramUrtt is (fierce
deities) are to be avoided. Houses elevated from the location
of deities are also not auspicious.
29
 •

•
•
Manusyalayacandrikabha$yam Man U$yalayac andrikab ha~y am
•

OTHER ZONING RESTRICTIONS Lands which have grass varieties such as kusa, darbha
• Stanza- 28 (lmperata bipinnata), durva (Cynodond actylon), akasa
•
(Arundo donax ), length equal to or 1/8, 1/6 or 1/4 more
&i?ll~~ ctl clt~\ilclfEI ~cna1 4tttJ II'! Jnt0- ..• •

than the width, (with soil having) white, red, yellow and
!11 '"I Icft ~I 'i J1 ct If:Q1 Cf> ¥Of q Cb ~, d. ~ Cf>tll
:.,:)
'D"t::;:r:t I •
•
•
black colour, smells of ghee, blood, cooked rice, alcohol and
+t ~ ~ C: T:.t1~-:::r:j· ~=t 4 err have sweet, bitter, sour, hot tastes, are good for brahmanas
•
an~ other categories in the order (brO.hmaiJ.as, k~atriyas,
o~•IIG'Rj;;>Jd T.f ~.oclf4fEI~ti ~IilJa Odi4lllll vaisyas and siidras)
For residences, close proximity to paddy field, Stanza- 30 •

mountain, temple, ocean, river, hermitage, cattle-shed etc. I 14 !'II 0 Ii C'\~~~"""'"'f\T~........,.1-.-, ~:q Id
.........- - -...-

is dangerous in several ways. Houses equal to or lower than '

the height of the (local) temple are very propitious. House Sll~lill <lJ~oftcill i1(>4G&J'('I~idl ~: "iifi§UiHilf I
taller than that (temple) and two-storied houses are not C1cd~>~1f%at · qtG\lit~i
desirable near it (temple).
m ttlcl~ d~l tlli~dtl~ufi ilt;:y~t ti4C1\Tlll: II
•
' ~
Commentary • •
For brah111a1)as, land which is high in the south and
'•
low in the north and having udumbara tree is good. Land
Building of houses near oceans, mountains, paddy fields
which is low in the east and high in the west and having
and rivers is not safe. The security of the structure and its I\
resi~e~ts may be the major consideration in placing this
aswattha is propitious for k~atriyas. Land which is high in
r.estnct1on .. The restriction with regard to temple, hermitages, the east and low in the west with vata tree is good forvysyas.
frelds etc. ts for protecting such places from the encroach- Same type of land (as that forvysya)if.low in south is good
me~t by men. Proximity to cattle-sheds is not good from for sudras if it has plaksa
• •
tree. Otherwise, it is to be avoided
sanrtary and health considerations. The prohibition against by all. ·
the buildings taller than the near-by temple is understandable
for nobody should have the arrogance to go above God. Commentary

DESIGNATION OF SITES FOR DIFFERENT CLASSES Classification of land for the 4 categories of people is
•
shown in table.01.01. The classification is based on the
Stanza- 29 habits and work of the different classes. Perhaps this was a
broad system of designation of land into 4 types based on
the shape, soil type and vegetation conveniently categorised
as brahmaaa's land, k~atriya's land etc. The nomenclature
was only an aid for prioritising. Later it came to be adopted
for the four varnas into which Indian society was divided.
•
This however, served as a way of zoning of land for different

30 31
 Man u~yaJayac andrikab ha;y a1n
varnas (see also the commentary on stanza 21 of this •
Stanza- 32
•

chapter). It may be viewed a·s a reservation which will not

be encroached by others. Ksatriyas may require land for •
&l1f ~I<:Cllttt:fi! ~~Ill ~~t-=4 CJ~ttto:t
kalari (training) and hence have land longer than that for
'f<:CU ff:tilt . ~d'! tf>l ...w--.-~ ~ G~II I
brahmana. Vaisyas require land for drying and storing grains ' I

etc. and sudras may require land for farming, work sheds I fchuRwtta: ~cftQJ fciR.lq~a \itlJlG
etc. Hence these two categories get larger plots. The '
prescriptions also ensured that one social group will not
displace another from its habitat, by power or money. After excavating a pit (1 hasta square and 1 hasta deep),
•
place a raw earthen vessel filled with grains and cover it
TABLE.01.01
with another earthen vessel. Pour ghee and with chanting
CLASSIFICATION OF LAND ACCORDING VARNAS ofhymns, light wicks of white, red, yellow and black colours
Charactertistic Brahmanas Ksatriyas Vysyas Sudras respectively pointing to the four cardinal directions starting
with east (in clockwise direction). The land is suitable for
Herb Kusa Oharbha Durva Aka sa
that category whose wick continues to burn after some time.
!-~. Length to If all wicks burn, it is suitable for all.
Width ratio 1 11 /8 11 /6 11 /4
Stanza- 33
Colour of soil White Red Yellow Black
Smell of soil Ghee Blood Cooked rice Alcohol '
Taste of soil Sweet Bitter Sour Hot ~IG~OlJlJRf: ~1{ ~t:FHti ltEI·lt~ ~f~tttt I
Ground sloping ~a<=~~ '<if~a · -4~Fw~d
down to North East West South : II
•
In the pit filled with water place flowers like droiJa. If
OMENICAL TESTS OF SITE SELECTION the flowers travel clockwise, it is propitious; it they travel
Stanza- 31 anti clock wise, it is not good. If the flower settles at any
cardinal direction, it is good, but if it settles in the angular
v .. j(~lfaclCJuf41lJI I direction, it is not good. Knowing these good and bad omens,
•

·Jt.t;:r ~~ <ld~ II the wise one should level the ground.

Commentary (Stanzas 31,32 and 33)
If the characteristics of colour, smell, taste are
•

mixed, such a land should be avoided by all. Land with The stanzas show that much importance was attached
unknown characteristics should be tested with omens to selection of the site. For the selection of land, three
in the night. processes are prescribed: reconnaisance, investigations and

32
 Man u~yalayac andrikab hasy am Manu~ydlayacandrikabha~yam
examining the omens. It has been mentioned in stanza 18 is also not ~related to any particular va,..na
I~.
All th · d.
ese rn 1cate •

that odd shapes are not desirable. Undulated ground and
ground with central mount or depression are also not good
because these may cause stagnation of water, additional
expenses in levelling etc.
Investigation of the herbs and trees will indicate the
fertility of the soil. The time required for germination of seeds
will show moisture content and the extent of pests. The
presence of rodents, reptiles, birds etc. in the site also will
give an indication regarding its suitability. Sthapathi, who
should be well versed in all sastras should be able to judge
the quality of land from these observations. Similarly, the
sthapati is expected to walk around in the site to find out
that omenrcal tests were a later addition to the · f
·t • scrence o
sr e se 1ect1on.
•
.It has also been stated by Var8hamihira in Brhatsamihita
t~at 1f the ow~er likes a site, then the investigations can be,
.'
• I
. dispensed w1th and the site accepted (Ref.01.11 ). This
me~ns that .the. owner's intuition and also his belief that the
•
parttcular s1te IS suitable for achieving his wishes are of
paramount importance. Moreover, even a site with
I undesi.rable characteristics can be made better by levelling
• operations and landscaping including planting suitable trees
~nd herbs. Therefore, Var8hamihira may be taken as a guide
1n the present day context in the mattter of selection and
• •

whether there are cavities in the soil. development of the site for building .

The test for finding out consolidation has been REFERENCES •

mentioned in stanza- 19. Similarly permeability is tested by •

• •

filling the excavated pit (of 1 hasta cube) with water and
observing the decrease in water level after the sthapatiwalks •

•••• . .... ...... I B.S., Llll - 1

100 steps backwards and returns to the pit.
•

The examination of the omens is done in addition to 01.02 ";{ -:q d$11 -;:r -;r Tf ={)Si~:q di\!Cbl: I
the elaborate reconnaisance and investigations. This may
•
~a-gr.;n ~\!I cl4 ~:q~ ~Cb\!'iu) II M.P.
be due to fact that in those days, when all aspects could not '
be tully investigated and rationally assessed, recourse to ' '
01.03
omens was necessary to assure oneself with the correctness •
' , ..
of what one is doing. It may however be noted that the
omenical tests were given only low importance as compared ••

to observation and investigations. There are many anomalies

in the omenical tests. The colours of the wicks for example • • • • • • • • • • ••••• V.V., XV -18
do not match with the directions of ground slopes
recommended for the four varf)as. The white coloured wick
r~co~mend~d f?r brahmins is placed pointing east
d1rect1ons, wh1ch 1s recommended for k$afriyas and so on .
• • • • •• • • • • •• • • • • ••••
The flower test is to be analysied for motion (clockwise and
anticlockwise), and also for its final position. This position : I M. M., V-15 to 18

34
35
 Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyam
• •

01.05 : xi ~ CJ ~II ~"?I \TSf : •• . . I M.S., 11-12

'
•
01.06 ANALYSIS OF SITE
V.V., II - 1
•
•
01.07 ~q<f'"ll ~[~Chi LJ\~DIJ tiT I
rl"tr:lc;::r;::r~ dl ~qj st>4 on q~ ~II~ a II P. S., I - 22 •

01.08 \{~ CIG:"'CI I • •

\3t1'!1 tl~~l ~~Jdl II V.V., II - 3 - - •

f'lD t j vVf-fUviltj'~.ra) povn:tfj
01 .09 ~ &f> q I<11 ~ ~ q cll i=htlcrrr;:;Dt;~~ I
•

'
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••• • • • • • ••••

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••

M.M., II -1 0 - 18

01.10 \3~lll~l(1CJ~~ f4sttcfl~j >IGf&iul~CI I

: ~i'!CI?I tf:;:r'Jcr::n-'frr'I]' II
'
B.S., Llll - 61

01.11 dft'fll 'JICIRf ~1{ <IX~ ~ <Jfftti li;:fl'{Ji\i I

B.S., Llll.65

36
 Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha.syam

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig. • Page CHAPTER-2
02.01 AVANATA FOR LEVELLING 39
S~211ll:
02.02 FIXING CARDINAL DIRECTIONS BY SUN-SHADOW
METHOD 43
ANALYSIS OF SITE
I

02.03 FIXING CARDINAL DIRECTIONS BY ALTERNATE

METHOD 44
02.04 REGENTS OF EIGHT DIRECTIONS 47
02.05 IMPORTANT REFERENCE LINES OF MAt:Jf?ALA 47
- LEVELLING THE GROUND
02.06 FIXING VASTUK$ETRA 51
02.07 DIVING MANDALA INTO SECTORS AND Stanza -1
• •
51
SUBSECTORS
ll· ~DIJct.-:tdiR.-:tt T.J -
02.08 STAGGERING BUILDING LOCATIONS BY
RESTRICTING TO SPECIFIED SECTORS 52 ;ft~~ ill~ ~~cp~)\tl~ c;:<t ~l't1> CJ>~Itlilta'!_ I
02.09 PROCEDURE FOR LOCATING BUILDING
IN SMALL PLOTS 52 n-:::t'"G · · : st>'ict~uc;~ ac;mf:Tta-
- - , '
02.10 MANDALA ANALYSED AS 9 VITHIS
• • - ,
59
dll'{i <!dd~ , II
02.11 MANDALA CONCEIVED AS 4 VITHIS
• •
59
•
02.12 NAVAVARGAPADAVINYASA (9X9 GRID) SHOWING Let one, well-versed in the techniques, level the ground
BUILDABLE AREA & PADA- DEVATAS 62 well, either by levelling equipments like A- fra1ne (avanata)
02.13
-
ASTAVARGA PADAVINYASA (8X8 GRID) 63
. / - etc. or by water level. Then he should make a gnomon
02.14 DASAVARGA PADAVINYASA (10X10 GRID) 63
(sanku) of length equal to half hasta and diameter 2 angula
02.15 MARMAS OF 9X9 GRID 68
at bottom, gradually tapering to one angula at top, in
02.16 MARMAS OF 8X8 GRID 69
circular shape, with its top shaped like a lotus bud.
02.17 MARMAS OF 10X10 GRID 69
02.18 AVOIDING MARMAVEDHA ILLUSTRATED 72 Commentary
,.
02.19 VASTUPURUSAMANDALA
' ~ . 78
After choosing the PLUMB
•
FRAME
site, the sthapati should BOB
offer prayer to God
with inclamations of
'
svasti and jaya (Ref.
02.01 ). Then the site
should be levelled and FIG.02.01
the directions marked. AVANATA FOR LEVELLING

39
 Manu $yalayacandrikab ha~yam
The first half of this stanza describes the levelling
operation (samlkaraQa) using instruments or water line. The
common levelling instrument used is the A-frame (avanata)
(fig.02.01 ). The texts describe in detail the procedure for
making the A frame. The A frame should be calibrated with
reference to the water level in a pit. For this a pit is filled
with water and two poles are fixed in the pit such that their
tops are in level with the still water level. The two-inclined
limbs of the frame are placed on these poles such that the
vertex is at top. Then from the vertex a cord with a plumb
bob is suspended. The line where the cord touches the base
is marked by a chisel.
Manu ~yaJayac andrikab ha~y am
Commentary
The fixing of the gnomon (sanku) is called sankus-
thapana. As this is the first act to be done in the construction,
it is considered as important. Moreover fixing the gnomon
is necessary in determining directions, which is basic to
proper orientation of building. Therefore auspicious time is
, -
selected for sankusthapana. The fixing of the gnomon and
marking the cardinal directions are to be done either by the
•
sthapati himself or by his disciple. Mayamata recomends
the morning time in suklapak~a of uttarayana (Dec.23 to
June 22)(Ref.02.03) for this act.

Either the entire land is levelled or at least an area of 1 FIXING THE CARDINAL DIRECTIONS
dao(ja square (2.88m x 2.88m) should be levelled in the Stanza- 3
middle of the plot for s'ankusthapana (tanmadhye
daf)c;iamatram va). The gnomon described in this stanza is -~-1~-~~
.....iS-.. . . .II"""''"'tl......l !lr"'l"nY"''-r+ \Cl Cl ~ d ~ GQt S ~Cb fihq I
for demarkating the centre of the plot and for use in
t1'1';T.~ qf~~'ix~i 'iltti ?) . I
determining the cardinal directions as described in the
subsequent stanzas. The height of 112 hasta prescribed is -qr~:q Ifit S~!'T'Y'C~Ch;:r"m"' "-CJ f4 ~ Ill I~- Cb dt ~ d ~l '!-
the height above ground. The actual length should be more '
than this for fixing in the ground. Mayamata describes that •
lll· <l+ffl I~
sanku may be of ivory, sandal wood, khadira wood (Acacia With a calm mind, the intersections of the shadows
catechu), Sami wood (Propsopis julisflora) or saka ( Tectona of the top of the gnomon with the circle should be marked
gramdis) wood (Ref.02.02). This only means that strong
on the west side in the morning and similarly on the east
material should be used.
( - side in the evening. Then next day also, the intersection
SANKUSTHAPANA should be marked on the western side. After that, divide
Stanza- 2 the distance between the two points on the west side into
3 parts and mark the one-third point nearest to the
'(ji! \I If I previous day's intersection. This is the right point there
~Cl~llld II (i.e. west).
Stanza- 4
After describing a circle with a radius equal to twice
the length of the gnomon and correctly observing the centre ...._.....~ • ......n-~-TT"MM'"rl-::1' ~~ q~Cf>f&tld "lRf I
'""". '
of the circle, here the gnomon has to be fixed firmly. ~r-:::r:-::~-n:n~::r;r.r::nl-rr --~I"""Y"'""ITTTTwt .....-.-..&~ I JOt II
'

4() 41
 Manu~yiilayacandrikabha$yam Manu~yaJayacandrikabha~yaJn
Thus what have been decided on the previous and next
••
days, the line joining these two points will correctly generate
• •

the east and west directions. •

-
Stanza- 5 2M

~ ~?It<~ lf~ "lJCf d6H'J\?i dGI§- SUN'S •

•• ••
lE
PATH
+,.,. . . - -- 1M

~~·•ta)s4fl•ll'i·d~ld'i~ ~T.Iilct CJd~n:i T.T ~'iii. I

•
// I PGNOMON
/ /
I /
I / \ 12 ANGULA HEIGHT
I / \
ddlllld . • /

' -- - --
I/

lllHilGniJ~ ~~ ~T.Illtj ll'i'q?i dR(iltli'1f·ZI II • -...._ -- __:::;.;~--

--
Here the line marked thus in the middle of the site •

(k~etra) is called Brahmasutra. In its middle, two circles

intersecting each other should be constructed. Through the ..
•

centre line of fish-shaped figure obtained from the

CIRCLE 24 ANGULA RADIUS
intersection of the circles, a cord should be stretched in the
M<mNtNG SHADOW
south-north directions. This is known as Yanzasutra.~ • f OF FIRST DAY

MORNING SHADOW
Commentary (Stanza 3,4 and 5) · EVENING SHADOW
OF SECOND DAY r
OF FIRST DAY
The procedure for marking the cardinal directions
described in stanzas 3 and 4 is shown in fig. 02.02. After
levelling the ground, a gnomon (sanku) of height (above
the ground) half hasta (36cm) is driven into the ground (A).
With P as centre and one hasta radius, a circle is described
on the ground. The points where the shadows of the tip of
the pole touch the circle in the forenoon and in the afternoon
are marked. The line joining these two points (W 1 ,E 1 ) gives
the approximate W-E directions. Due to the declination of
the sun (uttarayana and dak~if}ayana), the shadows of the ..
tip of the pole do not fall on the same points next day. In
order to get the correct direction, the point where the shadow
of the tip of the pole touches the circle next day morning FIG.02.02 FIXING CARDINAL DIRECTIONS BY SUN-SHADOW METHOD
(W2 ) is also noted. If the sun is in uttarayana, this point will
be to the south of the precious days' point and if the sun is
-
in dak$if)ayana this point will be to the north of the last day's

42 43
 Man u~yalaya c andrikab hii.~y atn Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yatn
•
point. In either case, the distance between W and w is
2
divided into 3 parts and the point W nearer \o W a t a
distance equal to one-third of the dist~nce W W is loined
to E 1 to get the W-E direction. The shift of the p~int by 1/3
1
N NORTH • •

I • corresponds to 120o movement of the sun due to declinations

If
I I dictated by the geometry of the sanku and the circle and is
I I
II
a good refinemennt (sUk$mTkaraQa) on fixing the E-W line.
II I •
The S-N direction is then marked using geometric principles.
I I
• I I The W-E line is called Brahmasutra and the S-N line is called
I I Yamasutra .
I
~~~-t-l 36 ANGULA RADIUS

I
I Tantrasamuccaya describes another method for fixing
I
I
I I
I • the directions (Ref.02.04) (fig.02.03). In this also, a pole of
I
I I 12 angula height is fixed at centre P. Then circles of radius
I
I '__...----; 24 ANGULA RADIUS
112 hasta, one hasta and 1112 hasta are described with P as
I
I
I I
I centre. The points where the shadow of the tip of the pole
• I I
I
I
I falls on these 3 circles are marked S 1 , S2 , S 3 in figure 02.03.
I I
I I With these 3 points as centres, 3 circles, each of half hasta
I I ~-; 12 ANGULA RADIUS
I
I
I radius, are drawn. Intersections of adjacent circles will give
I I
2 fish shapes. The front and rear, (agra and puccha), points
1 I
I 4/ (1 and 2; 3 and 4) of the same fish figures are joined and
s1 "'"'- ----:1-.-+-·-- '-J---.. . . . . . . extended to intersect at N. The line joining P and N will give
PGNOMON
1 the S-N direction the W-E line is drawn perpendicular to it.
I 12 ANGULA HEIGHT
I
I
I I •
I I
I
I
I
I SHADOWS
ClRCLES OF 12A I
I OF GNOMON
RADIUS •

-.................__--J 5 SOUTH

FIG.02.03 FIXING CARDINAL DIRECTIONS BY ALTERNATING METHOD

Then mark points at equal distances from the centre
on the four sides on these two lines (sutras ). With these
points as centres, draw four circles of san1e diameter.
Here througl1 the intersection of the four circles, there
44 4-
 Man u§yalayac andrikab ha~y am Manu~yaJayacandrikabha~yam

will be 4 fish shapes in the corners with their front (agra)

points in N-E (Siva) and S-E (Agni) corners. Here through N -KUBERA
these (fish figures), two (diagonal) lines are to be drawn.
-~-
Also the square (abdhyasra) (should be completed). NW -MARUT NE-ISANA

Commentary
\ -
The lines inclined at 45° to the Brahmasutra and
Yamasutra are called rajjus. Literally rajju means rope and , W- VARUNA E-MAHENDRA
. 1-------
sutra means cord. The use of rajjus will be described
subsequently. The major diagonals are called karQas. This
stanza describes the method of drawing the diagonals.
SW -NIRRT SE -AGNI
•
The four cardinal directions (dik) and the four corner •

directions ( vidik) are each assigned to a specific regent

(Lokapala) as shown in figure 02.04. It has been stated S- YAMA
earlier that square plots are desirable for .constructing
FIG.02.04 REGENTS OF EIGHT DIRECTIONS
buildings. If the site is not square, a square of the desired N
dimensions should be demarkated with the Brahmasutra and
Yamasutra as the co- ordinate axes. This is the building
plot (vastuk$etra). The major lines of this VastumaQcjala
are shown in fig.02.05.
,
The rajjus are the diagonals including karoasutra and 1
m.rtyusutra (see fig.02.05). As already stated, rajju literally
w ~-------
· -~~--~~~ E
means a rope and sutra means cord. Here the square site 5
is defined with reference to the two axes, the Brahmasutra
and the Yamasutra. The point of intersection of the qxes is
the origin or focus (Brahmanabh1). The square is marked
by lines parallel to the axes at equal distances from the
origin. The bounding lines of the square are called s
paryantasutra. The diagonals are called kar(Jasutras and -
8- BRAHMANABHI
-
{1) BRAHMASUTRA
-
(2) YAMASUTRA
indicate the corner directions. The circle inscribed in the (3) PARYANTASUTRA (4) NAGASUTRA (5) SWLYAS A
. square is called naga (snake) sutra. The four sides of square (6) KAR!:JASUTRA (7)
-
MflTYUSUTRA
inscribed in the circle are called ~ulasutras.
FIG.02.05 IMPORTANT REFERENCE LINES OF MANDALA
------------------------------------------- ·
46 47
 Manu~yalayacandrikab ha~yam
Manu .)'yalayacandrikab ha$y a1n

LOCATING THE BUILDING related to god of death), will cause death and the vayavya,
(NW) quarter, called asurakhanda (sector related to
Stanza .. 7 demons), is to be despised, but can be accepted by vysyas
(trading class) under certain conditions.
Commentary (Stanzas 7,8 and 9)
• These 3 stanzas describe the procedure for dividing
' the area into sectors and assigning specific sectors for
:II building the houses. In large plots, a suitable square area
is marked at a convenient location (fig.02.06a). For small
areas of width less than 32hasta, the entire area is to be
(kha~zf[a) by the two sutras with their fronts at east and
taken as the plot (fig.02.06b).
north,p;ahmins and others should construct their houses
in th~ is a (NE) quadrant, or nirrti (SW) quadrant. If the Larger areas are divided into 4 quadrants (khandas)
plot IS very large, each quadrant is to be further divided by the Brahmasutra and Yamasutra. If the resulting
into 4 sub-divisions and both the NE sub-division of SW quadrants are very large (more than 64 hasta width), each
quadrants is to be sub-divided again into 4 units (upakhanda)
qua~r~nt and SW sub-division of NE quadrants are •

auspiCIOUS.
as shown in figure 02.07.
The NE quadrant, isanakhanda, marked as 1 is called
manusyakhanda and is believed to bestow welfare. The SW
I quarter marked as 2 is called devakhanda. These two are
'
Tt f5f4~ ~'! IOIIJI II auspicious for putting up houses while the other two
' quadrants are not good. But in unavoidable situations, the
When the plot is divided into 4 quadrants, the isa NW sector marked as 3 be accepted for putting up houses.
(NE) quadrant is called 111a1zu~akha!lPa (sector related to TheSE sector marked 4 is not good for houses. When the
humans) and will cause prosperity to house. The 1zirrti sectors are again subdivided the (SW subsector of the NE
(SW) quadrant is named devakha(l{ia (sector related· to quardant marked 12 and the NE subsectcr of SW quadrant
gods) and will cause desired results. These two quadrants marked 21 are considered to be auspicious).
are auspicious for houses for human beings. Restricting the location of buildings in certain specified
Stanza- 9 sectors is probably to stagger the houses about the street
in order to avoid crowding and to provide ventilation and
3flt~li~Yo\S liJ:tfi~ld ~~~-rr· :q~~~CJG4itad I
' privacy (fig.02.08).
• Cf)CII fq ~ (Rf
' ' Brhatsamhita summarises the dimensions of plots
The tig1zeya (SE) quadrant, called yamakha~z{ia (sector (Ref.02.05). These are shown in table 02.01.

49
48
 •

M an'!JyaJayac andrikab ha~yam •

Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~yam
DESIRABLE SIZES OF PLOTS FOR DIFFERENT
CLASSES OF PEOPLE
Class Width of the plot in Hasta Width to length ratio
' •
Brahm ana 32 28 24 20 16 1:11/10 •
•

Ksatriya
•
28 24 20 16 1:11/8 •
N N
LARGEST ,.,..,.,.,,_,., ~~"'
Vaisya 24 20 16 1: 1 1/6 SQUARE
I
•
Siidra 20 16 1: 1 1/4 E
w E
Candala
• • 16 1: 1 1/2 •

When plots of less than 32 hasta width are divided into s-

4 khandas, the individual khandas will be less than 16 hasta b SMALL PLOT
• • LARGE PLOT
a
in width. Hence such plots are considered as small plots
(alpak$etra) and the entire plot is taken as house plot FIG.02.06 FIXING VASTUKSETRA
(grhamarJcjala). In such cases, the centre of the house •

(grhanabhi) marked G should be in the auspicious sector t

(iSana, Nir[ti, or vayu) (fig.02.09).

SQUARING THE SITE
Stanza -10 N
N
•
ll¥flG~II~I- •

S$1'it}acl ~ 1 ®
•
12
•

In the sites suitable for k~atriyas etc., after making

(1) MANU~YAKHANQA (2) DEVAKHANQA
the site square by leaving the elongations (ayanza) at the (3) VAYUKHANQA (4) AGNIKHAN{JA
south and north ends, two lines have to be assumed with DIVIDED INTO 4 QUADRANTS QUADRANTS SUBDIVIDED

their rear ends (mula) atnirrti (SW) corner and vQyu (NW) •

-/

corner and their front ends (agra) at isana (NW) and agni FIG.02.07 DIVIDING K~ETRA INTO KHANQAS .(SECTORS) AND
(SE) corners. These lines are called rajjus. UPAKHANQAS (SUB-SECTORS)

Commentary

In Stanza 29 of chapter 1, it has been prescribed that

5() 51
•
 Man u~yoJayac andriklib hiifY am
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam

the length to width ratio should be 11 /8, 11 /6 and 11 /4 for

k~atriyas, vysyas and sudras respectively. From these
rectangles, a square area has to be taken as the vastuksetra
(site) by leaving the elongations (ayama) which are generally
/'
•
BUILDING IN /SANAKHANDA 3 1 in the north and south ends, i.e, the longer side of the
N-S ROAD I · { rectangle is in the S-N direction.
2 4
3 , 3 , Square ( caturasra) is a primary shape in Vastusastra.
W-E ROAD The four sides of the square are oriented in the four cardinal
l 1
directions like the four faces of Brahma. Hence this is called
Brahmamandala. This shape is the basis for evolving the
s .r 4 design of towns, villages, buildings, fire-altars, etc. The site
BUILDING IN NIRRTIKHANDA ..._.
analysis is based on a square ksetra. After the analysis, the
deductions can be transferred to other shapes.

FIG.02.08 STAGGERING BUILDING LOCATIONS BV In olden times, the portions of land left out at the south
RESTRICTING TO SPECIFIED SECTORS. end is used as ground for cremating the dead and that on
the northern side used for disposing the placenta after a
N child's birth. It is believed that the god of birth (Soma) keeps
•
guard in the north side and god of death (Yam a) on the
south side.

ILL- EFFECTS OF SUTRAVEDHA

I
• Stanza- 11

•N
0
~l?t ~ ~ G\ii(l ~ ftl TI'Tl~:tt'rT:?' n'2'Tt;~ I
•
~1tt~fd!lll~1o1a =~u~1111~dls~~ 1fqf:u : II
'
If the centre line (ntadhyasiitra) of the houses etc. other
G- G~HA NA BHI than that of a square-shaped catussala (buildings with
0 - BRAHMANABHI
"-
1 - ISANAKHANDA
central courtyards) passes through the front of rear ends of
•
N - NIRRTIKHANI)A the siltras and rajjus, inauspicious results will occur.
FIG.02.09 PROCEDURE FOR LOCATING BUILDINGS IN SMALL PLOTS Commentary
The Brahmanabhi is considered as centre of maac;Jala
and the segments of sDtras or raj} us on the sides are called
rear and front ends . The passing of the centre-line of the
52
53
•
 Manu~yaJayacandrikabha$yam
building through the rear or front ends of the two sutras and
two rajjus is called vedha (crossing). It is prescribed that
when the buildings are designed, vedha should be avoided.
This is for marking the two sets of lines (sutras and rajjus)
without confusion or difficultly during the construction and
during subsequent works of repair, alteration or addition.
In the case of square catussala, with square ankana and
symmetry on both axis, built in the vastukhaf}(ia, this is not
possible.,_ It is impossible to design the corner houses
( vidiksalas) without their diagonal axes passing through the
ends of the rajjus. It is also not possible to align the side houses
"-
{diksalas) without their centre lines coinciding with the centre
lines of the ankaoa (central courtyard). However, such vedha
could be still avoided by shifting the centre of the building
(qrhanabh1) marginally from the brahmanabhi along brahma-
sutra and yamasutra. This shift is called gamana.
Vedha should not occur not only for the main house,
but also for cowshed, gate house, well, etc. The centre line
of columns and that of the wall plates also should not be
vitiated by vedhad0$8.
Stanza- 12
!'filii~ u;~~r: ~=lll~ Cittq;cl . . . . . . ~oon+o.
........ ~~ I
'
: ~'CI ~~til· ll ~ l·lll Ell : I I
The results ofvedha in the east side etc. (east, southeast,
south, southwest, west, northwest, north and north east)
are separation from spouse, leprosy, hartn from enemies,
death of children, loss of wealth, rheumatism, destruction
of family and loss of grains, in that order
Commentary
. The ill effects of vedha are highlighted to emphasise
the Importance of avoiding vedha. In case of vedha in east
end, the ill-effect is separation from the spouse. The bad-
54
effects when the vedha occurs in the other 7 ends are given
in the clockwise order from SE to N E. The objective appears
to be the creation of the fright in the mind of the builder/
owner, so that he will be taking all care to avoid vedha.
Clearly the vedha rule has a vital technological significance.
I
THE WIDTH I THICKNESS OF SUTRA
Stanza- 13
I &) ?I ~:a ~ II ~ (5I o~ ::rrr:rh"t":::~"\T.J'tl::ll';:Jt=J"n:;::;:r:c!='lT;'1kt ~ -
'
t4ct>~:rti~Cbi~ta: ~~~~ f4afij~~ ~~~en: Sl~<til 1
' '
a \I~ lCitfct>t~f41%a ~1aq~ tilCbCJ>ltd
f4 ~'II~ -;r.r:::::~~rhrt?rl~~t$q ~r)~"Tt : II
When the isakhanda• •
etc. of the ksetra
•
is divided into
9x9 grid, the width of the sutra andrajjus is taken as 1/12
of the division (pada). Similarly, in a 10x10 division, the
width of the sutra and rajju is 1/8 of one of the 100
divisions and when divided into 8x8 grid, it will be 1/16
of a division.
Commentary
, The square plot (maQQa/a) is divided into a grid of
several cells (padas) for specifying the locations. A
mao(jala of one single cell is called sakalamanr;tala and
that of 2x2 cells is called pecakamangala. A mar;cjala of
9 (3x3) cells with one central cell and 8 outer cells is
called plfha. Similarly, grids of up to 1024 (32x32) cells
(indrakanta) are described in Mayamata (Ref.02.06) The
central point (Brahmanabhl) can , similarly, be considered
as a null grid of OxO cells . Generally grids smaller than
7x7 divisions are adopted for altars , seats etc. and grids
larger than 11 x11 are used for temples and settlements.
The grids recommended for house are:
55
•
 •

Manu~yaJayacandrikabhii~yatn
Man uvalayac andrikab ha~y am
7 x7 sthandila mandala Vastuvidya says that vedha of the centre lines of houses
• • •• •
cause destruction of the race (Ref.02.07)
8x8 . . .'
manduka ..
·mandala
- .

9X9 parama$ayika mar(la/a
1Ox1 0 asana maf)Qala
11 x 11
-
sthaniya marC/ala
•
Out of these, the 8x8, 9x9 and 1Ox1 0 grids are most
commonly used for designing buildings all over the land.
For these three grids, the width of the sutra and rajju (grid
lines and diagonal lines) is taken as 1/16, 1/12 and 1/8 of
the width of a cell width respectively.
Specifying the width of the grid lines and diagonal lines
is necessary to avoid sutravedha described in stanzas 11
and in several subsequent stanzas. Vedhadosa •
is assumed
to be absent when the centre line of buildings as described
in stanza 11 and the constructions to be described later are
outside the specified width of the sutra.
Stanza- 14
: I
~~: =<i'i=<=(l&l(t) CIG"i;ftlfl '!G\JC{t~Tl cfiluuC'I~Cbulm~ II
In all houses, the vedha between each other of the centre
lines of houses, cowshed, ancillary buildings, courtyard, well,
tank, door, etc. and between the rajjus and the kar1zasutras
of corner houses should be avoided. · Commentary
Commentary
This stanza is really an elaboration of what has already
been stated in stanza 11. The avoidance of vedhadosa
should be observed not only between the cardinal sutras
and the centre line of the sa/as of the house but also between
the centre lines of different buildings and ancillary structures.
Similarly the karf}asDtra (diagonal axis) of the corner houses
and the diagonal lines of maf}qala (rajjus) should not be
The rule of sutravedha is an important one in the design
of vastu. As the reference lines (sutras) are drawn through
the central part of the plot (maQcjala or ksetra) and that of
the building (vastu or harmya), the relative dispositions of
~hese points (brahman8.bhi and g[han8bhl) gain importance
1n the design.
MODULE FOR DECIDING THE WIDTH OF VITHI
Stanza -15
v ... <il~l GO~) +tCl·ft~;ft-
(4 ~'II'! Ic; S?T d I <'fl 1«l: I
'
<11~«'c!~I~·4CII'!OI~(14o'5fattl ~ -
'
ll~fit1 : II
Theda1zda (module) for deciding the width ofvithi is
of different kinds according to tl1e size of the area. ere
the height (kaya) of the person constructing the house is
accepted as the unit (tala). The danda wil be of three
types, 10, 9 or 8 times this unit. If the plot as arge area,
the width of the vithi should be taken to be one of t . ese
•
da1zdas .
The analysis of the site by concentric enveloping regions
- -
(vithivinyasa) is presented here, as distinct from the analysis
of site by grids (pa daviny8sa) . In vithlviny 8sa, the v8.stu -
ma[Jcjala is consid ered as a symbolic rep resentation of the
cosmos. The central regi on, called Brahmasthana! is - tl1e
terrestrial space. It is su rrounded by eight envelopes (vithis
or avrttis) as ex plained in the next stanza. The widtt1 of the
-
vithi is one danda, wh ich is a proportionate measurement
"' • I

or module. The width will depend upon the size of ttie plot.
vitiated by vedhado~a i.e they should not coincide. ---...;::...

57
56
 Manu~yaJayacandrikabha~yam Manu~yaJayacandrikabna~yam

The unit for deciding the daQcja is the height of the owner.
For large plots, the darc;ta can be 8,9 or 10 times this unit.

THE ARRANGEMENT OF VITHIS

Stanza -16 -
VITHIS FOR SECONDARY STRUCTURES
'::r::;:r;::!'"';;~r;:t";:i err •
•

ViTHIS FOR MAIN STRUCTURES

•

: ~ : q~a: I --·+- '

-:1. BRAHMA 2. GANESA
. 3. AGNI
4-.J.-~LA 5. NAGA 6. YAMA ..
-;:nl~ICI11r;m f:rr:J17h~mr;:rn:;:n· ';T1':D' ~ ~ I : '{ ~d I : • ICUBERA 8. DEVA 9. PISXCA
......__._ _3 •
4
II 5
6
When (the site is) divided into 18x18 grid, there are 9 1
8
enveloping paths (around its central point). From the outer 9
path to the centre, the paths are those of Pisaca, Deva,
Kubera, Yama, Naga, ]ala, Agni, Gal)esa and Brahman. Here FIG.02.1 0 MANDALA
•
ANALYSED AS 9 VlTHIS
•
••
the vithis of Pisaca, Agni, Naga and Yama in all four •

directions are bad for locating houses. p

Commentary
: ... : .
A "' SRAHMANABHI
In plots of width ranging from 32 hasta to 128 hasta, .•.• • .••.• ••• ,.
• • •

•• • ••
(1J BRAHMAVi'qll .
.. • • • .
.
.• ..
•

the grhama[Jljala is obtained by dividing the area into 4 (2) DEVAVliHI •••• . '
• • •
• • •
•• • •
•
quadrants and selecting the NE and/or SW quadrants and (3) MANU$YAVfTHi
, .... ..--.••.
~· -"'

(4) PISACAViTHI
.••. .. .•
•
.
•

if the area is larger, further subdividing the NE and SW •• • • • •

• • •
• • •
• • • ••
•
•

•
• • • • •• •
quadrants and selecting the SW sector of the NE quadrant -
VITHIS 2 & 3 CONSTITUTE
••• • •• • •
.... .....
• • • • • •. .,_,_.
and lor NE sector of the SW quadrant. For plots of width BUILDABLE AREA • e• e• e • • •
I
'

. ... . .. .
• • •

less than 32 H, the whole k~etra becomes grhama!Jcjala.

• • • "•
• • •
•
.. . .. .
• ••
"' • • •
'
• •• • •
• ... •·. ., ...
•
I
•
• •
• •
For plots of width of more than 128 H, planning is done
by considering the whole plot to consist of 9 concentric
enveloping paths (av.rtti or vlth1). The plot can be considered
to be divided into an 18x18 grid (karnastakamandala). This
• • • • • •
rs generally done for large temples and palace complexes.
The inner~ost region consisting of 4 cells around the FIG.02.11 MANQALA
-
ANALYSES AS 4 VITHIS
Brahmanabhi is called Brahmavithi. The expanding
envelopes from the innermost one are called GanesavTthi,
,.

58 •
59

•
 •

Man u~yiilayac andrikab ha~y anz Man u~yiilayac andrikab lfa$y am

and 1 Ox1 o grids the innermost 4 cells and 16 cells are Stanza- 18
respectively taken as Brahmap~da (fig.02.13, ~2.14). The • S{'[I ~ (j S~ 11 oI'i f1) -:q ~r.:;:::r'!r;::JJ"J v...

next two envelopes belong to Aryaka, Vivaswan, Mitraka,

fch f5q ;;;\) <:Cl I 'FP I<: lll f1) -:q ll <Ft ihjtsCfi . -:q I
and Bhubhrt in the 4 cardinal directions (These positions
31(t~~t ~ 41un
•
will be explained in detail in stanzas 24,2~ and 26). The . -
main houses are to be built in the cells of Aryaka etc. The o~x•ttcfl~u~~o~tct~~~~d~ct41~r4~~tQ~\is?r 11
ancillary houses are to be built in the outer envelope.
In some situations, in small sites, the courtyard
TABLE 02.02 CELLS IN BRAHMAPADA (a1zkaf!a) is seen in the centre and the house is seen shifted
•

from the intersection of Brahmasutra and YantasuJra with

Division into Total no. of cells Cells in Brahmapada shifts (gan1a1za) prescribed for each (sala). The vithis are
7x7 49 1 very narrow (atyalpa) and similarly the good and bad
8x8 64 4 effects also are small (alpa). Hence the division into
l.sakha1zda etc. and pi/acavithi etc. is not considered
9x9 81 9 .~ '
necessary here.
10x10 100 16 •

11 x11 121
Commentary
25
For small sites, it is not possible to divide them into 4
The logic of Stanza 17 can be seen in the light of the quadrants, because the resulting quadrant~ will be small. For
above. Consider the building is planned in the area covered example, if the width of the site is 32 H, the w1dth of the qu.adrant
will be equal to 16H. When divided into, say, s~s. gnd, the
by vithis of Brahma, GareSa, Agniand Jala, in the NE sector
- width of each cell (pada) will be 2H. Since the bu1ld1ng h~s to
of the mal}rjala. When the vithi width is equal to ankara
be restricted to 2 pada, the width of the buildable area w1ll be
length, it will permit an 8x8 grid division and building of sa/as
4H. Assuming that the thickness of the wall is SA (24cm) , and
in cardinal directions with desired ankaQa length. The
- allowing fo r the thickness of sUtra as given in stanza ~ 3: the
buildable area here will be square shaped. If vithi wirtth is maximum width of the room will be 3H SA (240cm). Th1s ~~the
11 12 times ankara length, planning with 9x9 or 1 Ox1 0 grids
- minim um w idth of habitable rooms according to th~ Nat1onal
will be possible. Vithi widths less than ankaoa length will
provide difficulties in planning houses following vastu rules, subdivisions are not possible as the w1dth of room Will be smaller
as the buildable area becomes small. Consequentl y the than this value. The rule of alpaksetra is applicable in such cases.
-
division into vithis is done only in large plots an d that too for
The practice followed in small plots is t~ ~~e that the
temples and palaces (prasadas). For houses, division into
Brahman§bhi (centre of mandala) and g[h~nabr11 (centre of
quadrants and sub-quadrants is the method used. Since
~
building) do not coincide _as explai~ed earlier under s:anza
the po rtion of the vithisconling in the NE and S\N quadrants 9 of chapter. The gfhanabh~ is ~lllfted to the north east or
alone can be used, both procedures converge into one. south-west side of Brahn1anabht.
- -------
()4 65
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam
In the case of catussalas, the Brahmapada will be made
the ankana•
and the diksalaswill be made in the two enveloping
set of padas covered by 12 adityas. The centre line of these
sa/as will be given gamana prescribed for each sa/a. t •
•
Here the author uses the word "dr£yate" ("is seen"). This
indicates that this practice of not dividing iAto quadrants or
vithis .. is seen in some places, but it is not exactly according
to the canons and is based only on practice. This means that
such divisions are not insisted in small plots ( alpak$etras) but
is mandatory for large house plots and for villages and towns.
•
FIXING THE BOUNDARY OF THE PLOT
• • Stanza -19
lll Cl d Sf I~-J IoI~ -rt.~.,......~~--r9'r";t;ttgtt;:r.::t.
' '
•
. \
-
The width ofvithi will be 11/2 times the length of the
courtyard (anka!la) and the width of the site will be 18
times the width of the v1thi. (Thus) from inside, the extent
of site is fixed. In boundless house-sites the extent of the
site can be fixed from the length of the ankana. Then the
• •
compound wall should be constructed suitably.
Commentary
In what is known as istadirghavidhi, istadirgha (the
desired length)Js generally taken as the length of the yard
(~nkan~). f$!adirgha is taken as the standard for fixing the •
d1~ens1ons of the elements of the building (width, perimeter,
he1ght, etc.). In large sites and boundless sites the Vithi
should have its width equal to 1112 times the width ~f ankana
as discussed under Stanza 17. Since there are g Vithis, t·h~
66
,
Manu fYalayacandrikab ha~yam
site should have a width of 18 vTthis. In sites with fixed
boundaries, the procedure is to fix the cardinal directions
( dignir[laya), square the plot ( caturasrfkaraoa), fix the vithis
•
and decide the location the building. This is called
alpak~etraniyama (rule for small plots) in which the width of
the building and length of ankaQa are decided from the width
of the site. The procedure of fixing the boundaries of the
site from the length of the yard stated in this stanza is for
large plots. Both these processes are allowed, depending
on the situation.
SENSITIVE POINTS OF THE MANDALA
Stanza- 20
~ o~ 4?tia 4> s?T ~::::rTT::Ii'IT.:t:Ta\-tt~rTJ:"2'T~~ I
tl·& I
-::t::Jrt;:ri-htl ~....................+-~,.,.· C1 I=<' it~~ d ~ Cl d I: I I
' . -/
Then the vithis of Brahma and Ga~Jesa in isakha~ttf,a
or nirrtikhanda should be taken together and there
divisi~n of ~a~tu in 81 or 64 or 100 cells (padas) should
•
be done. In this, the elements (avayavas) and vulnerable
points (marmas) of the vastu should be located.
Stanza- 21
•
~~r;r.J'1J~1t Ctl Pt ~ ~I d q \l•liJ Pt II
'
In the 81 cells grid, there will be ten orthogonal lines
directions. Similarly, there will be 5 separate ~Iag~nal
lines (rajjus ), with ends in N-E as well as S-E directiOns
67
 Manu~yaJayacandrikabha~yatn
Man u~ydlayac andrikiib ha~y a1n

For details of this part,

see figure 02.18
f- NADISANDHI 20
+ 16
NADISANDHI
X RAJJUSANDHI 8
f' MARMANTA 4
~ RAJJU-MARMA 8
•
* MARMA 40
* MAHAMARAMA 5
TOTAL 89.

N
• •

FIG.02.16 MARMAS OF 8X8 GRID

RAJJU

NADI

FIG.02.15 MARMAS OF 9X9 GRID

FIG.02.17 MARMAS OF 10X10 GRID

69
68
 M anu~yaJayac andrikab ha~yam
through 9,6 and 3 cells. Excluding the centre of the cell,
100 sensitive points, which are the intersection of 8,6,5
or 4 lines, should be avoided for building walls, etc.
Commentary (Stanzas- 20 and 21)
It has been stated earlier that in the padavinyasa
method of analysis, the selected plot is to be divided into
8x8, 9x9 or 1 Ox1 0 cells for locating the buildings. The
orthogonal grid lines are called nadis and the diagonal drawn
through their intersections are called rajjus (fig. 02.15). The
intersection points of the set of orthogonals and diagonals
are vulnerable points (marma) which have special
importance in the mal)<jala. In a 9x9 grid there will be 109
intersection points as shown in figure 02.15. Out of these,
the 9 intersections of rajju with rajju falling within the cells
are not considered as marmas. Leaving these there are 100
marmas. The intersections of orthogonals (nadisandhi, 48
in number) are not considered to be important. The four
points where 2 rajjus and 2 nadis interest are called
mahamarma and are considered to be the most sensitive of
all the marmas.
For 8x8 grid, the total number of intersections will be
89 and leaving 8 rajjusandhis, there are 81 marmas
(fig.02.16). For a 1Ox1 0 grid, the intersections are 129 and
marmas are 121. (fig.02.17).
No constructions are allowed over the important
marmas. In the outer periphery of the 9x9 mandala
(fig.02.15) there are 4 marmantas in the corners where 3
sutras converge. Also there are 8 rajjumarmasandhis where
5 sutras meet. While constructing the fence or compound
wall, these marmas should be left free. Similarly, the 36
marmas and 4 mahamarams also should be avoided. If it is
not possible to avoid any construction at the marmas, it has
to be shifted by a distance equal to 1/2 the thickness of the
sutra, which has already been stated to be equal to 1/16,
7()
Man u~yalayacandrikab ha~yam
1/12 and 1/8 of the width of the cell for the 8x8, 9x9 and
10x10 grid divisions respectively (Stanza -13). This is
illustrated in figure 02.18.
A discussion about the rationale for the above
prescriptions (called marmavedhavidhl) will be useful here.
The purpose of the rule is to restrict the building within the
mandala and also to provide reference points for later use.
• •
The marmas are reference points which help one to
' locate the positions of the different elements of the building.
If they are clearly located in the maf}gala, the locations of
the building elements can be accurately decided by
stretching threads along these points. That is why it is
prescribed that the constructions should be shifted at least
by half the width of thread on either side of the marmas.
The marmas are thus similar to the bench marks that are
fixed in modern constructions. The marmas are useful not
only during the constructions but also when alt~ra~ions or
additions or reconstructions are made to the bulldtng at a
later time.
Stanza- 22
!Jill cil ~ Cf4~ +I I ~=<b ~ i ~I~ cl '11 ?i ']]'"Jjr;n-::~~rY, -
41\CJI (4;::£~=<~'11~ ~4q~q)'5t ~~sur~ I
.
~· JYq ~ ~ ~ d diU I• <Ill -tmt:~;-;:r I I
'
from the marmasittra, on the east or north s1de, the m~rma
defect due to pillar, wall etc. will not arise. ~~re7 If the
marma defect occurs, the person doing the ~anttka~ma
hould place gold icons of the heads of bison, hon,
defect.
71
 •
Manu ~ya.layac andrikah na~y am Manu.syalayacandrikabna~yam

Commentary

This stanza describes the methods for avoiding the

See the shaded portion of figure 02.15, page 68. defect due to marmavedha. As stated in the commentary
r---~------------~----------~------------0 on stanzas 20 and 21, a gap of half the width of the sutra
should be left between the marma and the constructions
NADI
on all sides. For the 9x9 grid. The width of the sutra is
prescribed as 1/12 of the width of the cell and, therefore,
the shift should be 1/24 the cell width. If however,
MARMA
marmavedha cannot be avoided, then gold icons of animals
should be placed at the marma point by the person
MARMA
performing the Vastupuja, the traditional rites to propitiate
the presiding deity of the maQcjala. This act may appear to
IPADA]
be superstitious, but locating gold icons may be a way to
PADVISTRA
identify the point at a later time when reconstruction,
remodelling or additions have to be carried out. This also
confirms that the prescription for leaving marmas free is a
method of locating and identifying the important reference
RAJJU points in the grid.
••
POSITIONS OF VASTUDEVATAS
SUTRA
Stanza- 23
•
3JI en <:rCQ .-:t Cl en s~

SUTRAVISTARA ~~cb ~~ ~ ~nt~llt4 ~~Cb~J'{~<!fl~: I

•
tf(CII~~IG q.>:q T.r ~R->iltt~t: f~dt
""""' s ::::rT::rrJ~;T.!tr::rr::r.r:=;:~t;h'(T'=i:;::JTIJl'rT ¥""l'...J
: II

-j_,~1'z.l .,J <4 + ~/12p SUTRA '1/STARA Taking 81 cells, there are nine in the middle, six each
SE"f.-BA:K INSIDE +-- PADAVlsTARA
in the cardinal directions and 2 each in the corners of the
outer envelope, and one each in the next outer envelope
FIG.02.18 AVOIDING MARMAVEDHA ILLUSTRTED
making a total of 45 positions with Brahman etc. in these
(45) padas and eight gods positioned outside the padas,
there are 53 gods (padadevatas) .
....,__..._______._.___.. ------- ~~ . ~

72 73
 Manusyalayac andrilUzb na~y am Man usyoJayac andrikab ha~yam
• --------
Stanzas 24, 25 and 26 and starting from NE corner Caraki , Vidari, Puta1zika,
I
paparak~asi (in the vidiks)- these eight gods will be outside
the cells. And outside that will be Devagrahas.
~ •;;n ·~~ '( fcl tf (ll CJft ~~I '(CP I«H ~ i '(·d~ I : I
Commentary (Stanzas 23,24,25 ,and 26)
~ fcld:4 1J5a.Httt¥fi tt·tt~ ~ ·
The 81 padas of the 9x9 grids are divided into 45
fi)?ft~Ff ~~~J'(qlt>fJift) . ~Jita Cb<"ltikt II locations for padadevatas (gods) (fig.02.12). There will one
' ' '
god in each of these 45 locations and there will be 8 gods
,.~. ...... n~rr::;:::r· ~;unQ7.1-y-g1t ~~~"''""ri-'i r::r~::r
outside the maogala. Thus there will be 53 gods presiding
•

over the maf)c;fala. The names of these gods are indicated

~: I in the figure. Far outside, there will be planets related to
~~ n-;:rn-r::r:::::T.n~E:":T:lt t::r::r::r:J"Tt: ~rat fc) q =(<II - gods ( devagrahas).
s ~: II Vastumandala
• •
is conceived as the symbolic form of the
cosmos. The central region (terrestrial space or lithosphere
atut '"tt21q~s~ ~~4~=t~a: ~:cp.c;)s : where there is creation of life) is the Brahmasthana. It is
surrounded by an envelope of 12 suns, representing the
MIJ IIG~ ft)~ fi)JtJCbA-Tf il=+<cfil~llcft fclG ltlit:Cilll : I suns in 12 constellation (rasis). This region of energy
represents the habitable region. Beyond the solar space is
1pJ= Tf ~ ~ltud -
the stellar space divided into 32 constellations and ~rotected
~ SteiCJqGf~diA-Tf q~a) ~CI!I~I'<{IG~~ : II by the 8 wardens of the 8 directions. Beyond th1s stellar
'
In the outer envelope, starting from the isana (NE) space is the unknown region of demons.
corner, iSiina, Parjanya, Jayanta, Indra, Ravi, Satyaka,
The position of the gods in the 8x8 and 1Ox1 0 grids are
BhrSa, Antarikfa, (in the eastern side)Agni, Pii~a, Vitatha,
similar as shown in figures 02.13 and 02.14.
G.rhak~ata, Yanta, Gandharva, Bhrnga, Mrga, (in the
-
southern side) Nirrti, Dwarapala, Sugriva, Pu!padanta,
~
THE CONCEPT OF VASTUPURUSA
Varul}a, Asura, So~a, Roga, (in the western side) Vayu, Stanza- 27
Naga, Mukhya, Bhallata, Indu, Argala, Aditi and Diti (in -
the northern side) should be considered thus in outer '
envelope. In the middle envelope from the N-E corner,
..... ::::n ~ ...... .........'
~xton ~ l"rr'ft"· g "::r ........,~:orr ~ ~-911 ~,
n,,(l,u I
- - -
there will be (12 adityas namely) Apa, Apavatsa, Aryaka,I
~avi~r, Savitra, Vivaswa1z, Indra, Indrajit, Mitraka, Siva, ' ·. I I
Sivajit and Bhubh_rt. Then in the central portion will be ~rrt ~:X~I T.f
Brahma. And outside of the marz{iala starting from east , There was a haughty demon who subdued all the world
-
Sarvaskanda, Aryama, Jrmbhaka, Pilipinchaka (in thediks)
74 75
 Manu~yalayacandrikab ha~yam
He was exhausted in battle and was made to fall on the
ground. Then filling everywhere and circling several times,
he agitated the earth. Then the humans became sad. So also
the sages and gods became sad.
Stanza- 28
dj~CJ1tl·d~
II
He lay flat face up war~~ (utthana) with his legs in Nilrti
(SW) corner and head in /sana (NE) corner, always filling
everywhere especially cities, towns, land, quadrants of plots
(k~etrakha1J¢as), yard, etc. like the akasa in small as well as
in large pots. Then suddenly the gods permanently occupied
on his body.
Commentary (Stanza 27 and 28)
_ The concept of a V8.stupurusa forming part of every
v~stutorms one of the basic concepts in V8stuS8stra. Every
vastu, whether_ large like cities and villages or small rooms
an_d seats (pifha) is pictured as a field in which the
Vastupuru~a is lying flat with face upwards.
The posture of Vastupuru~a is described in stanza 28
In some texts like Brhatsamhita, however, describes the
pos.t~re _as face downwards. (Ref.02.09). The face-up
POSition IS ad?pted by the author of Manu~y8.1ayacandrika,
ya1ama~~ are made to any deity only in face-up posture.
face-down) rem1nd the same in the mandala. This further
shows that the figure of Viistupuru~a was a later addition
76
and has only symbolic value.
Mythologically, ~ukra the guru of the asura started a
sacrificial fire to de~troy the devas. During the rites, a drop
of perspiration of Sukra fell in the fire and Vastupuru~a, a
fire - spitting demon emerged from it. This desnon started
detroying the devas. The devas approached Siva
~ , for help.
The fire from the third , eye of Siva chased Sukra and his
P}Otege. Frightened, Sukra redu,ced his form,and entered,
Siva Is sto91ach through his ear. Siva ordered Sukra to come
out, but Sukra wanted a boon which would guarantee the
security of his protege. This was granted. VaStupuru~a
promised not to cause any further destruction. The gods
occupied several parts of his body.
Some people see the birth of earth in the story. The
sacrificial fire is compared to the sun and the fire-spitting
vistupuru~a is compared to the earth separating from the
sun. The hot earth was cooled down in time and conditions
were created for the formation and sustenance of life on
earth. These favourable conditions have to be preserved
for the continuation of life. Symbolically this is achieved by
offering pujas to Vastupuru~a.
Whatever be the myth, the concept in V8stuvidya is
that vastupuru~a is held fast to a field defined by the_ sq~~re
mandala with his feet in the Nir[ti (SW) corner, head m /sana
(NE) corners. The gods occupied the vanous l1m~s of the
prostrate body. The superimposition of the f1gure of
V8stupurusa on the V§stumar;cjala with the padadevatas on
different pcirts of the body makes it easy to ident1fy the ~adas
(fig.02.19). For example the SE corner is the pos1t1on of
Agni and one pada south of NW corner is the pada of
Parjanya. The regions are nar:ned after the devatas
occupying them. This is like nammg the w~r~s of a town.
The padadevatas fulfill the function of ident1fymg the cells.
77
 Man u.ryalayacandrikab liiz~y am Manutya.layacandrikabha~yatn
The concepts can also be said to indicate symbolically
the creation of a built environment from the nature. From a
purely technical point of view, Vastupurusamandala • c
is a
graphic model for design purposes. The planning begins by
defining the boundaries and giving shape to a form. This is
followed by dividing the form into sectors, which are identified
by the padadevatas. Further analysis and design start from
No~: NaMtUoj~~by~reriat~err (1) tD (4S) ar~J~~ •

this definition of form.

~ur~0 • ' fU'1~ ·
2 12 62
PILIPINCAKA
PUTANIKA N PAPARAKSASI
NW ~--- NE Since every pada is presided over by a deity, all the
26 27 28 29 30 acts done in that pada are done in the presence of the deity.
Therefore, i~ implied that these acts are done with devotion
24 44 and commitment.

23 42 POSITION OF PADADEVATAS
•

22 Stanzas 29, 30 and 31

s~ ~ fif~dl ~~'141: q'li.ttcbS(iHRRi -
21 41 5
j("ifttqaEi~4 d~l Jlcld~ d~=lllqCI\tti(Cill: I
20 • •

35 6 : tif~dl
I
Cll¥iJ3il?IJtffi \ifll•<l
9 38 7 Clt¥ii~ ~dCII~Ji~qfd~Qj~s. c;~u) II
18 8 31CJ>ic:~1 : ~j(:q,~tc:m c;~ot~«IJII~ 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ctt'lSJc:61&3 ttfclat -=tT tttfcl:;fts;:q?t ~= ~~4~<! SJc61t611
VIDAR/ CARAK/
sw s SE I
ARYAMAN
~~: II
•

FIG.02.19 VASTUPURUSAMANDALA
On his head, ifa is stationed. Parjanya and Diti, are
located on his eyes. Apa, Apavatsa, ]ayanta, Aditi and
Indra are situated on his face, neck, right ear, left ear
and left shoulder. Argala is on his right shoulder.
Arka etc are on the left arm and Candra etc are on
the right arm. Savitr and Savitra are situated on the left
78 79
 Manu ~yalayac andrikab lias.) am
Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
forearm and Siva and Sivajith are on the right forearm.
02.02 c:. ,j ~ i.1· 4 ;:j ~R'{: Cb<N: I
Also located are Mahidhara and Arya on the breasts,
Vivaswam and Mitra on the adorn en, Brahma on the navel,
~11Cf>~i.1 ~~'t~~~ \=scflRaJ: 11
Jndra on the penis,Jndrajit on the scrotum and other gods M.M., Vl-6
on two feet. 02.03 CT&~ci ~q;q~t)~ ~~~~ I
Commentary \=s d'{ llFI~I~ tJ ~Cft>141!f ~~Git II
The significance of allotting specific locations for the !'I ~ I=<-< ICll '< ~ f4 +t a I
•
different gods(Ref.02.1 0) has been explained earlier.
•
~clli II
Stanza- 32 '
M.M., Vl.1-2
m ~CJat · : '{i·<lftkiJf'it:ttetl>cl!OIGJ: ~= 1

"ffi.~t.~GP!tel f4q-ftctG I: ~'<"\I~¥ ll<t f4c:uu~ ~ CJI~"q'!Ull'! II 02. 04 -m~ -ur::r,:-:r::.:'tl-.r.:rr·:rr,::r· tl 'I d ~ ~rn ~ Cf(f) I~ \it I
If these gods, positioned on the body ofvastu, are made c........ ""'W '"I<: ~=Q t= ll '"1 ¥Of II
satisfied through worships, they will cause desirable results. '
If they are not pleased they will give undesirable results. '
Therefore, worship of ~stu (Vastupilja) should be done. ~· -....,ll.....=<=ll..... -v
... ~~ .....~~:r::t9rr9t d d ~-4 d ~ II

Commentary T.S. (S) I - 21

I

Vastupuja (Ref.02.11) consists of certain rites in the 02.0 5 t= I~~ I d m .;r::r-q:;:r;~~;:rr I

worship of the gods. Since the gods are all on the body of '
V8stupurU$a, WOrship Of gods is also worship Of V8stupUfU$8. 3i I till '5 ~ II f4 ff1 tR -::rr:~xr.:t1m tl ~ H I'! II

As stated earlier, the rites of Vastupuja can be '{"tG~Ii~i fchtJoJi l!t?Fftlltei~l'fiqti ~~U1'!_ I
considered to be symbolic acts to keep the presiding deities
of the mandala viz the elements of nature, in balance for B.S., LVIII,12-13
the sustenance of the Vastu.
REFERENCES 02.06 ~iCbc'1 q:q$ : q~'"lli II
'
02.01 311Cbi~CJ~OJ~I«"HR . '1CJ=~~c'1 1
--- --- ---- --- --- --- ---- --- --- --- ---
•
II
fllJtn ~qfd: ~l""::>ft G\CII ~CJ~fa . : II
M.M., VII - 1 to 7
'«<f«t CJI"CfCbtit~oJ \iill~lffG 1R JjtJ~: 1
M.M., IV - 1 to 2
8()
81
 Manu syalayacandrikab hasy am
•
'

V.V., VI- 3

02.08 fi~CJ ~~'] V.R. DIMENSIONAL & ORIENTATION

'
02.09 fcb&~fl:) 1!d'i"1C1~ •tlt;i '{1 GRJ ~~fl~ Of I SYSTEMS & AYADI COMPUTATIONS
d~'ixJiul~ ~if5~il ;::£~~'''i 11 •
' •
B.S.,LIII-2
'
8Miv · ib system-j syste.~+U btUed off/
02.10
J Ya_-ift, Size- a-lf4i Dff/ ~UM</a-ff/ fWDf'D Ytio ff/S j
-JW~ aderirtia o r "Sj p-ropcrtib .......
' sys~ o ur 1Med iltt t j)'om1
•

3fl<•llq ~HI·d~ lfllftq ~~~~- II

'
M.S., VI- 1 to 3 •

02.11 ~CII~i ~:qqc;~~l:rti ii~Cb~'i f4~lld I

'
=<il'ilrlllf5(lJ'il~flol ~$0114)~j ll~lsn'i'i II
' '
M.M., VIII - 1

82
 • Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig. Page
CHAPTER- 3
03.01 BASIS OF ANTHROPOMETRIC
DIMENSIONAL SYSTEM 88 31~~~ S~211ll:
03.02 OCTAL DIVISIONS OF HASTA 90
03.03 VARIATIONS IN HASFA MEASUREMENTS 90 DIMENSIONAL & ORIENTATION SYSTEMS
- -
03.04 UNITS FOR LARGE MEASUREMENTS 90 AND AYAD/COMPUTATIONS
03.05 PROPORTIONS IN NAVATALA 99
03.06 PROPORTIONATE MEASURES OF PANCAPRAI<ARA 99
Ill' I
03.07 STANDARD MODULE (DA/Y/)A) FOR TEMPLES 105
'
03.08 YON/, THE ARCHITECTURAL FORMULA FOR BASIC UNITS AND SCALES
ORIENTATION 109 Stanza- 1
03.09 PADAYON/ CONCEPT 121 • •
•

= m<I> I ~ar~tt<ld= 1
•

Eight times the width of tila seed contained in its fruit

is calledyavodara. Eight times that is matrangula. With 12
angula, vitasti is mentioned. Twice that is calledkara, kisku ,
'
aratni, bhuja, dos, mu~(i, etc. That (kara) itself varies on
account of specific angulas by increasing angula one by one.
Commentary
An artefact (vastu) is defined primarily by three of its
attributes, viz , size, shape and orientation . Size is defined
by the dimensions. Vastuvidya gives great importance to
the dimensions of vastu. The title of one of the classic texts
of Vastuvidya , viz . Manasara, exemplifies this. Mana means
'dimension ' and sara means 'essence'. Hence, Manasara
means essence of dimensions. Vastuvidya (Ref.03.01) and
Mayamata (Ref.03.02) say that all artefacts are known by
their dimensions .

85
 Manu~~ttyalayacandrikabha~yam
Manu~yalayacandrikabna~yam
In Vastuvidya, two systems of units are used for direct
TABLE 03.02 OCTAL DIVISIONS OF VYAMA
measurements of length, one based on the grain size viz.
yavamana (yava means barley grain and mana means 8 yava = 1 angula
measurement) and the other based on human figure viz. 8 angula = 1 pada
manu~yapramaQa (anthropometric measurement). Being an 8 pada = 1 vyama
agricultural community, the grain size was universally adopted
Angula corresponds to the length of the central phalanx
in ancient India as the unit of measurement. Though six
of the middle finger and is equal to 1/64 of vyama, which is the
different grains viz. yava, rakta'S8!i, s'wetatati, mah888ti,
arm stretch or span of a perfect man (fig.03.01 ). This is called
saugandhi and gamasali were used, in due course yava was - -
matrangula. Since the anthropometric measurement will vary
universally accepted as the standard grain for measurements.
widely from race to race, angula is standardised in relation to
The average width of yava is 3.75 mm and is equal to eight yava, as 8 times the width of yava. This measurement is called
times the width of gingely (ti/a) seed. According to this text, tila ...-
manangula (standard angula).
is the standard unit and yava is the derived unit. Three
successive bisections of yava gives tila. The octal division is The single pace of man is equal to his arm length from
continued to the smallest measurement called paramanu as the shoulder to the tip of his middle finger. This is called
given in table 03.01. · kara, aratni, bhuja, dos and hasfa. In Kerala, this is called
simply as the measuring scale, kol. This is equal to 24
TABLE 03.01 OCTAL DIVISIONS OF YAVA angula, i.e. 3/8 vyama. Half this length, viz. 12 angula, is
vifasti. Another derived unit is parva which is equal to 3
8 paramanu •
-- 1 trasarenu
•
angula i.e. 1/8 hasta.(fig.03.02).
8 trasarenu
•
-- 1 lik$a or romagra
8 liksa -- 1 yuka Though the standard hasfa is 24 angula, different lengths
..
•
are used for hasfa as described in subsequent stanzas.
8 yuka -- 1 fila
8 tila -- 1 yava •
VARIATIONS IN HASTA SCALE
Stanza- 2
_Paramii~u is described as equal to the size of the minute
floattng partrcles seen when sun's rays creep into a dark 'D'"J":::J"'r.JZJTT"2~~~~r:!rH... • ¥Of I ;:j f4 'i 14
space ~hrough a crevice. The text Vasfuvidya describes Sll\illq\tJCJ>xi~d \9.-:tt~ ~ qqfila 1
paramaryu as that which can be seen only by sages '
(R~f.03.03) and takes it as the standard unit and the other ~~: q~~d ~~f4~t~ilf;Tt~-
unt~s ~s derived units. The smallest practical unit is fila II
which IS equal to the widt~ of a chisel mark on wood and is '
generally accepted as the tolerance in carpentry joints. The measure with 25 11tatrailgula is called prajapatya
and is used in vi1na1za and in some places in temples. The
Yava is c~nnected to the anthropometric system measu.re made with 26 oftheseailgztlas, calleddha1zurnzu~.ti
(manu?yapramaQa) by the relation given in table 03.02.
i used for all types of building in some places.
86 87
 Manu~yalayac andrikab ha~yatn Manu.syaJayacandrikabl!a.syam
Stanza- 3
,.........•
~:tl"t.r::hl:C-l~::r;n-r;::r~n--F, .............. _ __...... •
'i I '1 ll <j t f> -
"1 fLfl . ll G'j"'i I !II ¥11 ~ cfi t:ftt~ {) I
1 VYAMA = 8 PADA
- t
~~;zttW 4CI ~ '~'=tfiTJ~f4~ cttq)actCbl~ &;
1 HASTA = 3 PADA
nr-:r d~w~(t II
'
. The measure, referred by learned people to be of 27
• • of the said a1zgulas, is called dha1zurgraha. By this,
villages etc. are measured. This dhanurgraha is
ANGULA
. I I I I prescribed in the measurement of streets, gardens etc.
8 ANGULA = 1 PADA and of tanks, lakes etc. Then, dhanurmu${i is also
desirable there (for all these measurements)
•
Stanza- 4
•
3 ANGULA = 1 PARVA
'
nrt:~~~?:n-=t : ''~fill d 'i I
'
•
3 4 5
1 HASTA = 8 PARVA
:. 24 ANGULA

'
The measure with 28 angulas is called pracya. The
MANUSYAPRAMANA
measure made with 29 nzatraltgzLla is vaideha. The
• •

measure limited by 30aJzgula is vaipulya. With oneangula

•
•
•
1 YAVA = 3.75mm
-
added, this itself becomes prakir~ta. Thus, there are 8
~ ·t
..••
·' ...J types of hasta.
.•,•••.
•••
~
~ :;:)
...J E· <!) § •

~
• •
••
••••• :;:) , ~ §
• •
•
..... '
~

<!l l E' ~ tanza- 5

.. .• .,.;
..·'.
.-1 ~
0
('f) ~ co ~ ~
. ••,~
I
~~
-- r -- -- ~ •
"" l
_................
(,0 1
· ~ stctlof ~ I
• •
.·.·:.
,. uTTAMA MADHYAMA ADHAMA
- .•: ~

(SADHARAf:JA)
~~JATRANGULA (SAYA) (SAMA)

Dha1zurgral1a and
-
prakir!za
are to be used in the
FIG. 03.01 BASIS OF ANTHROPOMETRIC DIMENSIONAL SYSTEM
houses of bralz1na~za. , vaipztlya and dlza1zur11Zll. [-i in the
ntea urentents related to kings .
•
•

88
•
 •

Man u~y"aJayac andrikab nasy am Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y am

Stanza- 6
• •
. ~~!ll~i I
~ ~ '
s
<!)
..J
:;:)
<!)
•

<: <:
~
~
<t
~
Prajapatya and vaideha are agreeable for vaisyas
N
N
II II • (trading class) and ~ku and pracya for sudras (working
~ §
a: class). Ki~ku is agreeable everywhere.
~ ~
(")
~ ~
CD
a: a: t Commentary (Stanzas 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6)
~ ~
co en
II II
E
II These five stanzas describe 8 different lengths for hasta
E (,)
E
(,)
N
~
co
(,)
0
en
(fig.03.03) and the situations where they are employed. In
N H "
~
II II
<t
II
the early days, each ethnic group might have adopted
\ <t
\
\ 5<!J 5<!J 5e, measuring standards based on the arm length of that group.
\
\ ~ ~ ~
\ ~
~
<t q Later, these different lengths were quantified in terms of
\
\
N
II
"N
II
::>
:")

II
~
(")

II the standard angula and prescribed for different purposes.

1 (table 03.03). But ki$ku equal to 24 angulas is universally
~
<!J
used for all purposes and generally adopted as the
~ acceptable standard everywhere.
N ~ .
Q
TABLE 03.03 DIFFERENT TYPES OF HASTA AND THEIR USES
FIG. 03.02
OCTAL DIVISIONS FIG. 03.03 VARIATIONS IN HASTA MEASUREMENTS Name of hasta Length Uses
OF HASTA
angula em
+
12 PADA 72 Standard hasta, applicable
1 DANDA - t 4 HASTA Kisku 24
8 VITASTI ~ •
everywhere.
~
1 HAS{A SIDE .88m •
~ Prajapatya 25 75 Temples, houses of vaisyas
......._ t 0
aeroplanes,
0
~ PERIMETER
~ LL =1 YOJANA Ohanurmusti 26 78 All houses, streets, gardens,
••
~E 0 tanks , lakes
~~
•

w
- CD
oco
0
oN
. -tn
0
Ohanurgraha 27 81 Villages , streets, gardens,
.,.. II tanks , lakes , houses of
brahmanas.
•
SQUARE SETTLEMENT Houses of sudras
Pracya 28 84
FIG. 03.04 UNITS FOR LARGE MEASUREMENTS Vaideha 29 87 Houses of vaisyas'

Vaipu/ya 30 90 Houses of ktngs (k~atriyas)

... Houses of brahmanas
PrakirQa 31 93 •

9() 1

..
Manu~yalayacandrikahha~yam
USES OF DIFFERENT SCALES
Stanza- 7
3lt[:~~'il4 ~iCbcl st>iiDI ~~ll~td1~tf&\J1CJO~Q}l£110f II
I '
For kings etc. (k~atriya, vySya and siidra) the standards
prescribed for those above are not desired in place of that
prescribed for each of them. For vaisyas, k~atriyas and
brahmins, all that are prescribed for the lower classes are
acceptable.
Commentary
This prescription restricting the use of different types
of hasta is to standardise the units for the people of different
status and for different uses. As stated earlier, k~$ku (24
angula) is taken as the standard and can be used by all in
all situations.
In certain parts of India, the standard hasta is not of 24
angula length. For example, in certain parts of Tamilnadu,
pada is taken to mean the 'foot' used in British system.
Therefore, hasta will be 90cm (vaipulya). This has no basis
as the British system came to India long after the traditional
system was standardised. Even the angula measurement
varies as stated in stanza 9. Therefore, the standard
generally followed in each region, is to be ascertained before
assessing or undertaking any work in that region.
Stanza- 8
~=t'l~"\lt·lllll~tel~ t~~f~a~ 1
\n\71-;;rn
' small) angulas. By 4, 3 1/2 and 3 times the length of the
Jfl'11~ TJ Ckt~d II
In temples, all (hastas) are good when (used) suitably. In
some places, the measurements arising out of superior (/re~!ha ),
· (modhyama) and sinal) (adluo1Ul) angulas also are used.
92
•
•
Man u.syalayacandrikab hQ,sy am
•
Commentary
This states that for temples, all the different hastas can
be used_. Th!s is understandable because, as in a y8gaSala,
the shnne 1s to be built from the measurements of the
yajam·ana or the sthapaka. Generally for temples, a suitable
hasta is chosen and adopted as the standard for all
measurements. In several temples (eg. in Kerala, Panniyur
temple .. flear Kuttipuram, Parthasarathi temple at Aranmula
standard hasta is sculptured on the adhi~{hana of garbha-
grha or namaskaramandapa or on stambha for comparison
and later reference. The classification of angulas into
superior (uttama orsre~tha), medium (madhyama) and small
(adhama) is explained in the subsequent two stanzas.
UTTAMA, MADHYAMA AND ADHAMA ANGULAS
Stanza- 9
ltcfl<f~Xte~'6f?q(j li·•II~I\S·tjcl mf Cf>~<i 4Rtidst I
' ' ~
st;~ot '<i'<li~t~cfl~~~d d·¥fu14 oql~'"l~ifttd T.J II
'
The 1natrangula made up of 8 yava width is said to be
superior. That which are made up of 7 and 6 yava width are
respectively medium and small.
Stanza -10
r-~~~::rrcrt
•
err 1
d Tal cPlllll d \J1 C't fU: ~i I~ f3l d li f3l ti fit~ Cl \ ~ I I
By eight, seven and six times the width of paddy (~iili),
there will be the superior etc. (superior, medium and
same lati also, there will be superior etc. angulas.
Commentary (Stanzas 9 and 10)
It was explained earlier in the commentary on the stanza
93
 Man usyalayac andrikab hasy am
• •
1 of this chapter that six different types of grains were used
as standard and that yava is the, commonly adopted
standard. While relating yava or sali with angula, one
problem encountered is that, though the size of a particular
grain was more or less constant, the measurement of human
body varied widely, especially with different ethnic races.
Therefore, a statistical classification of people into 3 groups
was used to relate yava with angula. The angula
measurements of these 3 classes of people were equated
to 8, 7 and 6 times the width of yava (yavodara) and were
called superior (uttama), medium (madhyama) and small
(adhama) respectively. When paddy (sa/1) is taken as the
basis, the three measure of the angula were taken as equal
to either 8,7 and 6 times the width of the ~ali or 4, 3 1/2 and
3 times the length of the £ali. However uttamangula of 8
yava width is commonly adopted as the standard measure
(manangula). It is taken as equal to 3.75mm.
Stanza- 11
~ Cltt I d ?I Cb ~ I : ~~~:n-:~~,;::r(I UJt1"'E!r"f'
21 TI :
~ as~-~:r;:rr.~s teccil ll>:
cp~1)~: ~irgat , 'f-lt<tfa: ~: II
From the 9 different angulas described thus, the
superior etc. hasta will be 9 types. Then by the eight type of
basta described with increments inagulas they will become
72 types.
Commentary
Eight different hastas have been described in stanzas
4, 5 and 6 of this chapter with lengths of 24, 25, 26, 27, 28,
29 , 30 and 31 angulas. Each of these can be further
subdivided into 9 types as described in the preceding 2
stanzas. Thus altogether, there are 72 variations of hasta.
94
Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
RECOMMENDATION ON THE USE OF SCALE
Stanza- 12
311 eft ~t-Ji-rp.,+-; ~-1+-flir-~ ~"Ur.T1~~:-:r: ~ ~ I
+f(f~GdlS~ ~fit ~ 4ztlft1 ll~l~~tel: II
Thathasta, which was established earlier as being made
of 24 ma,tra1zgulas, is respected everywhere. All the others
are differing opinions (beliefs) and are liked in some places
on the basis of their suitability.
Commentary
This stresses the universal acceptability of ki§ku (of 24
uttamangula). The text Vastuvidya also states that for all vastus,
ki$ku is the most popular cubit. (Ref.03.04). Manasara also
. recommends hasta of 24 angula for all artefacts (Ref.03.05).
UNITS FOR MEASURING ARTEFACTS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES
Stanza -13
I
(j
Go'5) t~fEe~fa -nr,:rts ~~ Gu'5)s?f II
(
The houses etc. are described by hasta measurement.
Some cases are described by matrangulas. When absolutely
necessary, the perimeter and shift (gamana) can be described
by yava. But in the shift of the outer buildings and the
boundaries of (houses of) humans, da1Jtfa of 4 hasta is used.
This is known as ya~ti. Eight times da!lfla becomes rajju.
Commentary
This specifies the units to be used for measuring
- 95
•
-

M anu~yaJayac andrikab Jiasy am Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y a1n

•

different artefacts. For large artefacts, large units are used referred to as nadika (linear measurement).
and for small artefacts, small units are employed. For the
TABLE. 03.04
houses, it is said that hasta is the unit employed. Elsewhere
( 'kutrapi') angula is used. The word 'elsewhere' ('kutrapi') UNITS FOR MEASURING DIFFERENT VASTUS
has been interpreted differently. One interpretation is that
Vastu Unit Octal sub unit
in some regions, angula also is used for houses (Ref:03.06).
for measu rement
Others interpret that 'elsewhere' means "in the case of other
artefacts like the doors, seats, etc". According to them, for Fine details, carvings, etc Yava Til a
houses, hasta is the only standard unit. The former Icons, pitha etc. Angula Yava
interpretation is not logical as evidenced from the remaining Building elements Hasta Parva
part of this stanza. It is said that when the perimeter and the
s.hift of centre line (gamana) cannot be measured by hasta
,
Building plan Vyama Pada
and angula (i.e. when these are very small as in the case of Building plot Danda Vitasti
icons and decorative works), they are to be measured in yava Measurement of land Rajju Danda
units.
Stanza- 14
For making long measurements, daQqaequalling 4 hastas,
is to be used as the unit. DaQcja literally means a measuring dlcll~: ~lft'it~cb tl~il4 ~
stick, and it is standardised as 4 hasta long. It is the perimeter
of the square of 1 hasta side (fig.03.04). The standard length '
of daQga is 2.88m which is comparable to the length of the ~I ~=511 ;gj . Tf tt C: Olt I~=t a)
ranging rod now used in land survey. Eight times darga is '
rajju (which literally means rope). Thus, it can be seen that the ~!ill ~IBJCfiJJIGHIR ~\lf'iH~I~G\5\ffliR~I lf ? II
' '
unit to be adopted for measuring a vastu depends on its overall Icons etc. are to measured by tala etc. Ornaments are
dimensions, i.e. for larger lengths, larger units are used and to be measured byyava. The measurement of silk, coverings,
for small lengths small units are employed. (Table. 03.04). dress etc. are to be done by vitasti. Weapons etc can be
This is further explained in the next stanza. It is also natural in measured by twice the width of their (of persons using the
the octal system that the sub-units are 1/8th of main unit. weapon) ring fingers and also can be measured by its (of
The size of the settlements are measured in yojana, ring finger) diameter. The vessels for sacrificial rite (yaga)
which is equal to 1000 rajju or 8000 daQcja. Ayojana is thus are to be measured by the fist (ntusti) and others by the foot
the perimeter of a square with each of its sides equal to etc of the master (yajamana).
2000 daf}qla. Therefore, in a square settlement of 1 yojana
perimeter, the distance from the gateways to the centre of Commentary
the settlement will be 1000 daQqa. (fig.03.04). Incidentally, Two methods of measurements are used in Vastusast1a.
this is the distance that can be covered by a man walking One is the direct or absolute method using yavamana and/
for 1 nadika (1 /60 of a day = 24 minutes) and is therefore, or purusapramana as explamed already. The other is the
l)7
96
 Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyatn
•

proportionate method. Talamana i·s one such proportionate

scale, while dandamana is another one.

In the talamana, all measurements are made in

proportion to the tala, which is the length of the palm
including the fingers. (fig.03.05). This is equal to the length " .. 1"'1
,
of the face. The measurements of the various other parts of •
1T
...
N
•
•
.
;, •
...~
1~
the body are reckoned as ratios of tala. The total height is ~

taken as 5,6,7,8,9 or 10 times the length of face (one tala) 1T

...
N

depending upon the nature of the figure depicted. For

example, for noble men and gods, the total height is taken 1T ...
N

as 8, 9 or 1 o tala (a?tatala, navatala, dasatala), adolescents 1T

q:
..,J
::>
are represented in saptatala (7 tala} and ~adtala ( 6 tala}, ~ ~
..... ~
and children are shown in pancafala (5 tala). Thus Vi~nu, ~~
~
I
I
1T N~
--..,J
en ~
Brahma, Durga etc are sculptured in dasatala, lesser gods Q)

in na va tala, ordinary men and demons in as ta tala,

lT
-
No
~

Subrahamaoya (as Kumara) in $aptatala or ~adtala and tT -

N

Ga[Jesa in pancatala. Women are generally depected in

slender proportions. 1T -
N

One-twelfth of one tala is one talangula and one-eighth

of that is one talayava. In the tala method, for icons of any -
FIG. 03.05 PROPORTIONS IN NAVATALA
size, the measurements of the different parts of the body
are divided in fixed proportion of the prescribed heights. I
: t PROPORTION OF 1:1/2:1 /2:1:2:3
Fine details are marked in talangula and talayava and I
V")
....-
z GARBHAGRHA 1 UNIT SQUARE
sculptured. Thus the idol of any particular deity, large or :::> •
I~ ~
- Fvrt Pttrahir~ , Baiivatta.H{?
small, wi II have the same p ropo rti ons for their parts. -- - - - t/2 UJtit:jrbHI/ §a. ~~r~
Proportions are also fixed for seat, crown, weapons , etc. ~
h V")
t-
- f~JUi py/f:hi,tV... N;;~~LU rA JA~#,;·
U
;,; ~
The darycjamana has been explained under the stanzas 21 ~
---;;;;;T 1 UJtit:jrbH(, yar6flA:1r/ta,
V'\
r!Urd pya/cartV, v/iA lch~ U~ A fALf(_
and 22 of this chapter. -- - - - I'
- -2 writr Jr()m (iarb~rlt&
I f./) Fbttr!:-- Prtihir~ . . Pr~Uta-
z-
t-
CHARACTERISTICS OF SETTLEMENTS ~
1 tUtit:rfrb~ yar6~.r/ta,
- -_;t

F~ Pra/cara, . . Out-er walt

T

V'\

Stanza- 15 -- 7 tUtit:rJrb~ yarP~(fta,

+s UNITS + t-
!II~IE:IJ: ~i'11Cif:Q1 : I
5 UNITS
FIG. 03.06 PROPORTIONATE MEASURES
5 UNITS
- -
OF PANCAPRAKARA
' •

~\IJi~tlll~+tffi 'il~f4~)~~TJ ~i''~I~~Efl¥01 II

'

98 99
 Manu ~yalayac andrikab lla~y am Man u~yalayacandrikab lla~yam
Based on the number of houses of brahmins etc, many A village with the house of one noble brahmin along
different types of villages occur. By their different with his family surrounded by the houses of his servants is
measurements also, they become superior, medium and called ekabhoga.
small. •
Commentary
Stanza- 16
• • • In these 5 stanzas, the specifications for settlements
~r:::::r:rJ3.J !:II~~\ I Jt ........... : I Uanapada} are given. Arthatastra classifies settlements into
'it2t'i~tl!1fflld qfGflld !'llll~ns~ !:ll'ili II (i) grama (ii) khetaka (iii) kharvataka (4) durga and (v)
' nagara.
A square region of land of one yojana measure
(perimeter) is said as superior village, half of this . Grama is a village settlement with several families
measurement is medium and quarter of this measurement engaged mainly in agriculture and/or crafts. Grama is further
is mostly small. . subdivided into ekabhogagrama, agrahara, vidambaka, and
nigama. Of these only ekabhogagrama is described in this
Stanza -17 book since it is the typical Kerala village of ancient times
'1 J I~ '(=£1 '<i 5 '<i ~I R ~ '<i 5tl ~ I• \ i -:q Gozs '11 ;:j ~ lll d with the house of a brahmin landlord surrounded by the
' ' ' houses of his servants and dependants who owe allegiance
q\l'1'<i:li osd q)atf)cJactt~ ~ ft)ae)qdJt 11 to him. Agrahara is a village generally located around or in
' '
For nagara (town), there should be 1000 to 2000 da1zda front of a temple, mostly occupied by brahmins and governed
width. The region of land like this (viz. nagara) with sea by a council of senior citizens. Vidambaka is occupied by
shore having ships is called pattana (harbour town). farmers and nigama by craftsmen.

Stanza- 18 Khetaka is a village located far away from other villages

and generally occupied by tribal groups while kharvataka is
I a village lying in the caravan routes between towns or nations
'
'1 1~
3 ~l\if4~1CI1t1'<1Cf>cl\l1~1lll~lif~d f4~d¥f II and mainly serving the needs of the travellers .
'
The region of land which is important with the king's An uttamagrama has a perimeter of 1 yojana, madhya-
quarters and which has traders etc. is called pura. The magrama 1/2 yojana and adhamagriima 1/4 of a yojana.
stretch of land adorned by the palaces of the kings and nobles This classifications is based not on the type of settlement
and houses of common people is known as nagara. but only on the size of grama. The smallest village ~Y this
criterion will have a perimeter of 2000 darJcja or a w1dth of
Stanza- 19
500 danda• •
(1440m) .
A durga is a fort located at any strategi c point like hill
'
tops (giridurga - mountain fort) and islands Ualadurga -water
fort) . Nagara (town) is occupied by a large number of people

1()() 101

Manusya.layacandrikabha~yanz
•
of different classes. It is described that nagara will have
width between 1000 danda . .. (2.88km) and 2000 daf}ga
(5. 76km). This may appear to be contradictory to what has
been stated in stanza 16, where the perimeter of
uttamagrama is specified as 1 yojana (23 km) and that of a
madhyama gram a is 1/2 yojana. The sizes of the madhyama
and uttama gr8ma are the same as that of nagara. This is
due to the fact that the towns were concentrated settlements
whereas the villages were extensive settlements. The size
does not indicate the population.
A harbour town is pattana and a commercial town is
pura. In Artha/8.stra, a harbour town is called dror;imukha.
A town which is the headquarters of a state and where the
rulers and different classes of people live is called nagara.
Some texts (Artha~astra for example) call this rajadhani.
Stanza- 20
I (maryadas) are considered by this darztfa.
By the multiplicity of houses of brahmins etc. all
begining with grama are known to be of many types. By
difference in measurements, they are called utta111a,
111adhyama and adhama.
Commentary
This stanza may appear superfluous because wh at is
stated here has already been described in th e proceeding
stanzas. Some versions of Manu~yalaya candrika, hence.
omit this stanza. But this clarifi es th e differences between
th e structure and size of the settl ement. T he classification
of the settlement as grama , nagara, etc. is base d on th e
demographic and economi c stru cture. De pe ndin g on
measurem e nts , a settl e m ent typ e m ay h ow ev er be
1()2
Manu.syaJayacandrikabha~yatn
characterised as uttama, madhyama and adhama- meaning
large, medium or small.
MEASUREMENT OF TEMPLES
Stanza- 21
-::r.;::r':J"l"'ni'T.dT'C:rrr::::rt 'i f•4~ f4 ~'II ~ ~ I
Go~~'Iii \i\il J Ifd 511· <II Cl ~11 ~ Cf>l 'it21 : I I
In temples, the width of the garbhagrha between the
outside edges of 2 wall plates is superior daJJtfa. Similarly
that which ends outside thejagati is mediu1n
Stanza- 22
'nT::~rTl"r.;::rr;:'lrttT::lt:t Go~ : SJil \ <Pl S~ : I
!JIIfiiGIG ~~~~4~Gt: q->:q d?T Cf><''=lll : ~ : II
'
Thedanda to the outside ofpaduka is said to be inferior.
.' .
In temples, outside the garbhagrha, the five boundanes
Commentary (Stanzas 21 and 22)
Reference was made to talamana, a system of
proportionate scale in the making of icons (~tanza 14 of
this chapter). OaQ(iamana is another proportiOnate scale
used in the planning of temples.
In dandam8na, the measurement of a specific part of the
structure i~ 'taken as a danda (standard rod or module) and ~II
other measurements are 'taken as ratios of this da!Jcfa. ThiS
danda should not be confused with the 4 hasta dar9a
m~n.tioned earlier in the absolute method of m~asure~ent.
For example, for pillars, the diameter or lateral dlmenslo.n at
top is taken as a dal}cja (module) and its height etc are given
in terms of this dat;u;la (For details, see sl. 24 of ch.S) .
. -
In the construction of temples also , daQ9amana IS
l ()3
 M anufyaJayacandrikab navam Man u~yaJayac andrikab ha~y am
employed. Here the dalJcja is the width of the garbhagrha
(shrine room). This is used to demarkate the boundary lines
(prakara) of a temples and for proportioning the different parts
of the garbhagrha.
, The garbhagrha. is also called vimana
because its parts are measured in a proportionate system. •

In temples, the boundary lines of the five regions

enveloping the central shrine (prasada) are called panca-
..
prakaras (five boundary walls) (fig. 03.06). They are called
antarmarygala, antahara, madhyahara, b8hyahara and
maryada respectively in the increasing order of distance from
= ..,
the garbhag(ha. Their positions relative to the prasada are
decided by proportionate measurements, viz. daf}cjamana.
The standard danda• •
is the outside to outside distance between
2 parallel wall plates of the pras8da (fig.03.07). All the other
measurements, horizontal or vertical, are made in proportion
to this danda.
, ,

w--- - 2· 10 - -+-4
The practice of measuring dar;qa from outside to outside
of wall plates is considered superior (uttama), when compared ..........,__ _ 3·20 ----+-~

to the practice of basing daf)da on the outside widths of other

elements of the basement (adhi$tft8na) (fig.03.07). Darga •
VEDIKA 3-
measured as outside width of jagati is medium (madhyama) PRATI 3 -1 4
and that based on outside width of paduka is inferior (adhama). GALA 3-12
0-20
This indicates the importance attributed to the roof frame as JAGATI

compared to the walls or basement and speaks of the origin of

the temple from an (early) wooden structure (marqapa). With
later stone masonry constru ction , measurements perhaps t
+ 0/0 WALL PLATE
came to be taken based on walls or basement. ;
0/0 JAGATI
, t
0/0 PADUKAM
CONCEPT OF YON/ (ORIGIN)
(All dimensions in hasta-angula)
Stanza- 23
~~ f4f%tt: tlct?l ~~~,r) lU<f FIG. 03.07 STANDARD MODULE (DANCJA) FOR TEMPLES

: eft d I~i ~ IG~ : I

err tCI\ii)s -
~t'*~ : ~iGI II
1()4 105

Man u~4;yalayac andriklzh ha.SY am
In the elements of vehicles (yiiiza), ketu (flag) yoni
alone is prescribed. After all, it is appropriated
everywhere. In cots (paryanka) etc., gaja (elephant) yoni
and in seats and chariots etc. sinzha (lion) yoni are desired.
For box, well, lake and cage, the yo1zi is vrsa (bull) or
dhvaja (ketu) and then for all types of platforms of banyan
tree etc dhvajayoni is prescribed.
Stanza- 24
I Commentary (Stanzas 23, 24, 25 and 26)
'
II
For measuring vessels etc, tanks, wells etc, courtyard
and sanctu~_sanctorum yoni is. computed inside. For
square catussala, the centre line of wall plate is considered
in some cases; in all other situations (it is to be)outside.
Stanza- 25
~~Ste~~lfGtd
lll~~~ -~ Ste~tAs~: I
l!HfCII~'{?I (_! -:::t-ri. fa ~ ftt ~I d I
err «1ll: II
When the desired combination of width and length (viz.
peri"_~eter) .is mu!tiplied by 3 and divided by eight, the
remainder IS yoltl; when this is divided by fourteen the
by. 8 and divided by 12, the remainder isaya (income), when
this (the product) is divided by 27, the remainder isnaksatra
(star), a~~ the quotient here is to be known as vayas (~ge).
When d1v1ded by 3(), the remainder is tithi (phase of the
moon) and when divided by seven, the remainder is vara
(~eek). When multiplied by nine and divided by 10, a
different (type of) expenditure (will happen).
I <>6
-
Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y a1n
Stanza- 26
: Sh~O) ~: I
>lllll~lfl~tfls~ : =(=JI'=f~ f4q~ II
Starting from the east, the eight yonis will be dhvaja
(flag),dhuma (smoke), sintha (lion),kukkura (monkey), vrsa
(bull), khara (dog), gaja (elephant) and vayasa (crow) in
order. Of them, the odd ones are for wealth and even ones
are for disaster.
•
These stanzas explain the concept of yoni (origin or
orientation) and indicate the procedure for calculating the
astrological indicators. However, the order of the stanzas
is not systematic. Before explaining what is the meaning
and significance of yoni concept, the yoni numbers to be
used for different artefacts are mentioned. Stanzas 25 and
26 should come before stanzas 23 and 24. Hence a brief
description of the yoni concept is given below before
I
commenting on the stanzas.
The concept of yoni is used to fix the prime dimensions
of the vastu from its orientation with respect to the focal
point, viz. the Brahman8bhi. All vastus are considered to be
•
facing this focal point. A V8stu can take 8 locations relative
to the focal point in eight directions - 4 in the cardinal
directions and 4 in the corner directions. The position of a
vastu vis-a-vis the focal point decides its yoni. For example,
a building located on the east side of the Brahman8bhi and,
therefore, facing west is of dhvajyoni or ketuyoni ( dhva;a
and ketu both mean flag). The names of other yonts and
their locations are shown in table. 03.05.
The yoniis computed by multiplying the prime dimensions
of the vastu by 3 and dividing the product by 8, correspondmg_
to the 8 possible directions. The remainder is called yam
107
----~~--------------------------~-------------------- -~----~----------~--------~----~--------------

Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyam
Man u~yaJayac andri/Uzb ha~y am •

and hence what is stated in them should be the most is generally adopted for the building as a whole and inside
perimeter for the individual rooms. But in some case both
appropriate. Moreover, as perimeter is a combination of length
inside and outside perimeters as well as the centre line
and width , it can be taken to be indicative of the plan
perimeter are considered.
composition of the building. Since the height of the building
will be related to its width by padayonirule (as explained later), In addition to the yoni, certain other jyotisa factors are
in a design scheme, perimeter is related to height also. Hence also used in selecting the dimensions and locations of
the perimeter is adopted as the prime dimension for houses. vastus. They are also computed from the prime dimensions
p of the vastu as given in table. 03.07.
The smallest perimeter that gives yoni number 1 is 3 hasta
when multiplied by 3 it gives 9 pada. Every increment of 2H TABLE. 03.07 COMPUTATION OF YON/ AND JYOTISA FACTORS.
16A ( = 8 pada) gives the same yoni. It can be seen that the Factor Computation Remarks
groups of perimeters giving the same yoni numbers are located i) Yoni (Origin) Px3/8 Remaindersl -8 giveyoninumbers
on the 8 radialvectors in 8 directions of an Archemedian spiral
with an initial radius of 3H and a pitch of 2H16A (fig.03.08). ii) "Yaya Px3/14 Remainder is expenditure
Px9/10
The yoni concept was originally used for giving
iii)Aya(lncome) Px8/12 Remainder is income
dimensional identity to the building on the basis of their
orientation. Out of 8 possibilities, only four were favoured. It iv)N~·atra (Star: Px8/27 Remainders 1to27 give 27 stars
was prescribed that the odd yoni numbers are good and even starting from Aswati
numbers are inauspicious. This is to avoid the corner locations. v) Vayas (Age) Px8/27 Quotients 1,2,3,4 5 corresponds
Further, specific dimensional sets or yonis were ascribed as to balya (chilhood), kaurrWra
desirable ones to specific artefacts as shown in Table. 03.06. (adolescence), yauvarla(youth)
t vardh.akya, (old age), mara!1Q
TABLE 03.06 THE DESIRABLE YON/FOR DIFFERENT VASTUS
(death)
Desirable
vi)Tfthi (Phase of Px8/30 Remainder 1 to 30 give tith.i
Vastu Yoni number Yoni Name
moon) from the fir t phase of moon
Vehicles (yan.a) 1 Dhvaja (pratipada) of s!ztklapak~a
Cots (paryanka) 7 Gaja
-
Scats ( pitha) and chairs (asana) 3 Si1n.ha
vii) Dhruwa Px2/ 16 Balance i dhruva
(Stability) Px3/16
Boxes, wells, lakes, cages 5 \tj--~·a
or dhvaja
Protective platform viii) Ra[i (Month) Px4/12 Balance 1s month (ra i)
I Dhvaja
Px8/ 12
For wells, tanks, courtyard (ankara), sanctum
ix) Vara (Week) PxR/7 Remainder. 1 to 7 give week
sanctorum etc with clearly defined interior, the internal
, tarting from Monday.
perimeter was used for computing the yoni. For large
ote: P is the prin1c: din1ensio n in lu.tsta . This te xt uses perin1eter a~ prin1c din1e nsion .
constructions like houses and palaces , the outside perimeter
111
I 1()
 Man usyalayac andrikab ha~y atn
•
Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~yam
Stanza- 27
Stanza- 30
~~r.~~~~~~~~. •
•
511 i2 I I -:t-.::r~'I"'Tr: ~ ~ li q RJ fct
~i 1fit~ en) s... I
' -v~1rr.1<;;::~.:tnllJrrij G ~I oII ~=4 i 1n1net:hf~: A.TJ l(J Gil : 1
&CJflt~ffisfll tiel<; I Jtla~·tr: ~~
' :q ct"iqd) qf~~ ftlrc:: s~
~icl~&Cifltf%(1) f4~)qa: II '
-::r-::r: ~~ tt \if ~:;:rrtn- TI scit ct 4C1 I I
Ketu yoni is the giver of desired wealth, is of gentle
(satwa) quality, is the guru of gods (Brhaspati-Jupitor) and In the east, ketu is prescribed. In the design of houses
is brahmana. Though prescribed in the eastern direction, it
'
is specially suitable for all (vastus) in all directions. mentioned, ketuyoni is also suitable. In the north, gaja is
Stanza- 28 suitable, also ketu and simha. In the west, let there be vrsa
also others ketu, simha and gaja. And in the corner houses
. . '
+-+r-~ G~fDI~fCR~a: <:1&•ft!Jic;~,lll"f~il in the same way (of the related houses).
S~ ~lJq;~ ~IGtXl: I Commentary (Stanzas 27,28, 29 and 30)
..........-.p: qfA.~IOf~ fCR~ffiscba'i&l ~l·li!JI~~''''ifl:
These four stanzas give the qualities of the four yonis.
x=t~!>fhCJ>)s~ ~ -4 PftJ~diX"?t~ a Pff.~ctl : II (see table 03.05). For each of the corner houses, the yoni
of the house related to that corner house is to be considered.
Simha yoni is located in the south, is Kuja (mars), is
The relations of the corner house to the cardinal house is
giver of prosperity, is of tantas quality, and is k~atriya.
decided from the_ ~ttribute of the regents of directions. NE
Gajayoni is vaiiya (trading class), is located in north, is doer corner, ruled by !sa is related to the east; SE corner, ruled
of welfare, is Budha (mercury) and of rajas a quality. by Agni to the south, SW corner, ruled by Nir(fi to the west
Vrsayoni is suited to siidra (working class), is located in and NW corner, ruled by Marut to the north. This relations
~~t, is Sani (saturn), is giver of grains and is of tamas is used to assign the yoni to corner houses as given in
character. The yo1zis prescribed for corners are despised table 03.08.
even there (i.e. they are not used even for corner houses). TABLE. 03.08
Stanza- 29
RELATION OF CORNER HOUSES TO MAIN HOUSES
~TJ: ~=liiG Cf>cl~S(oqqcf1dl 101CJfa I
' Corner Related to Prescribed Yoni
tlCII\5·~ _ ........ : ~=llld ~=t4f4~34l~ll'(-<lffi Pi~l :II
' ' ' N-E E Dhvaja
There will be fear in dhunuz and quarrel in kukkura. S- E s Simh.a
In khara, indiscrimination occurs and in Kaka there will be S- W w Vrsabha
• •

the end of the race. Hence all corner yonis are despised. N-W N Gaja

112 113
 Manusyalayacandrikabha~yam Man usyalayac andrikab nasyam
• ' .
For certain houses, other yonis are also prescribed in rule that the perimeter of the square built on them will belong
addition to its own specified yoni (table 03.09). Since all ~he to that set of perimeter characteristic of the yoni of the vastu
odd yon is can be used tor the western h~use, its computation (fig.03.09). It means that not only the outside perimeter of the
is easy and hence is the popular one m Kerala. vastu, but its inside perimeter, square built on its width, length
TABLE. 03.09 ACCEPTABLE YONIS FOR HOUSES etc. all should have the same yoni. It can be compared to the
,
genetic matching of every tissue representing the whole. This
Location of N arne of house Own Other acceptable uniqueness will make each vastu a separate entity, providing
•

house with
•
yont yont it a unique +ndividuality like that of the human being. Hence
respect to only prescribed yonis should be adopted for all houses.
focal point (Nijayoni)
•
In the analysis of Vastu, the concept of yoni is given an
E Eastern house 1 --- important place. The yoni concept groups the perimeters
s Southern house 3 1 into 8 groups as given in table. 03.1 0.
N Northern house 7 1,3
1,3,7 TABLE 03.10 GROUPING OF PERIMETERS ON THE BASIS OF YON/
w Western house 5
Yoni 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YON/, THE SOUL OF HOUSES •
Nos .
Stanza- 31 0-08 0-16 1-00 1-08 1-16 2-00 2-08 2-16
: 511011 ~ ~l·•li li~'(IIICf ~
.....Cl)
3-00 3-08 3-16 4-00 4-08 4-16 5-00 5-08
!tlt;l~'' tttmllJ m~!J11)G: I ~ ~
:x: . 4

c :::3
TI"'::J~:J'I' : ~-. 4fl ~ Ql Cl ~ li ·-.. c:~ 5-16 6-00 6-08 6-16 7-00 7-08 7-16 8-00
CDq:
..,
!Jilt"' IdS f.itt :t
ttci «11 q d II G)'"C
' ' E c 8-08 8-16 9-00 9-08 9-16 10-00 10-08 10-16
Yoni is the very soul of the building. Hence the yoni ·;: ~
CD
suitable for each is to be adopted. In all housesmrtyu (death) c..
should certainly be avoided. If it (m.rtyu) is adopted, all ••
11-00 11-08 11-16 12-00 12-08 12-16 13-00 13-08
Continued
dangers will happen.
Commentary Each group of table 03.10 has a specific orientation.
The perimeter includes width and length and therefore
Although yoni was conceived as on architectural for~ula indicates area also. In a design scheme it can be related
deciding the orientation and modular measure of the vastu, even to the height in a proportionate system. Hence it is an
later it came to the attached to each and every element of the • indicator of the horizontal and vertical compositions of the
vastu. This was achieved through what is known as the building. Thus the yoni concept which groups the perimeters
padayoni principle. According to this principle, every element into 8 separate categories is an attempt at standardisation
of the vastu is to chosen such that its dimensions satisfy the of the dimensions. That is why it is stated that yoni is the soul

114
\
115
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam

of all vastus. At the same time, suitability of a perimeter . The 8y8di sadwarga comprises of orientation (yom) ,
depends not only on the yoni but on the astrological factors tncome- expenditure (ayavyaya), age (vayas), star (naksatra),
like income, expenditure, age, week, month, phas~ o~ the phase of the moon (tith1), and month (ras1). The incom"e and
moon, star, etc. which were described earlier. The cntena for expenditure of an auspicious perimeter should be such that
the income is more than the expenditure. Table. 03.11 gives
judging the suitability are given in the subsequent stanzas.
the computed values of income and expenditure for perimeters
INCOME TO BE MORE THAN EXPENDITURE form 3H to 1OH8A in multiples of 16 angula. It can be seen
that of these 12 perimeters considered, income is above
Stanza- 32
expenditure in only 6 cases marked by the asterix.
3t tlt Iff-1 Cfli dt ll d : ~i 11.11 tl ~r9rr::mrrrut'TI : I -AYA & VYAYA FOR PERIMETERS.
TABLE 03.11
";{ 1hci \Tll1 Rt :~II ~=ill Rfll: '
II • Perimeter Yoni Income Expendi tore
By all means, income more than the expenditure H A H A H
should be earned, otherwise dangers (will occur). The 3-00 1 12 - 00* 9
auspiciousness of the star etc. should be well understood 3- 16 3 5 -08 11
through astrology etc. 4-08 5 10 - 16 13
5-00 7 4 - 00* 1
Commentary 5- 16 1 9 - 08* 3
In the traditional sciences of India, material and esoteric 6 - 08 3 2 - 16 5
aspects are so intermingled that it is difficult to c~mp.letely 7-00 5 8 - 00* 7
ignore one and take the other exclusively. Determmat1on of 7- 16 7 1 - 08 9
the superiority (uttamatva) or inferiority (adhamatva) of a 8-08 I 6 - 16 11
given perimeter based on several astro~ogical fact?r~ is .a 9 - 00 3 12 - 00 13
typical example. The first act in the d.es1g~ of a bu1ldmg ~s 9- 16 5 5 - 08* 1
the adoption of a perimeter based on t?fadtrgha. Hence th1s 10 - 08 7 10 - 16* 3
is considered as the birth of the vastu. As the events in life * Income more than expenditure
are predicted on the basis of the position of the planets
(grahasthitt) at the time of birth, the characteristics and future COMPUTATIONS OF AGE
effects of the vastu are based on the prime dimensions viz. Stanza- 33
the perimeter. The six major astrological factors (ay"iidi
$adwarga) are considered as the horoscope (ku(ujalim) of
fitlcl(ci c61~=tt~ lil~~li~ Cll~cb -:q i)t~;:i -:q I
the vastu. This is the reason for stating that the I 4.:>-:q Cltl i~=4&-l· <~ . ~I tel i)t II
auspiciousness (Subhatva) should be known through
The age has 5 stages- childhood (Oalatva ), adolescenece
astrological considerations. Jyotif~astra means ast.r onomy,
(kauniara ), the youth (yauvana ), old age (vardhakya ) and
but here it is used to denote astrology (Jyoti~a) .
11 7
11 6
 Manu syaJayac andrikab ha~y am Manu~yalayacandrikabliiz~yam
•
death (nidhana/ m(tyu). Of these the last one (viz. death) is not A probable logic behind this concept is (1) to
desirable. The others are good in artefacts. sys~ematise the dimensional categories of vastu on a priority
basrs (2) to group them into discrete sets for design purposes
Commentary and (3) to classify the dimensions into those suitable tor
secular structures and those unsuitable for secular
As stated already, the age is determined on the basis of structures but may be suitable for mystic uses. The
the quotient obtained when the perimeter is multiplied by 8 elin:'ination of the maraf)aparyantas groups the acceptable
and divided by 27. When the quotient is one, the age is perrmeters into distinct sets - set one from 3H 09A to 16H
childhood. It is assumed that the childhood starts when the 21 A, set two from 20H 06A to 33H 18A and so on (see
quotient is one and continues till the quotient becomes two. table 03.12). The perim~ters of the first set are suitable for
Two to three is adolescence, 3 to 4 is youth and 4 to 5 is old small vastus like seats (pitha}, fire altar (agnikunda}, platform
age. Death occurs when the quotient is 5. From then on till for jasmine plant (mal/ikuttima), doors etc. The perimeters
the quotient becomes 6 (5+ 1), the lifeless stage continues. of the second group are suitable for small houses of
2 2
When the quotient is 6, childhood again starts and the cycle approximately 13m to 36m area. Still larger houses can
continues. According to this belief, the perimeter coming within be built with the perimeters coming in the next groups.
the lifeless stage. (maraf}aparyanta) are bad. Others are good. These distinct groups can be used for people of different
Therefore, the perimeters coming in the last column (death) of social status or wealth. The marayQaparyanta distinctly
table 03.12 are avoided in all constructions. demarcates the dimensional groups without ambiguity as
• small, medium, large, very large, etc. Again the perimeters
TABLE. 03.12 AGE OF PERIMETERS
coming under columns 3 and 4 are favoured to those under
Set Childhood Adolescence Youth Old age Death 2 and 5. The perimeter coming under the last column of
1 2 • 3 4 5 6 • table.03.12 are routinely avoided for houses. However, there
are cases in which they are found to be adopted for many
1. 3H9A- 6H18A- 10H3A- 13H12A- 16H21A- extant buildings, specially for temples, indicating their
6Hl8A 10H3A 13H12A 16H21A 20H6A acceptability for mystic uses.
2. 20H6A- 23H15A- 27HOA- 30H9A- 33H18A-
VARIATIONS IN THE FORMULAE FOR YON/ ETC.
23H15A 27HOA 30H9A 33H18A 37H3A
Stanza- 34
3. 37H3A- 40H12A- 43H21A- 47H6A- 50Hl5A-
40H12A 43H21A 47H6A 50H15A 54HOA ,...Jl"Tf ~ cp.fllTlJ -

4. 54HOA 57H9A 60H18A 64H03A 67H12A ~&i fch11Rcto1f~1~'(~ :q d~l '(1~14) ~SICbl'(l : I
-
57H9A 60Hl8A 64H03A 67H12A 70H21A
FclCbcil.-. 4)"!liiC:ll: ~:
5. 70H21A 74H06A 77H15A 81HOA 84H09A ~u::r· Cbllt'114~t~&5S·lld II
74H06A 77Hl5A 81HOA 84H09A 87H18A '
Yoni is of two types, vyaya is said to be four, aya and
6. 87H8A 91H03A 94H12A 97H21A 101H6A
91H03A 94H12A 97H12A 101H6A 104H15A
vayas are of two types; nak~atra, varl}as beginning with

119
118 •
 Man usyalayac andrikab ha;y am
•
br'ilhmana, tithi and so also riiSi etc. are of two classes; vli!"a
is of 3 c~tegories; dhruva etc. are of three types. Like this
) oni etc. will happen differently. In what have been
mentioned, those stated earlier are acceptable to all. The
others are to be used only when necessary.
Cotrunentary
There are variations in the formulae for computing yoni
an ~d the astrological factors, computations for these have been
given in stanzas 40 to 43. The author says that what has been
stated earlier (in stanza 25 of this chapter) is acceptable to all.
The variations can be used only when it is essential. The author
simply lists the variations in computations noticed by him, but
recommends those stated earlier as acceptables.
Stanza- 35
'<11&fl•li q~OIJ~d: tll•lllt:m cfttfd)
Man u~yalayacandrikab llasy am
building from the footing to the
----------
top of wall, height of
basement and the height of the column etc. also satisfy the
conditions, it is very auspicious. Ayadi rules can be applied
to area by taking area in square padas.
The procedure for computing yonifor linear dimensions
is called padayoni procedure which has been briefly stated
•
• *
under stanza 31. According to this, total height, basement
• •
height, column height etc. can be so chosen that the
perimeter of the square constructed on these dimensions
as side.also should satisfy the yoni rules. This ensures that
not only the overall perimeters but also the length, width
and height are fixed in a particular dimensional set. Indirectly
the perimeters of all surfaces of a room - floor, walls and
roof are made to satisfy the yoni criterion (fig.03.9).
•

f4fZII~OI ~ I .. -: ···H··:
•
•
•
• ••

• • •
__.. . . ' ·.' . . . : : I
f4"<;:11'( J~d~ eialsftr T.l 'F1 Cf> "<4l CJ>d41·liiG41 .
. .. .
.. . . .. .. . . .
: .: : ...
. ............ . . ..
.
.
,'
' ' ...... ...-. . . " .
. .. .. .- .......
~
SQUARE ON H
,.., -.. . ~

\illdi~C:fcl~n'Jf~l tf&fl•<l~)q;~~~ II ,., / .·... .......• : .· t·. . .. . .

I e • • a • a •
• •

'
-
i •

. . .. .. .
•
I
• •
•
•
•
e
• • f
•

•
•
•
•

From the perimeter, theyoni etc. prescribed for oneself . . , .

•

-·. .. ..---
• •
• •
• • •

•
.
•

should generally emerge. If the yoni etc. prescribed for one SQUARE ON L
is obtained in houses separately for length width height
from ground to wall plate (padamatza), pillar (cara!la), ' SQUAREONW
basement (adhisthana)
• •
and by the product of width and •

length as well as by what have been stated as alternatives, it FIG.03. 09. PADAYONI PRINCIPLE
• • •
IS very auspiCIOUS. Stanza- 36
Commentary ~icitt II~ !=ftlt;:fl tl~q~~ct ~IJC:
'
Usually if the perimeter satisfies the conditions ~'fl1fJ~tOt~tr~t~llfllfaf4e~lit Eit~~·Cittc:lllsftr 1
regarding yoni and other ayadi ~adwarga considerations, it 3li'{>GI~<I~ :q ~dclf4~'<i'ftdh~pritGJ f4CJ>c4 -
is considered auspicious. In addition to this, if area, and
linear dimensions like the width, length, total height of ~)q;~~tt~-:cr Cbt4t ~Cf>cJtdl lll~'ilc:t~-:cr lilZTlll: I
'
120
 Manu~yalayacandri/[Qbfla~yatn
M anu~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
In all houses, the dimensions of the length, width, total out. This (procedure) relates to the inside of the space
(abhyantaravyapi). •

height from ground to wall plate, pillar, basement and

sanctum sanctorum, the door, icons, etc., arudhottara and Commentary
all other uttaras, and the different parts of two-storied
construction should be fixed based on the perimeter of the Some texts of Manu~y8/ayacandrika (eg. K. Neela-
.... kantan Achari) include another stanza here as follows:
main uttara (varottara) (in a proportionate system). If they
•
are fixed based on different computations, they are to be
made suitable (by padayoni) to adjacentyoni. •
•

Commentary
This again stresses that tbe different parts of the
horizontal and vertical factors of the building should have
the same yoni as that of the perimeter computed outside the
main uttara (wall plate). In temples, the sanctum sanctorum, These two stanzas indicate that for perfection, the yoni
main door, icon, etc. should conform to the yoni of the of the area should conform to the yoni of the perimeter.
perimeter of main uttara. If there are more than one storey
for the building, tt'le parts of additional stories also should . For computing the yoni of area, the multiplication by 3
conform to the same yoni. If these are computed according ts not done. This clearly indicates that multiplication by 3 is
to the different beliefs mentioned earlier, slight adjustments to convert hasta into pada and that pada is taken as the
in the measurements can be made to obtain yonis suitable basic unit for computing yoni of houses. Hence, for
for it (nijayonis or related yonis). I
computing the yoni of the area, both the length and width
shou~d ?e in pada units so that area is in square pada. If the
CONSIDERATIONS OF AREA - ~rea 1s 1n square hasta, it has to be multiplied by 9 to convert
Stanza- 37 1t to square pada. The area is then directly divided by eight.
The astrological factors of the area should also be good. It
ll)?tq;c'i ~dl;lj~gdJlll4 ~ay be. noted that Brhatsamhita adopts area as the prime
I d1mens1ons for computing yoni. This system, however, is
• not generally followed now.
MJ3J~ '11 ~ q d
• '
- :rt'::n:lr1"'1Y:;:c-::2Tl'T
' ' ALTERNATE PROCEDURES FOR COMPUTING THE
q;~l~\j ~~~tRq;fllci ,q1~·d'(&JI~ ~ II
ASTROLOGICAL FACTORS
The length multiplied by width should be understood r
•
• Stanza- 38
as area. The width and length should be decided earlier in
such a way that the desiredyoni will be obtained by choosing
the length and width. Then, as was prescribed for perimeter, I
all computations beginning with vyaya should be carried
123
122
•
 •

Man u~yaJayac andrikab hasy am

--------- Man u~yalayacandrikab ha~yam
Stanza- 40 (khara), attractiveness (kanta), cheerfulness of mind
~·C:~ q~\:(1 TJ 4:>CIC'14:floti~S~ err f5t~tdl (manaiJprasada), attractive face (sumukhatva), aversion
~ ~ f4CJ><Aq ~IJCid : ~ltilld I (vaimukhya), roughness (asaumyatva), enmity (virodha),
' production of wealth (vittodbhava), consumption (k~aya),
~£4S6·Cbl~~dS : Cb&lli; crying (akranda), progress (vrdhi) and victory (jaya) will
' '
•
• ~~~Ill: II happen in the order. For these, the effect will be similar to
their na1nes.
When nine times the perimeter or the perimeter as such J

is divided by 30, as before, what remains is the phase of the Commentary (Stanzas 40, 41, 42 and 43)
moon in both palqas (half the lunar month), according to
In these 4 stanzas, computation of astrological factors
different methods. The perimeter multiplied by 3 or by 9 by methods other than that mentioned earlier in stanza 25
when divided by 4, the remainders will be brahma'!-as etc. •
is described (table.03.14)
(brahmana,
•
ksatriya,
•
vaisya, sudra) in order. The perimeter TABLE.03.14
multiplied by 4 or by eight and divided by 12, the remainders
•
ALTERNATE METHOD FOR COMPUTING
will be months. ASTROLOGICAL FACTORS
Stanza- 41
Phase of the moon : P x 9/30 or P/30, the remain del
4:>CJcl~I~S~~d ~~ Tl ~ltil1d Cll~ : I is phase of the moon
P x 3/4 or P x 9/4, the
err ~~ err ~1tl~f1 ~CIItU: ~ : II
•
Varna •
•
remainder is varna. 1 is
Either the perimeter as such or perimeter multiplied •
brahmana, 2 is ksatriya 3 is
by 3 when divided by 7, the weeks are left. Perimeter • vaisya and 4 is sudra.
multiplied by 2 or 3 and divided by 16, dhruvas (qualities) Month •
• P x 4/12 or P x 8/12, remain de
will occur. is month (rasi) from mesa
• Stanzas - 42 & 43 onwards
Week •
• P/7 or Px 3/7, the remainder
is week from monday onwards
•

: ~ ~ Cb I• 'I '"1.-:t : ~ ~i IG~lj~ 'Cl '! I I Dhruva •

• P x 2/16 or P x 3/16, the
remainder is dhruva etc.
"'~1l:JTc2JrlYt1ri:m=a- ~ it~ f4 (nG1i 4 &1 til Sf> •41 : I
•

' The 16 qualities beginning with the value of dhruv.a

-:cr Cfift~l: ~i:mg~ q;cl ~~~t11'! II are given. The effect of each will be as indicated by thetr
names.
The sum of area and expenditure when divided by 16,
the remainders will also givedhruva ~tc. • Stability (dhruva), 1n
addition to the astrological factors mentioned
grains (dhanya), success (jaya), calamity (vinasa), hardness above, other astrological factors like vi~ti, gandanta and

126 127
 Man usyaJayac andrikab hasyam
• Man u~yaJayac andriklib ha~y am
rikta are also taken into consideration in deciding the
REFERENCES
superiority (uttamatwa) of a perimeter.

Visti is the period of 30 nadika (12 hours) of the following 03.01 d?ll<;~ 9(i!JICI~lllfti
phases of the moon: In Suklapak~a, first 30 n8dikas of Jfi~~CII~cl ~~ rr~ ~i9(i1Gt21d tid: II
pauroami and a~tami and second 30 nadikas (31 to 60) of '
V.V.,III- 3
ekadasi and caturtthi and in aparapaksa, first 30 nadikas of
saptami and caturdaSi and second 30 n8dikas of daSami
and trfiya. The period of vi~ti is said to be inauspcious.
M.M., V- 1
•

Gandanta is the period of 15 nadikas (ie. quarter day)

03.03
in the begining of the stars (aswati, makam, and mulam
and in the end of the revati, ayilyam andjye~fha. Gandanta v.v., 1- 6
period is also to be avoided. •

/
Rikta tithis are caturtthi, navami and caturdasi. These
V.V., I- 9
also should be avoided according to the astrological canons.
03.05
In the first chapter itself, the author has stated that he
has referred to all available literature on the subject for M.S., 11-29
compiling this text. That is the reason for giving several 03.06 ~:rrrr.;::r : 4; Cl ~ 4Cl Cb Itl f
versions and practices for computing yoni and astrological ~CIIc1lllcfl~ CJT I
factors. All these must have been in vogue in India in one -::t:TJ:'2'1t; r;hT:l~:>T
•
¥Of o:g cll.-:t I -
place or other. But it may be noted that the author has given
•
first the formulae given in the stanza 25 and the others as ~ix4?1 ... K.A.,
'
differing versions. This definitely shows that the author gives
03.07 ~ft xtt I!II tl Pas Cb If: Z1 ~ f3r~ xffi . -
importance to the computations indicated in stanza 25. '
Tantra·s amuccaya , the reference compilation for religious ~·flli . : CJ)Udl i2G•\i 0(1": I
rituals and structures, uses these formulae. In fact the ~rRJ.,i -:q ~141r:u14 -:q ~i~ra ~-
stanza 25 (l?tatanavitanamananicaye) of this book is taken
.....................-......... ~~· £11Eitfl~6il II
from Tantrasamuccaya (stanza 3 of patala 2 of part - I and
J
stanza- 3 of chapter-2 of Part- II) . The same sloka appears T.S.,(S) V - 7
in Vastulak$ana (stanza-30). This confirms that of all the
diverse methods, the computations given in stanza 25 were
conclusively accepted by the jyotisis on the authority of
•
Tantrasamuccaya.

128 129
I
 •

·-

• '

-
• •

•
 Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~yam

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
•

Fig. Page CHAPTER-4

04.01 CLASSIFICATION OF HOUSES BASED ON
NUMBER OF SALAS
SV11ll:
,_ ,_ 135
/
04.02 PARAMASA YIKAMANDALA WITH 0/K SALAS 138
04.03
• •
LAYOUT AND PLANNING OF SALAS
PERIMETER FROM ISTADiRGHA 139
• •
04.04 EFFICIENCY OF RECTANGLES 145 ~ll·lll
04.05 MINIMAL SIZE OF A RESIDENCE 148 '
64.06 DIVIDING SALA INTO CONVENIENT ROOMS 149
COMPUTATIONS BASED ON DESIRED LENGTH OF
/,_ -
04.07 CLASSIFICATION OF CATUSSALA BASED HOUSE (ISTADIRGHAVIDHI)
ON BRHTSAMHITA
. ,
.-
, .. 152
Stanza- 1
04.08 DESIGN OF A SUDDHBHINNASALA 155
=<"4 I-4) tC I cl ~ c!1tt '"I '511 oIfc) ~
/-
04.09 FRIENDSHIP BETWEEN SALAS
, ,_
•
157
04.10 SLI$TABHINNASALA TYPES
04.11
. ~

DESIGN OF A SLISTABHINNASALA
I
•
157
m·lllll~4m«tliiR ~4 ~ci51Cbi'{IGf() I
158
04.12 SAMSLJSTABHINNASALA
• • •
I /-
159 =<i I 'II tll~ -
04.13 DESIGN OF A SAMSL/STABHINNASALA
04.14
, "" . . 161 cftdatt~~fa ~r::r ~ ll~l?ll~·ll•\l~lt4 ~n: II
SLISTABHINNASTASALA
• • 163
04.15 JOINTS OF WALL PLATES After adopting yon~ aya, nak~atra, vayas, vyaya etc.,
/ / 165
04.16 MISRABHINNASALA 167
which are by all means made auspicious for the perimeters
J ,
04.17 SAMMISRABHINNASALA , 167
of the respective houses with the desired length and
J ,,_
04.18 MISRAKACATUSSALA 172
courtyard dimensions, the intelligent person (sth.apati)
I ' .-
04.19 CATUSSALA . should make the length and width in such a way that the
04.20
- /-
172
MADHYAPRARUDDHASALA
.. ' 175 corridor will be small when they (length and width) conform
04.21 EXPANSION OF EKASALA
,_ ORIZONTALLY 178
-
to the rules of istadirgha (desired length) and -
gu'!amsa
.,
04.22 EXPANSION OF EKASALA VERTICALLY
•

, /-
179 (multiple of fraction).
04.23 COMBINATION OF CATUSSALAS
/.- 180
04.24 TYPES OF TRISALAS Commentary
/-
180
04.25 TYPES OF DVISALAS
181 I ·The three dimensional visible form of vastu grows out
of a plan composition. The plan shape defined by a bounding
perimeter (paryantasutra) is designated as the mar;pala.
The search for perfect forms, common to atl design
philosophies, led the ancient sages to man_y shapes such
as circle, regular polygons and combinations of regul~r

•
133
 •

Manufyalayacandrikabllafyam •
Manu~yalayacandrikabha$yam
shape. The enquiry was also directed to the ideal proportions
of rectangular spaces. The condition that the buildings
should be oriented in the cardinal directions led to the
adoption of square and rectangle as the most commonly
used shapes. These shapes also had the advantage that
their centres (Brahmanabhl) can be easily located as the •

'
point of intersection of the diagonals. A square being a
perfect shape, is reserved for prasadas. For houses I
N
rectangles were generally adopted.
,_ b)DVISAIA
This chapter starts with the method of selecting the
•
•
a)EKASAIA
dimensions (width and length) of the house with rectangular
plan shape. Three procedures are generally followed for NKANA
•
,-

fixing the length and width of the houses. viz. i?(adirghavidhi,

guoamSavidhi or guoavistaravidhi and padavistaravidhi.
These will be discussed in detail later.
•

In all these procedures, the first step is to select a suitable 1-

- c) TRISAIA
and required length for the house _(i§[adirgha) and fix the
dimensions of the courtyard. l~tadirgha means the length
desired by the owner. It is generally taken as the length of the
courtyard or front yard. Some texts refer to i~{adfrgha as the
•

•
length of the ridge of the house and this may indicate an early
association with the length_of the S81a itself. In any case, the • •

design starts from the i?(adirghawhich for all practical purposes

is the approximate length of the house.

""Che perimeter of the house is computed based on

i$_tadirgha in such a way that the 'yonl and the astrological
factors are auspicious. After finally fixing the perimeter, the
•
actual length and width are determined by any of the three •

methods mentioned above. While doing this, it should be 2. COMBINED

assured that the corridors (antarala) connecting the main I 1. SEPARATE
houses ( diksalas) to the corner houses (vidikla!as) should be d) cA ruSSxu·
of optimum width.
I
Aft filas B~ - {ti B
I

As mentioned earlier, the main houses are oriented in th e FIG.04.01

cardinal directions facing the Brahmanabhitaken as the fo cus. ON NUMBER OF SALAS ·
• I 135
134 •
 • Manu ~Y lilay ac andrikab hasy atn
Man u:f>tyalayac andrikab lla~y am •

third part. By the reverse process, its length will be

The front yard is on that side of the house where the obtained. Everywhere in residential houses, the desired
Brahman?lbh~ is located. If there is only one house (Sata}, it is length is subtracted from the semi-perimeter, here the
called ~kaSata; if there are 2, 3 and 4 houses, they are
balance is the width.
respecttvely called dviSala, trisala and catussala (fig.4.1) • ;.::1•

Stanza- 2 Commentary (Stanzas 2,3 and 4)

~teiG<flEiict ={icltll'·li ~............,. Out of the three procedures for computing the elements
' ' of the plan composition mentioned earlier in stanza 1, it is
f4ttii~S~IIIG ~........... : qiG'fl~'i I -
' ' the istadirghavidhithat is generally adopted in Kerala. From
d'!:'ll"llifi~ ~ a=c.t)qa: ~ ta the iStadTrgha, the other horizontal and vertical elements
' • •
are computed by proportionate method as shown below:

Stanza- 3 Desired Length of house ( 1$tadTrgha)

(Rf4~~~rc;r;r"Clcl\mf~~ : I .....
Perimeter (naha)
\3 \l~l~ ~;:i ct tlrg~,II~I~CI Cb~d II •
\
1
Width ( vistara)
For all houses, the perimeter is derived from the desired •

· length (of anka~Ja). From this (viz. the perimeter) the width Height up to wall plate (p8dam8na)
from the width the height of the building (up to the wali 1
plate), from this the height of the basement from what is Basement (masura)
~
. from the width of the respective wall plates, the width of • Height of wall/ pillar (stambha)
rafter, eave reaper etc. and from that (width) the thickness -1
of the wall plates etc. are computed. Width of wall plate (.uttaravistrtJ:
Stanza- 4
Width of rafter, eave-reaper (lup8n1vr8divist[fl)
tf ~~{til~ ~ Ji tec:fhhfFNi ~·{.ell I iis te Pf &j i !:'CI ~ tf - ~'
•

Thickness of wall plate (uttaraghanam

' ' '
cJtfllttt~llllt 1"14G~ ~ aiftt)ts~ s+..."w-1o
1$Jadirgha thus forms the basis fo~ the com~utation
of
cftt)t~ q ~~l&tdS?J fc)aR): ttcf?l 'it=ttlcllt II the vertical and horizontal elements. It IS the des1red length
of the house depending on the width of the plot and
requirements of the owner. But at time~. length _of the yard
Multiplying one's desired length, starting from 6
( ankaf)adirgha) is also taken as i$!adirgha. Vastulak~ara
hasta, by eight and adding the yoni of the orientation
the perimeter of that house is here obtained by its one~
•
137
136
 J

Manu~ya.layacandrikabhasyam
Man u~yalayac andrikab nasyam
takes the length of the ridge ( vamsamana) as the i$.tadTrgha
of the sa/a is 1 :3. If 2 cells are taken as the width, the width to
(Ref.04.01 ). In gabled houses, this, of course, is the same
length ratio is 2:3. The design hence starts from the former
as the length of the house.
•
ratio of 1 :3 and, keeping the length constant, the width is
adjusted such that the yoni and other criteria are satisfied.
•

·'
For a rectangle of width 1 unit and length 3 units, the
•
perimeters is 8 units. This means that if 1 pada is the width,
3 pada which is equal to 1 hasta is the length and the
I•
•
N perimeter is 8 pada_ which is equal to 1 vy8ma. Hence if
I'
x hasta is the i$!adirgha, x vyama is the perimeter of the
.J ..NKJL ~ .. primary plan of the house. When this is multiplied by 8, we
•
get the perimeter expressed in pada units. This perimeter
• is normalised by adding the yoni number 1, 3, 5 or 7 to suit
w E the orientation of the sa/a on theE, S, WorN of the an kana • .
The normalised perimeter is in pada units. It is divided by 3
only to bring the perimeter into hasta units (1 hasta = 3
-
I
• pada).
s ~

.. ~
~
~
Norn1alised Perimeter
~ P=8x/ 3 hasta = 8x pada P = 8x pada + yoni number
•
II -
=x vyarna to suit the orientation
£i
'0
• .-4
House facing
I'
~ Desired Length = 3 x pada
-
B - BRAHMANABHI W N E S
I I
Width 2 Cells Normalised Perimeter in Pada 8x + 1 8x +3 8x +5 8x + 7
-
FIG.04.03 PERIMETER FROM /STADIRGHA
' ..
The whole pr_pcess depends on arriving at the perimeter
fr9m the l$!ad1rgha. As described in chapter 2 a The normalised perimeter of the house i.e. the
vastumaf}(iala divided into 8x8, 9x9 or 1Ox1 o grid is fhe perimeter adjusted to obtain the yoni number corresponding
adopted for house design. Out of these, 9x9 grid most is to its orientation, is halved and from this semi-perimeter the
c~mmon. For sue~ a ma'}cjala, the courtyard is 3 cell wide original i?.fadTrgha is deducted to g~t the width. It is clear
that the length of the house or i$tadirgha or the width of the
s~mpl~st house rs a sa/a coming on one of the cardinal an kana is not changed, but the width is now increased. The
drrect1ons facing this yard:-The length of the sala is the width width to length ratio now is not 1:3 but it increases. If the
of the ankara or the J?tadirgha. The width is 2 cells wide If istadirgha is 6 hasta, one cell width is 2H. If the house is
one cell width is taken for the house, the width to length ratio f8.'cing west, the perimeter before normalisation is 6x8=48
138 139

Manu ~ya.layac andrikah ha~y am
pada. After normalisation to its location to the east of ankana
it is ~9 p~da or 16H 8A. Semiperimeter is 8H 4A. Deducti'nQ
the 1$.fadJrgha of 6H, the width is 2H 4A. If the house is on
the northern side of ankaf}a, the normalised perimeter is
48+7=55 pada or 18H 8A. Semiperimeter is 9H 4H and
keeping the same i~.tad7rgha, the width is 3H 4A. The width
of the house, ie. 3H4A is still within the buildable area.
Hence this procedure of starting with the width as one-third
of the length is a practical one to keep the width always
less than 2 cell width.
If ~ 0 is the desired length U$.tadTrgha) in hasta units
and Y ts .the yoni number of the house, the perimeter of
house P tn hasta units is given by
p = ( 8 LD+ y)I 3 ................................... 0 4. 0 1
The width W is computed by the formula
w = pI 2 - LD.......................................... 04. 0 2
. or by the gu(l8.msa rule which is explained subsequently
(tn stanza 6 of this chapter.
. l.n most of the houses in Kerala, the width to length
rat1o 1s 1 :2 to 1:3. Taking the ratio as 1 :3 , the perimeter p of
a house is given by
P = 2 (L0 + L0 I 3) = 8 L0 I 3 ........................ 04. 0 3
. . !his is the basis for multiplying i?fadirgha by 8 and then
dtvtdtng the product by 3.
. It .is of interest to note that if x hasta is the length, the
~tdth ts x/3 ~asta or ~ pada (when width to length ratio is
1.3) and penmeter P 1s given by
P = 2(x + xI 3) = 8x I 3 hasta
= 8X p 8 d a = X vyam a .............. .......... 0 4. 0 4
i.e., for x hasta length, the perimeter is x vyama (fig.04.03) .
14()
Man Ufya.layac andrikab hasy am
The yoni number is added before the division by 3 to
ensure the correctness of the yoni for the perimeter.
I -
In proportio~ing houses, i${adirgha above 6 hasta is to be
adopted. If i~tadirgha is 6 hasta and if the house is facing west
(eastern house with ekayom) , the perimeter is (8x6+ 1)/3 H
=16H 8A. For a northern house (facing south) of 20 H length ,
the perimeter is. P = (8x20+7)/3 H =55H 16A.
This computation can be easily made if the pada units
-
are considered. It was shown that for a house of istadirgha
• •
x hasta, the perimeter is 8x pada or x vy8ma (with width:
length ratio as 1:3). Thus for a northern house of 20H length,
the perimeter is 20 vyama = 8x20 pada = 160 pada. Adding
the yoni number 7, the adoptable perimeter of 167 pada is
obtained. Converting into hasta and angula, the adoptable
perimeter is 55H 16A.
Stanza- 5
~'4'lte<ftd~·H1 aa81
'
1
~<llil~fl---te·....,..~~~~r:rrn-=t ~ ~ ~ ~i ¥114 fd I I
Also multiplying i§.tadirgha in hasta by 2, adding one-
third of it and then adding one-third of the desired yoni
number the perimeter is obtained.
Commentary
This is not an alternate method, but the same as the
previously indicated one . According to thi s stanza the
perimeter P is given by
p = (2LD+ 2 LD/3) + y /3 ....................04.05
Simplifying , P = (8L + Y)/3 .................................... 04.06
0
same as the formula 4.01 given in the previous stanza .
•
14 1
 •

Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyam
Manu ~yaJayac andrikab ha~y am •

When the semi-perimeter is divided by the three

GUNAVISTARAVITHI (numbers) beginning with 12 or by the three (numbers)
•
Stanza- 6 beginning with 16 or by the three (numbers) beginning with
~~~~~·~llil~ {"4 0 ~~~ ........-.- -;:r.r;uct;:rrn...~ 20 or by the three (numbers) beginning with 24 or by 32,
' ' l'i
' with 4 parts the width and with the balance the length
(should be computed). Sages thus state the gu!Jamlaivstara
"t-r: ~tq 41Gt~cffis~i~Cf> $ qRou~ ~fi<11J~b (proportionate width) as 8,9,10 etc. except the fourth ratio
• after samatata. .
In a square house, the length and also the width will be Commentary (Stanzas 6,7 and 8)
0?~-fourth of the perimeter. When the semi-perimeter is These three stanzas give the procedure for proportioning
space according to gu{l8mSa rule.
For houses, generally rectangular plans are adopted. The
10, ~ysix parts length and by 4 parts width (will be square, being a perfect shape, is reserved for temples, though
ob.tamed); this is ardhtidhika. These three proportions are it has been stated that the square plan can be used for houses,
suitable for temples. if essential. The elongation (8y8ma or dirghatva) is given with
several proportions of length and width. When the length is
Stanza- 7
an integer multiple of width, the ratio is called samatata. When
41GI a- • the length to width ratio is an integer plus 1/4 (eg. 1 1/4, 2 1/4,
. ' 3 1/4 ......... ) it is called p8d8dhika. When the ratio is an integer
?IICI~ll4> '<iJ:fddlli~Cf).)Sftr tf~~d I plus 1/2, it is called ardh8dhika and when the ratio is an integer
'
3tti~~Cf>lS?J -::r
~ .....-~ ~~ : '<i"f~~' -
plus 3/4, it is called p8dona. The length to width ratios for these
four proportions from 1.25 to 7 are given in table 04.01 .
41<it~dl~ Cf>~dlfti<1'11~t;ft~ II •

TABLE 04.01. CLASSIFICATION OF RECTANGLES

In the house ofhumans,piidiidhika is adopted. Here, if ACCORDING TO LENGTH TO WIDTH RATIOS. •

necessary,
_ . . the samatata is also adopted by some.· H ere Ardhadhika Padona Samatata
Pacladhika
3 4
1 2
all pado1za ratios are harmful for all. 1.75to<2 2to<2.25
1.25 to< 1.5 1.5to<1 .75
Stanza- 8
•
l 2.75 to< 3 \ 3 to< 3.25
2.25 to< 2 .5 '2.5 to< 2.75
'
3.25 to< 3 .5 1 '3.5 to< 3.75 I
'3.75to<4 4 to< 4.25

4 .75to<5
'
5 to< 5 .25
4 .25 to< 4.5 I 4 .5 to< 4.75 ' '
I 5 .75to<6 I 6 to< 6.25
f4a~~~c:ul~ta: .... 1ittl~ - 5 .25 to< 5 .5 I 5 .5 to< 5.75
' 1 6 .5 to < 6 .75 I 6 .75 to< 7 '
7to<7.25
Cl~'tC64~d~llt~flf-<~ ~r«=rr~~~: II 6.25 to< 6 .5
I I 7

143
142
•
 Manu:~yalayacand~ikabna.syam Man u.syalayac andrikab ha~y am

The ratios falling in between samatata and p8diidhika are Generally, lengths more than 6 times the width are not
considered as samatata, the ratios between p8d8dhika and adopted. The reason for not considering ratios beyond. 6 is
ardh8dhikaare p8d8dhika, the ratios between ardhfldhikaand that the space enclosure efficiency of the rectangle, (def1ned
p8dona are considered as ardh8dhika and the ratios between as the ratio of the area of the rectangle to the area o! a
pcidona and samatata are reckoned as p8dona ratios. Thus square of equal perimeter) goes bel.o~ 1/2 for ~uch rat1os
all the rectangles can be grouped into these 4 categories (Table 04.02) and fig.04.04. Also, 1t 1s stated 1n the next
described above (Table 04.01).
W:L DIVISOR
Gw;amSa literally means fraction of a multiple. The
RATI 0 LENGTH
guf}amSavista.ra of a building is obtained by dividing its semi- ........
8
perimeter by the integers from 8 to 32 and taking 4 parts of the
1:1 _..... -- 12
1:2 - 16
division as width and the balance as length. While doing this,
divisions by 11, 15,19,23,27 and 31 are avoided as they will
1:3 ........ -- 20
1:4 •

........ 24
give p8dona ratios of length to width (ratios of 1.75. 2. 75, 3. 75,
4.75, 5.75 and 6.75). Thus, there will be 18 acceptable width 1:7 - 28
32
to length ratios viz. 4:5, 4:6, 4:8, 4:9,4:10, 4:12, 4:13, 4:14, 1:6
4:16,4:17,4:18,4:20,4:21,4:22,4:24,4:25,4:26,4:28, leaving 1:5
the p8dona ratios of 4:7,4:11,4:15,4:19,4:23 and 4:27. The
acceptable ratios are shown in columns 1,2 and 4 and the •

inauspicious ones in column 3 of table 04.01. EFFIOENCY OF RECTANGLES DECREASES WITH INCREASE IN L:W
RATIO
It has been specifically stated in stanza 7 that all p8.dona
ratios will cause harm. It is also stated in stanza 7, that the 1.0
ratio of 4:6 is not desirable. The word 'atra' (here) in 1.0
'ardhadhikotra na hito' refers to the ratio referred to in the 89
previous stanza, viz. the ratio of. 4:6. The other adhadhika ratios >
u 0.8
.75
described in stanza 8 (4:1 0,4:14,4:18 etc.) will not be covered z
~ ~~4
by the word 'atra' of stanza 7. They are acceptable to~ ~ouse~, ) c 0.6
•
u ~ J.56
only 4:6 (1 :1.5) is unacceptable. The reason for a~o1dmg th1s I C
~
..... •.49
~ JO.44
can be the objection to the use of perfect shapes like square. ~ 0.4
Length to width ratio of 1.5 will give a rectangle made up of
one square and a half square. It also represents the limiting 0.2 6 7
ratio of 2:3 discussed under stanzas 2,3,4. 1 2 3 4 5
LENGTH : WIDTH RATIO
For temples, the auspicious ratios of length to width for
the garbhagrha are 1 , 11 /4 and 1112. The ardh8dhika ratio of
11 12 which is unacceptable for houses is auspicious for temples
because perfect shapes can be adopted for temples.
145
144 •
 Manu~ytllayacandrikabna~yam
Manu ~yalayac andrikab lta~y am
stanza that width more than half the length is not accepted
Stanza- 9
by sages like Daksa and Garga. Thus the acceptable length
• I
to width ratios for houses are 1 to 6, avoiding, of course,
...l-Ao. ~~~~ii ~~ct~\)> f4arara~~tefll~~ CIT I
the padona ratios. c!lt::~ttttC:~Cbd~ Cltl~i 4=caf.ft &11€11 : I I
TABLE 04.02. SPACE EFFICIENCY OF RECTANGLE When the semi-perjmeter is divided by 11, by 3 parts
Width:length the width and by 8 parts the length (can be taken). The
Space efficiency
ratio of rectangle width more than half the length is not accepted by Garga,
Daksa
•
etc .
4:4 1 :0
Commentary
4:8 0.89
4:12 0.75 Though the proportioning of width and length is
•

4:16 0.64 prescribed by the ratios of guf)avistaravidhi, there is a

practice according to which the width to length ratio is taken
4:20 0.56 as 3:8. Sages like Garga and Dak~a prefer to restrict the
4:24 0.49 width to less than half the length. 1t can be seen that for
4:28 0.44 i$(adfrgha of 6H, the proportion of the purvavastu (width
2H-4A :length 6H-OA) vide commentary on stanzas 2,3,4 of
While making the divisions by integers from 8 to 32, this chapter is very near to 3:8 mentioned here. The
the remainder, if any, is added to the length. For example, proportion of uttaravastu (3H-4A:6H-OA) has width more than
take a perimeter of 16H 8A. Let the width:length ratio be
half the length, not recommended by Dak~a and Garga. This
4:9 (padadhika).
means that minimum length of i$fadTrgha is to be more than
Semi-perimeter = 8H 4A = 196A 6H for houses. If this is, say, 8H-OA the perimeter will be 8
vyama=64pada. Normalised value for simhayonivastu will
Division by 4+9 =13 will give 15A as quotient and be 67 pada or 22H-8A. This is the perimeter of the minimal
1A as remainder.
house as per Vastuvidya as expalined below:
Hence, width = 4x15A •
A minimum house is to have a living room (vasa) and a
= 60A = 2H 12A
deity room (ranga). For free movements of human beings,
Length = 9x15A + remainder 1A = 136A (dynamic space), the minimum width of a habitable room is a
= SH 16A. puru~anjali(3H8A). It may be noted that this is equal to 240cm,
I

recommended as minimum width of habitable rooms in National

The ratio of length to width is now (5H 16A):(2H 12A),
i.e. 2.266. But because all ratios between f)adadhika (2.25)
and ardhadhika (2.5) are considered as p8cladhika, this is
acceptable as padadhika ratio.
Building Code of India. The minimum width of passive space
is one vyama equal to 2H 16A. The minimal house is shown in
•
figure 04.05. The perimeter is 22H. When this is normalised,

146 147
 •

Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am

Manu~yaJayacandrikabha~yam

7HOA •
•
~2,.
4H-10A
I 5 H-16A 12A
~ f I
•
" <
QO

SA,'-~ 3H8A 8!J: 2H 16A ,L..

/SA
~
•

RANGAM
-
VA SAM
71 ' ~ r

P:16-08 (D) 'P=16-08 (D)

/
I•
' ~ / ~
I• '
/ ....
'
<(
/
<
0 ' <
QO ~
N

~
=
~
/ = - ~ RANGAM
(£0
-
X
I

:r•
~ ~
VASAM P=13-16
/ ' ~ -
0
N

y ' P=23-00 (V.)

It)

/ ' •
•

/ ' - ~

/ ' VA SAM
-:r
cO

<
QO
'
•
M
f

•
• • 0 •
OUTSIDE PIN DHVAJ~
2 ROOMS
FIG.04.05 MINIMAL SIZE OF A RESIDENCE "OUTSIDE, P =32-08 3 ROOMS
• •
•

OUTSIDE, P = 32-08
the perimeter for simhayoni house is observed as 67 pada as
given in the previous paragraph.
•

The acceptable ratios of length to width are between 2 RA.MGAM

• P=16-08 (a, •
and 6 excepting padona ratios, as already stated. However,
the practice generally followed is to make the upper limit 3 •

and divide the length into convenient rooms. (fig.04.06). ALI NO AM

CLASSIFICATION OF CATU5SALAS •
-
VA SAM
Stanza -10
•

-'
X P:23-00 ( C1) CORE P=32-08 (D)
(;')
OUTSIDE P=37-16 (D)
ihCJif1S?f g : cffioJI<1lfi.R..~CJ~ - •

: ~i~~l'"i~$ll~fld: I
•

(lltet44 . ·2 ROOMS
ALINDAM
~Q·d ;:rcrtittl\!~=lt :rtfd~~=~i~~ ~1¥=11~~­
jl~a~i ~acll~ cl&totf4tfi ¥011~ I~ at• llC1 ~ II •
9H-8A •

• I_
Here the sages have mentioned 8 separate houses for FIG.04.06 DIVIDING SALA INTO CONVENIENT ROOMS

humans - four diggrhas (houses facing the cardinal

148 149
•
• •
 ' •
Man u~ya.layac andrikab na~yam
directions) and then four ko1zalayas (corner houses).
Differently located, they are classified into 9 types based on
the differences in the configuration of wall plates,
dimensions and names etc. The rules for characteristics of
the second and further storeys also will be the same
dimensions.
Commentary
Mun?yalayacandrika gives more importance to
catussalas than to eka-dwi-trisalas.
In the classical courtyard house of catussala, there are
4 main sa/as (called diksalas or diggrhas) facing the 4
directions and 4 corner sa/as ( vidiksalas or koralayas)
(fig.4.1 e). They are separated by antarala (corridors) as
indicated by the word 'prthal<.
•
By differences in location of
sa/as and by the different methods of joining of wall-plates,
the catussalas can be grouped into 9 types as given below:
1. Visuddhabhinnasala, with 4 diksalas and no corner
houses.
2. Sustabhinnafala; in which one or 2 corner houses are
• •
absent.
•
3. SamSfi$!abhinnaS81a also called nandy8vartasala .
4. Visistabhinnasala also called slistabhJnna?ta sa/a.
• • •
s. Misrabhinnasala
6. Sammis'rabhinnasala
7. Misracatussala
a. catussala
9. Madhyaprarudhasala
Vastumana also mentions 9 types of catussalas on the
basis of difference in the location of the sa/as (Ref .04.02).
These will be explained in · detail in subsequent stanzas.
15()
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam
~~r the upper floors, the location of sal as, the position
and JOints of the uttaras, perimeter, nomenclature etc. will
be as they are for the ground floor.
Brh_atsamhita gives a different classification based on
the lo~ation of the corridors. This is shown in figure 04.07.
The different catussalas are Sarvatobhadra, nandyavarta,
vardh~mana, swastika and rucaka (Ref.04.03). Mayamata
also g1ves the same classification (Ref.04.04). This text
further divides sarvatobhadra into 5, vardhamana into 7 and
nandyavarta into 5 sub-divisions.
I -
VARIATIONS OF CATUS ALA
Stanza- 11
' '
~CR~ ~....,.......~ CblOIJcllll~ii11CIId I
'
3t. <l~it{f~cit \l~t~fll<-t '=tt~Cb'l+t4d C6l01 it-
'
~Jqtt•<lcl=<i<:;~ct\111 +14~ li?II~~~II~CI m II
/ '
Salas are known in two ways, bhinna (separate) and
abhinna (not separate i.e. united). Here the bhinna (sala) is
located separately in the cardinal directions, each with its
own full characteristic complements and without its corner
houses. Where the corner houses, united through the joining
of the outer and inner wall plates, is of ketuyoni perimeter,
that is, of course, abhinnafala.
Commentary
The nine types of catussalas are broadly grouped into 2
categories, the separate (bhinna) and not separate (abhinna
i.e., integrated) sa/as. A pure bhinnasala will have 4 main
houses (dikSalas) oriented in the 4 cardinal directions but no
corner houses (fig.04.01 d1 ). For each one of the main sa/as,
the yoni, gamana (shift from the centre-line of the ankara)
15 1
 Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
Manu~yalayacandrikablla~yam

etc. will be that prescribed for the particular orientation. Each

sa/a will be complete with its own separate adhisthana and
•
each will be treated as a separate house. When the main
and corner houses are united and built as a single unit, there
E will be an outer wall plate (varottara) going round the 8
houses and an inner wall plate (ankanottara) going round
the central courtyard. When these are connected by
SARVATOBHADRA
extending the inner wall-plates up to the outer ones, the
abhinnasala (united house) is formed. For such catussala,
the yon is of the perimeters measured outside the outer wall
plate and the inner wall plate should be of dhvaja category.
Out of the nine types of catussalas described only one, viz.
5 ... the visuddhabhinnasala belongs to the bhinnasala category.
NANDYAVARTA I / ..,

•
WSUDDHABHINNASALA
•
Stanza- 12
~ 11 cll f':cr 4ilrtt fJI ~ r . . . ~~-B-:::rnf~Tr:JJm:nn~";h'T:
s - ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~n·
• VARDHAMANA •

xi CJ l if I ~'II ~ ~~r-rt-'i~'"'l""r: q;) o14 ~'"I Sf t!) o11-

«t~lfil Sfl@foi fclRdl 11)~~11('111 : II
'
(Four) salas separate from each other, each with
s •
gamana, width, yoni etc. as prescribed for itself, with
•
SWASTIKA
appropriate padukas (bottom course of basement) up to
patranza1za (offset from wall plate) and without corner house,
viz. the bhinnasalas, are suitable for all, especially for
E
brahnzi1zs. There also the perimeter of the courtyard should
'
•
be of dhvaja (yoni). The visuddhabhinnasalas are known
RUCAKA thus.

-
,,
j
Commentary
FIG.04.07 CLASSIFICATION OF CATUSSALAS BASED ON
BRHATSAMHITA
• In visuddhabhinnasala, there are 4 houses oriented in
the 4 cardinal directions and there are no corner house .
• Each one of the four houses should have yon1, gamana etc .

152 153
 •
•

ha~y am
•
Man usyalayac
•
andrikab
as prescribed for that particular house according to its
•
orientation. For example, dhvajayoni tor eastern house, •

simhayoni for southern house, vr~abhayoni for western •

•

house and gajayonifor northern house. If the western house Y/ESIEBN - NORTHERN

is considered as the important one, it will have the largest - 8 - 10 x 5 - 18

-ARUQQHA
13 • .02 X 1 0 ·1 0 P = 47 • 0
'I
I
11· 6 X 9- 22 P::42 • 8

width, the southern, the northern and the eastern houses •

ARUDDHA
• •
6-14X5-06
p = 28.08 I n p = 23-16
having their widths progressively reduced in that order. If ORTHE
,. 1 tt
EAVE 15 • 02 x 12 - 10 ,EAVE 13-06 X 11-22 p =50. 08
SALJ4 . ~
the southern house is to be the important one, it will have p =55- 0
I I" ALL IN GAJAYONI
. I •
the largest width, the width of the western, the northern and ALL. IN VRSABHAYONI
. 4
the eastern sa/as being reduced in that order. The important
house is called sthayi and the others asthayi. •

I
I 1)
Also, the shift (gamana) of the centre line of the house I /

from that of the an kana will be 3 units for the eastern house, '
t
I '
'a: 'v / /
I z
1units for southern house, 7 units for the western house I

and 5 units for the northern house. It is likely that the unit of
I
I
~:SI
~'It~
gamana is parva as the operation of determining the yoni of
I
I
- ~~ ' ~
•
Cl)
I
I
I /
/ '\
' /
'
DEPRESSED YARD
the gamana is to multiply the gamana by 3 (to convert it into I
,

angula) and then to divide it by 8 (corresponding to the 8

•
i
I
I / .. ~-4~
+ ' /
/ '' '
I
I / / ' I
[i ____ I / ', I / + ,4--11" •
directions) and then getting the remainder as 1,3,5 and 7 ---..---~--
~
/
/ '
'
I
I
I
I
~--------~
("')
/ ' k
respectively. This will be true only if the gam an as are 3,1, 7 0
~
• .F...J•
___ . :. ., ____ ----~----~ ,...... 1

and 5 parva respectively. The gamana can be increased by

SOUTHERN
integer multiples of 8 units. Even the lowest footings of the 12-22 X 10-06 P: 46-08
EASTERN
basements of the house (viz. paduka) will not touch each 14- 18 X 9 - 10 P= 48 - 08
other. (fig.04.08). Each house will keep its special features
ARUDQHA 10-02 X 4 - 18
and will be independent of each other. . The adhisthana will
.. -
•

p = 29-16
ALL IN SIMHAYONI
be simple ones with the paduka extended to patram.ana. •
EAVE 16- 08 x 11 -10
p =56. 08
I 1- •
ALL IN DHVAJAYONI
SL/STABH/NNASALA
• •
GARTANKANA •
ANKANOTTARA
•
-
·B - BRAHMANABHI P - PERIMETER
Stanza- 13 20 - 18 X 19 - 10 25 - 10 X 24 - 02
p = 80-08 p 99-0 = (All dimensions in hasta - angul~
a a

~~101qf~'"' ~~~~
•
IDHVAJAYONI)
(PLAN SHOWS UITARA ONL~

•
' • , ~ .~

. \=t~Cb'I~CII ";J ~~tt~d ........ ~ - FIG.04.08 DESIGN OF A SUDDHABHINNASALA

' •

Slt~CII?I (] I I

154 155
 •

Man Ufyalayac andrikab liiz~y am

Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
The southern and western are mutually friendly; then
•

the northern and the eastern are mutually friendly. • •

Therefore, the combination of the corner house between N

them (with the friendly main house) is permitted. Both the
other corner houses, or (at least) one should not be joined •
•
N & E are friendl y
• • •

S & Ware friendly

•

(with the main houses). This gap is for the entry and exit of B
post-partum ladies, the working class etc. •
•

Stanza -14 • •
••
FIG.04.09
:;:rr.)~:rrr;:::rr =<=lll d I FRIENDSHIP BETWEEN
' SALAS
~~uft~CI~dl =<iiQlftlt'it~i ~$1~~1'1414~ II
By joining one, two or three corner house, lli~ta
bhinnasala is obtained. Though suitable for brahmins, it is
propitious for all, because of the characteristics of the
separate and combined (salas ).
Commentary (Stanza 13 and 14) B B
• • •
When the main houses are joined together through the
corner house between them, S!i${abhinna~8Ja (combined-
separate, house) results. But such joining should be done
between the friendly houses. The houses on the north and
east (of ankaf)a) are considered to be friendly and those on
the west and ~outh are also friendly to each other (fig.04.09). One Corner Houses Two Corner Houses
':- Sli~tabhinnaSaJa is obtained by joining the main houses by
one, two or three corner houses (fig.04.1 0). At least one· comer
should be left free. This is for free access to workers and
menials and also to those who are considered to be not clean.
Because
I I-
some of the main houses are inter-connected, it is a Three Corner Houses
..
SfiSf8S8/85 and because at least one corner is unconnected
~
B
and free, it is bhinnasala.
/
Hence it is slistabhinnasala.
. The •
design for such a sa/a is given in figure 04.11. This is
considered to be suitable for brahmins, because unclean
t FIG.04.1 0
persons can enter the central courtyard with out entering and 5LISTABHINNA5J.LA
-.
passing through the Sa/a so that such unclean persons will not TYPES
pollute the main building.

156 157
 Manu~ylllayacandrikabha~yam
Man u~ya.layac andrikab ha~yam
SAMSLJSTABHINNASALA
• •

NORTHERN & EASTERN TOGETHER

-
SALAS
•
Stanza -15
P= (25.:01+28-11)2 = 107H (Dhvaja)
Sb'il-
WESTERN & SOUTHER TOGETHER
P= (27-07 +26-13)2 = 107-16 ( Simhs) ~· ~ICJJqc:stc:~ot~tdl•ttld(ll titfl\if~d I
:- --------------- -i---------- --------1~~~
'
; " '·•_ 7. 14 A t ·"': : 3Rt":~~ \t~lll~r~r~~~ ~=t4?11~ 1{Cf
...
I
I ... ,..
II
------------------N .. / ••
I

. ~if~te~~l f~ll'i II
•
0 ' --·-------------~ fe I
:X: I
I
r¥f ',12H
'-
6·A
•• -.. ~
, 11
I
., •
I
; : ~ ~r---·---- ~-- ~~5-~-~IA-----~ :, !! ; '
I ~ /, / I ., r1
The ends of the wall plates of the corner houses which
•

~:::::;==::::tt=:U-- ---~
11
I
~ .- - ---- -
----·- - tI '• 1
•I I are equal in measures of the ends of the wall plates of the
: // • / I I, ., I
I
·~I
I /
jo.----
[.1/ II
II
I •,
'•
'I
•1 main houses should be joined in the anticlockwise direction,
10 H 18A _~ t1 ' " • I ....
I t 1L--~---- ------------( I
"1~ --------------,.-~
.. N I
II
1
I
I ..
el I•
11 like the petals of nandyavarta flower. Here in all cases, the
.. .' I
1
11 -.. ! 11 L :::

I
I '
r JtP J
~.. I • i I I I
perimeter of the ankal}ll should be in dhvajayoni. If the
_/ I 1 : 11 t I
! ~ tV I ~ "' I •~ outside perimeter is also indhvajayoni, it is most auspicious.
! " . 6H ~~ .~ 1 1

This is sam~listabhinna~ala.
I •·... I :
I ' ' //' . I N lUi I ' : I
I
:
lc»
·:
'.''
I
I
I
l~
I• !1"-
_,.
I ~~!., 2A
I
I ~;
10 I
I
• •

: ;; : '; ! f I~ .- l · ~ : Commentary
I
I
~ • tQio lA /~ I
For samslistabhinnasala,
••
there are 4 main houses and
I t' I le ' I
=f: ;: '; I GARTANKA!jA P:80-08 (Dhvsjs) ~ ~~H1~-~ : 4 corner houses. The inner wall plates (ankaoothara) of the
~ ' ., I I / '
l>i ' I
I /
I
main houses should be extended towards the outer wall
!: :
I ,, '• I 0 ' I

I :: :: : :: I cf · :
~ :_- - .....: - -- - -- ___ --~ plates of the corner houses towards left (while looking from
I
I
I
11
1'
t' :1
'
: •
I 1
I
I
I
I:
I
tl
I 11
f
cil~=~~
/
L-- --_ r- _ _ _
.
_
------.-/1 -" I 9H 10A I the ankaoa) like the arrangement of the petals of a
I l ., I
Il 11 I tl ' /
I II •I I ·· ·' • .
nandyavarta flower. (fig.04.12).
I
I
11
:1
II
It
I
I/
,.ctf-:r--=-=--::
.too
'"-== ~,_,,.'
'1 ~ ·
•

: · 11 :I rL ~ ""'., : -:- N The western wall plate (viz.

1 - ::-- - - - I ~
I
t' d..l-------------
I c the inner wall plate) of the eastern
II ~·--
: -----1----- _-;. -. ;__; ._r-:-=
---
.. ... It •

house (AB in figure) is to be

I I : // • &H ,6A ~' ; • E D
~ ,-4).:-----------
;-o-------- ...... ___-· ----- -·_• qf======::::::t ~----- I
F B extended to the outer wall plate
J
1 ,

-~6H-~~~--
' 1
•1-
G
k:, _t _ - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------:1
£ ·~~~'
N (i.e., up to C) of the north-east
13 H 15A ' · 12 H 2 2A ~
Overall P= (39-14+41-06)2 = 161-16 (Vrsabha) corner house. Similarly, the
southern wall plate DE of the
IDimensions in hasta-.anguJaf H J A
•
PLAN SHOWS UTTARA ONLY
northern house to F and so on.
• K L
Technically this extension of the
FIG. 04~11 DESIGN OF A SLI$TABHINNASALA I
• inner wall plate and its joining with
_, FIG.04.12 1 _ the outer wall plate is to tie the two
0

SAMSLI$.TABHINNASALA together as a stable frame.

158 159
•
 Manufyalayacandrikahha~yam
Manu~ylilayacandrikahha~yam
The perimeter of ankara is to be in dhvajayoni. The
outside perimeter also should preferably be in the same yoni.
But the diksalas can have their own yoni. This is also called
nandyavartasala. Here the main sa/as with their corner sa/as •

are separated from each other by corridors. A typical design

is given in figure 04.13. OVERALL P= (23-10+22-02)2 = 91-00 (Dhvaja)
ARUDDHA P= (20-02+18-18)2 = n-16 (Dhvaja)
•
YON/S FOR CORNER HOUSES ANKANA P= (11-22+10-22)2 45-16 (Dhvaja) =
GARTANKANA P= (7-22+6-22)2 = 29-16 (Dhvaja)
Stanza- 16 ~---------------------------- -- - -- ..... - ----- - - - .... ~ / '

t{icf?llfq -:q Cf>lDifJ~q~UII~Iq~ t{:q~tm~~- -+- r i=================:;ff :

I ''
-~;a
~/ I
"'
~
I

cil <1>~'1?1 t{i Cb <"'I \il•lll 101 Cl· '~ Cl ~ I 'I '\. 1"- i! /
~ I
I
I
----· ~- -~~---------- - - /

I ''" '~ ~11

I

~Cf~llcll \i1 ~ Cb I +t Cl f.{1 T.f mf: 'J{C} cfl- I .1 7 C"') 11

I
I j,j// '
I
I
.,
I r-. • .fit../ ~ "' I I

s ~~dl ~: Cb~q:{t . tlt'lt~ II

I
I , - t ~ I * I
I
I I I I
I
~I
I
I
...' P""-- -- - - ~ - - ·
J
_/
I
/

., 4
.~
• .. I
Everywhere (viz. for all /alas) for the perimeter of the I
I
I I
I
7 .,-22 NN
N~
I
I
'
~
I
I
I
I
I c--. I I • I
. corner house, theyoni of its main house is precribed. There •
I
I 3-~ lL
I
•
•
11-22 -
o\D I
I
•I ,... ,_ ""'
! I
I I
I
~b
I
all the corner houses become creations (janya) and the main I ~
I
l
I
I I I /~.~ - -- -- - - - -\ I

houses are creators (janaka). Therefore, in the houses of

•
I
I
.., '
\
l
I
I
'
I _]

I 'c--.
, I
I
I
1-. I
human beings, there should be dhvajayo1ti in north-east, I ""' /
/
1 '
""
I
I
I 1- '"t I
simhayoni in south-east, vr~abhayo1zi in south-west and I 1/ / en 9-18 11-9- , , :

gajayoni in north-west.
I
I t . IO--. ------ --- ------- ~ '
---\ I
I
~
/
I
, / I
l
I ,/
/
~
...
' ', IJ
Commentary
I r
.. ~

-, I
I
/"/1-l----~2;,y0=.J-2L----------11 ',,
~~~~====~~~=============== '-""~l
I

I /
•
The yoni prescribed for the corner house is the yoni of ~ ----------------- - --- ----------
- ----- -~-"'--

the main house which is friendly to it as shown in table04.03 IDimensions in hasta angulal
as even numbers for yoni are inauspicious. I PLAN AT UTI"ARA I
TABLE 04.03 YON/ OF CORNER HOUSES •

FIG. 04.13 DESIGN OF A SAMSLJSTABHINNASALA

CORNER HOUSE FRIENDLY HOUSE YON/
-/
North-east (/sa) East Ohvaja
South-east (Agn1) South Simha
South-west (Nir[tl) . West Vrsabha
••
North-west (Marut) North Gaja
•

I 6 () 161
 1anu. talayacandrikiibha~yam Manu~yalayaca!lilrikablza .'Jatn

In the nand 'a atra arrangement, the corner houses are

created (deri ed) from the main houses by the extension of
the V\rall plates of th e latter. Hence the corner houses are
call ed the creation s Uanya) of the friendly main houses,
wh ich are co ns idered to be creators (janaka).
/ 1-
1 - A 1H- 1A
SL/STABHINNASTASALA
• •

Stanza- 17
~ ~if~te~~lclllf4~CIG~Iq;~~1 ftCIJl\l'!ff{)f . .®
~<it(),~ tlit~F4 ~ Cf))Offc'tlll~l'i I ~
~
-
' -
~
I
:X:
~tl)i_;I•\IJ•\Ixl~ ~ 'i~IEil~'i'tJj f4'1t•li- I ALINDA 10 H-SA ....
-
:X:

?11Gt21fd CJ>)Otl)i) \I\!Jiq~fll~ fTCiite~~IEC~IIcll II -<t

U)
<t
....I
~

' •

Thus, after making all wall plates according to the

I
:X:
........ ® :c
en
prescriptions of samsli~!abhinnalaya and adopting ® -
perimeters of the corner houses with yonis prescribed for ~
YARD .,:.!
I
their (respective) main houses, the other wall plate of corner ,..,
~
N
:c
house should be joined (to the wall plates of the main house)
in the corridor at the end of the main house, at (a palace)
other then the centre of the door. This isslistabhinnasta/ala.
,, •

•
•
f t
Commentary •
1H-
17H-22A

,_ ,-
4 VIDIKSALAS, 8 ALINDAS
houses are joined as for samsli$.tabhinnasala (stanza 15, fig 4 DIKSALAS,

04.12). Then the perimeters of the corner houses are adjusted OUTSIDE P =(17-22+19--14) 2 =75-0 (DHVAJA)
YARD P = (11 -6+10-6) 2 = 43-0 (DHVAJA)
to yield yoni numbers of their respective main houses (refer
table. 04.03). The wall plates of the corner house in the right I - I-

hand side (while looking from the ankaf)a) are joined to the FIG. 04.14 SLI~TABHINNA~TASALA

main house on its left at the antarala in such a way that the
joint does not occur at the centre of the door opening. Here
eac~ diksala has corridors on both sides. Therefore, the 4
diks81a and 4 vidikS8!as remain separated by the corridors.
Hence this is called Slistabhinnastasala.
. ".
At the same tin1 e the
wall plates are interconnected (fig.04.14 ).
163
162
 Man u~yaJayac andrikab hasy atn Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y a1n
--------- the eastern and western as the support (adhara) and the
Stanza- 18
other two the supported (adheya).
~nn~-::;:::r;JmtTT · \T.It::t.nart ~f"TTrl~":TT":::t I
•

Commentary
II
I
When the scantlings for the walls plates are not sufficiently
Where the combining (yoga) of the wall plates of the long to be made in one piece when extended to the corner,
corner house happens at the end of the wall plate of main separate pieces should be joined together to make up the
house without joining separation of /alas occurs there. length. This should be done such that the joints do n~t occur
r
Those houses are thus of 4 types. at the centre lines of sa/as, at
the sensitive points (marmas),
Commentary over the opening for doors
and windows and in between
In slistabhinnastasala, the wall plates of main homes in
• • •
N
pillars.
the longitudinal directions should not be connected to the wall
plates of the corner houses by joints or by pegs, but should be This is indicated by the
placed butting each other. Because the wall plates are not statement "sandhikarmok-
connected, the bhinnatwa (separate existence) occurs. ta r it i a vi d h iva t" . W h i I e
Because they butt each other, they are joined. Thus sfi${8- making the joints at the four
bhinnatwa (separate and combined nature) occurs. This is, corner joints, the ends of the
therefore, sfi${abhinnastasala. Thus four types of bhinnasalas, east and west wall plates are
have been explained viz visuddhabhinnasala, slistabhinnasala,
• • FIG.04.15 to be kept below (adhara)
samslistabhinnasala and slistabhinnastasala. and the ends of the north and
• • •• JOINTS OF WALL PLATE
south waH plates should be
THE PROCEDURt: FOR JOINTING THE WALL at the top (8.dheya) (fig.04.15) with halved joints.
PLATES
J '-
Stanza- 19 MISRABHINNASALA
Stanza- 20
<fltl«U~ilti'~IJCl ~11~ fc)~4(J_ ttf·\1 Cb'iltb;ft,t(l
'(i•QiliiCf>lUitlt!ICifU ~'11'1 I
' rtrrr::::r1Prffi~r#ttR1rita. (q ·,I : ~~ Cfil u1 &:I fq I
~i · C: till IC: ~ ~~r:l=\clrtt 11-P. ~:£11 f.:q ~·~ ;;;i ':;:r.;;:t :-

'
When single pieces are not available for the wall ~llcl ~'5·Pt~lll: : 'H't'htl -~ II
plates along the length and width, the outer wall plates Here making the perimeters of outsid~ and yard in
should be joined separately according to the rules and
extended to the end of the of the corner house. The joints stated for the outer wall plate, without the mner wall
at the 4 corners should be made with the tail and head of
165
164
 Manu ~yalayac andrikah hafyam

plates of the corner houses. All thedik{alas are to be with ManufyoJayacandrikabha~yam

their ownyoni andgamana. This shall becatu{fiila called

nzifrabinna. 8H-14A
+
•

Commentary •

For the miSrabinnacatuS$8/a, the perimeters of the outer

and inner wall plates should be in ketuyoni (yoni number 1).
Both the wall plates should be joined at the corners. The ~
N
corner houses should not have the inner wall plates :r•
(fig.04.16), hence their yonis need not be adjusted. But the .. •

main houses should have the specific yoni and gamana

prescribed for each direction.
Stanza- 21
•

-
•
8H-22A
... 'JJICII'i I (All dimensions in .ha~ta-angull!J
-
' 17 H-10A
FlG.04 .16 '
MISRABHINNASALA I -

• •
-
X
N

Because the wall plates of all the houses are joined

at the corners, here combination (miSratwa) occurs. Here
separation (bhinnatwa) also occurs because the diksalas
are with their ownyoni andgamana and the corner houses ALINDA
are incomplete. •
.,
~
~
-
Commentary
~
I
•
:2:
-
0
~
a:
This stanza explains why the above building is called ~
(!)
%
<N
miSrabhinnacatuSSaJa. The four main sa/as are fully
integrated with each other through the inner and outer wall
plates joining at the corners. Hence it is a combined (miSta)
sa/a. But the yoni, gamana etc. for each of the 4 main sa/as :X:
N

are those specifically prescribed for each (see figure 04.16) / ~ -

FIG.04.17 SAMMISRABHINNASALA
so that the main sa/as are all different in their characteristics
166
- 167

Man u~f\yalaya candrikab ha.sy
•
a1n
as in the binnasala. Moreover, the corner houses are not
complete as they do not have the inner wall plates.
Therefore, the building can be considered to be binna£8ta.
Thus the building is misrabhinnacatussala.
I /
SAMMISRABHINNASALA
Stanza- 22
Sl4 •<I tel \if 'i I<:: t.~ \ tS1 ~ ~ QJ •<t.R.~ d (tf ?I'i 1-
~I·<I.R."qf'541 OJ~ 1~101 Ql~ (Sf ~~ii
Cf>l01fttt~ 1 lffi\I~I·<I=Qf4d '""IIi ~
, . Tf IJf'iittt
'
Outer perimeter should be in dhvajayoni. The
perimeters outside the offsets of basements both inside
and outside, the outside perimeter of main Salas and the
perimeters along the inside of the wall plates of the corner
houses aJso should be in dhvajayoni. In this sammis~a­
bhiiznasala, the width of the wall plate should be
computed by reasoning.
Commentary
. / bh. / sammiSrabhinnal8.ta will be a square both on the outside
In samm1sra 1nnasala, the perimeter measured
outside the outer wall plate (bahyottara) and that measured
inside the inner wall plate (ankf)ottara) should have the yoni
number 1. The perimeter measured outside the offset of
basement (pat raman a) and that measured along the paduka
of ankaQa also should have the same yoni. The outside
perimeter of the main Salas and the perimeter along the
inside edges of the wall plates of the corner houses also
should be in the same yoni. In short, the outside perimeters
along the outer wall plate and offset of basement, the inside
perimete_rs alan~ the inner wall plate and p8duka of yard ,
the outs1de penmeter of all main houses and the inside
perimeters of all corner houses should c onform to
--- - - - - - -
168 •
Manu~yaJayacandrikabha. ya1n
dhvajayoni. (fig.04.17). The width of the wall plate will be
adjusted to comply with these stringent conditions. The
method of arriving at the width of the wall plate has been
explained in the next stanza. This unified house is also called
ekakasala.
Stanza- 23
¥1 I ~ IG .......... -.t~ _........._.........,......, ~ ~ ¥01 I'RI· 'I fi il ti ¥01 I ~ I ct
' '
Cblon~:zpmG~~G ~Jd~'(te~£4 ~"ltnld I
' '
~ I \J1~l1(j SlJ;
1fCi '•ltl4~·<11l1ctl;:t11Cficlll(j -=q
. ~~~~il II From the outside perimeter selected by one, the inside
perimeter is to be subtracted. From the remaining
measurement the wise ones should forsake eight times
the side of the inner square of the corner house. The width
of the wall plate has to be computed by one-sixteenth of
what is left. The inner and outer wall plates should be
taken to the outside edge and joined in all four places.
Commentary
From figure 04.17, it can be seen that the
•
and inside. The corner houses also will be square. Therefore
by subtracting the selected inner perimeter from the outer
one the remainder is equal to 8 times the side of the corner
hou~e measured outside (length L, marked in figure 04.17)
Therefore if 8 times the measurement of the inner side (L2)
' .
of the corner house is subtracted from this, the balance IS
equal to 16 times the width of the wall plate. It r:nay be_noted
that according to the previous stanza, the outs1de penmeter
of main sa/as and inside perimeters of corner houses are
prescribed to be in dhvajayoni.
For example, let the perimeter along the outside edge of
169
 Man u~yaJayacandrikab ha~y atn Manu ~yalayac andrikab na~y am
outer perimeter be 40H 8A and that along the inside edge of
the inner wall plate of ankaQa be 16H 8A. Subtracting inside Stanza- 24
perimeter from the outside one, the balance is 24H. Thus, the
outside length of corner houses is 24 -:- 8 = 3H. The outside
perimeter of corner house will then be 4x3 = 12H. ±-::~-::on ~ Pf \it ll) ;:tt Ia~I : '(<PI~ lf:<ta r:
'
The inside perimeter of corner houses should be in '(1\itl~ aG4l~ ~~cp:qq:~ncl -
dhvajayoni. Therefore the perimeter less than and nearest RCb~ll<>tl ~\;1~~\itl ltG~('II~ dG~"'tC ";{ <1T II
to 12H giving dhvajayoni has to be adopted for the corner ' ' '
houses. This value is 11 H. That house suitable for royalty is to be known as
' milrakacatussala in which as mentioned earlier the
Then, the inside dimension of
perimeters along the offsets of basements of anka1Ja and
corner house = 11 H/4
= 2H -18A
outside and the inside perimeter of comer houses are in
Therefore, the width of wall plate = (3H -2H 18A)/2 dhvajayoni and the main houses are with their own yonis
= 3A and gamanas. Since the main houses have their ownyonis,
This value can be obtained by subtracting 8 times the they are suitable for all but not suitable for the brO.hma!'as.
measurement of inner side of corner house (viz 8 times 2H
18A) from 24H and dividing the balance (i.e. 2H) by 16. Commentary
----
One more example is worked out here. In misrakacatussala, the perimeters along th e outside
edge of outside wall plate ( varottara or b8hyottara) , inside
Let outside perimeter be =80H-8A ----------- 4-(1) edge of inside wall plate (ankaQottara), the perimeter along
Let inside perimeter along the the basement and inside perimeters of al1 corner houses
inside edge of ankaoottara = 43H-OA ----------- 4-(2) are to be in dhvajayoni as prescribed for sammiSra-
Subtracting 4 -(2) from 4 -(1 ), we get 37H 8A bhinnasala, but the main houses should have their own
specified yon is and gamanas. This house is suitable for all,
Outside width of corner house = 37H 8A/8
but is generally used for royal houses. It is believed that
= 4H 16A this is not suitable for the brahmanas (fig.04.18).
Outside perimeter of corner house = 4x(4H 16A)
. = 18H 16A cAruSSALA
The nearest value of perimeter in
Stanza- 25
ll(=£11 {4~ I• ''~~-
dhvajayoni lower than this = 16H 8A
Thus inside width of corner house = 4H 2A
:I
Eight times this value = 32H 16A : ~<I '1-
• •
Therefore, width of wall plate = (37H 8A-32H 16A)/16 : "'a'1~lrr.l<::::::r-1 ~ 1I
= (4H-16A)/16 = 7A
17 1
17()
 •

Manu~aJayacandrikablia~yam
Manufyalayacandriklibhli~yam
With the length and width of anka'}a equal to each
9A other, without gantana and with the perimeters of the
• inner and outer wall plates, and that of the offsets being
in dhvajayoni and also the inside perimeters of the main
and corner houses and the central doorways being in
• dhvajayoni these catuSSala houses, are for the kings .
WALL THICKNESS = 9A
E S~LA P= 29-16 (D) .
~ SA.LA P= 33-0 ( S) Commentary
c W S~LA P= 33-16 (V)
N
I N SALA P= 31-16 (G) •
For catuSsala, the plan shapes along the outer edge of
..,
% OUTSIDE P= 91-00 (D) the outside wall plate (b8hyottara) and along the inner edge of
N ANKA~A P: 43-00 (D)
the wall plate around the ankaoa are square i.e, they are not
•
given any elongation (8yama). The perimeters measured
•
outside the offset of the basement and inside the p8.duka of
the yard are to be in dhvajayoni. The inside perimeters of the
main and corner houses also should be in dhwajayoni.
22H-10A Similarly, the main doorways at the middle of the sa/a also
~ .
t (All dimensions in hasta-angu/~ should have their inside perimeters in dhvajayoni. Such a house
is prescribed for the warrior class (k~atriyas) (fig.04.19).
FIG.04.18 MISRAKACATUSSALA
-
MADHYAPRARUDHASALA
Stanza- 26
m:T1rTii:~: "Q'TT.::::rn~ '<1101 '<=(l '<=t ql (I ~ Io11101 fq 'I:J't.-:l~~ I
•
~ 10 -8A WALL N-S 7A
THICKNESS 1E-W 11A
i ®
E ~~LAP= 29-16 (D)
6H-2A H~A
S s~_LA P= 33-0 ( S)
W S~LA P= 36-16 (V) If the perimeters are com~uted along the centre lines
~ N SALA P= 31-16 (G)
-
C)
OUTSIDE P= 91-00 (D)
of all wall plates in all catuisala houses, in some places
I
:I: ANKAf.!A P= 43-00 (D) that is called madhyaprarudha house.
-
0

Commentary
From the descriptions of the eight previous types of
catuSSBias, it can be seen that adherence of the prescribed
rules individually for the main halls, corner halls, corridors
22H 1
•
etc. makes their design complicated and cumbersome. The
prescriptions to have the same yoni for both inside and
FIG.04.19 CATUSSALA IAll #imer:asio~s in hasta-angulal •

outside perimeters in them make it obligatory to adjust the

173
•
172
 Manu~yalayacandrikahlla~yam
• Man usyalayac
•
andrikab ha$y atn
wall thickness, widths of wall plate etc. every time when
computations are made for the main halls and corner rooms.
In any house they will vary from wall to wall. Even in earlier •

days, there must have been studies to reduce such complexities •

and evolve simpler design procedures. One such method is to OU/ -

I SIDE P= 83-QO (D)
E S~LA P= 29-16 (UJ
consider the perimeters along the centre lines of the wall plates ,_ P= 32-Q (&1
S SALA
W ~~LAP= 33·16 (V)
instead of the outer and/or the inner side of the wall plate. This N SALA P= 31-16 (G)
•

method is called madhyaprarudha rule and the houses · ,ANKAfiA P= 43-Q (UJ
•
•
designed by this method are called madhyaprarudha houses. •
•

Since yoni is calculated on the basis of the centre-line

dimensions, the thickness of the walls and the width of the
•
wall plates can be chosen in convenient modules. Integer
multiples of different values for width of walls and wall plates
also can adopted. Two examples are given in fig.04.20.

It is possible that the centre-line rule was adopted when

20H-22A
timber curtain walls (ara and nira) were used in building in t MISRAKACATUSSALA
- 0

which the thickness may be only 1 or 1 1/2 angula and the

difference between inside perimeter and outside perimeter
of walls was insignificant. It can also be seen that this method •

is very convenient in columnar structures. In modern OUJ:.SIDE P= 80-QS (D)

E SALA P= 35-00 (D)
engineering practice centre line dimensions are used in s SALA
,_ P= 33-QO (&1
framed constructions. W SALA P= 36-QS ( V)
N SALA P= 34-08 (G)
ANKAfJA P= 43-o (D) 10H-2A
It is only in Manu~yalayacandrika that this method is SMALL ROOMS MARKED E, S, W, N
ALSO IN APPROPRIATE YON/ ~
mentioned. Even here, detailed descriptions or rules are not 0
'i
r
given, but passing reference is made in this stanza. It is -
interesting to investigate why, inspite of its easiness, centre •
-.X
line system was not used. In all probability only the perimeter •
N

which can be directly measured was favoured in order to - •

•
.-(
N
N
avoid any computational error. Centre line perimeter has to X
t

be computed and further it cannot be checked by direct ~~ rn~~~~~~~~~~ ~~

•
11 H-1L.A
measurement. Only methods involving tangible, measurable (Alt d!mensl.ons In hssta-sn£1uts)
system was evidently prescribed for artisans. The centre ~------~1 -~----~~

line system, however, definitely existed amongst the

•
SAMSLI~TABHINNASALA
sthapatis and the acaryas and was indeed followed in some FIG.04.20 MADHYAPRARUDHASALA
places with advantages.

174 175
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yatn ·
ORDER OF PREFERENCE OF SALAS
Stanza- 27
~=!JIG ............... Gf&toi
' '
~ ~t)1lj -:q stliJQ"tll~ Ti I
• sunlight is more pleasurable and hence the southern Sa/a
C1158f·fl CfCI fit~ ct>4CI ~CJ;:i l1 El?l "Cflj(ill\liCb
SII~\Cf>CI(1_ CbcXtltll'!
If one s'ala is to be made, southern; in dvilala (2 I alas)
. that and western; in trilala (3 salas), these and northern; in
catuSSala (4/tilas), all these and eastern. In some places when
one sala is desired, here the western also is adopted. When
combinations of {iilas are made, they should be made (in
the sequence) as mentioned earlier.
Commentary
•
Ekasala (one rectangular house oriented in a cardinal
direction) is of simple plan. On the other hand, the catussala
(with 4 main houses and 4 corner houses), built around the
Brahmasth8na and utilising the entire buildable area of the
mandala is a complex but complete house-form.
In the case of eka;8Ja, the first preference is for the
east also can be built as an ekasala. In Kerala, western sa/as
are more in number than others. One reason for this can be
that in addition to vr~abhayoni, the other 3 yon is can be adopted
for the western sa/a. This gives flexibility in design of the
western sa/a. The preference to western sa/a may also be due
to the influence of topography, proximity to the ocean on the
western side and the climate. The general slope of ground in
Kerala is from east to west. Brf]atsamhita prescribes that in
ground stopping towards west, western sa/a is to be built.
In the colder latitudes of the northern hemisphere, south-
176
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yarn
facing houses which will receive sunlight on its front side are
• preferred. Therefore, the northern sa/as facing south are called
sukh8/ayas (houses giving pleasure) in Mayamata (Ref.04.05).
But in South India located near the equator, avoiding direct
with its front yard facing north direction is preferred.
II Another probable explanation for giving preference to
the western and southern datas may be the local beliefs
and customs. In the early vedic times, Varul)a, the bestover
of salvation, had a prominent place in the religious belief,
but later the importance shifted to Surya the bestover of
prosperity. Therefore, houses facing the sun (western Salas)
became important. Similarly, the importance shifted from
Dharmrija (Yam a), the regent of the south, to Dhanar8}a
(Kubera) in the north. Therefore, southern sa/a facing north
assumed importance .
The preferred order of preference is south, west, north
and then east.
If more than one tala is to be built, the same order of
preference is to be followed; i.e. build the southern /ata first,
then the western, then the eastern and lastly the northern.
The common expansion of functional space in ekadala
may be done either by adding halls (alindam) in front, rear and
sides (fig.04.21 ). The core house can also be extended
upwards to the second and third storey (fig.04.22). Another
method of space expansion is to have two, three or four
ekasalas built around a central courtyard with or without the
corner houses. This leads to dwisala, triSala and catussala.
The catussalas can be combined to form complex forms having
2,3 or 4 internal courtyards arranged along one axis or both
axes (fig.04.23). This gives great flexibility for adding spaces
without modifying the first unit and at the same time integrating
all the additions around the courtyards .
177
 Manu~yaJayac andrikabhilu_am
Manu ~yiilayac andrikab ha~y am
8H 14A
8H 14A N t
N
I N
I I A I •

.......
R R 00
l>

I• E
E <( E -
<(
co
,...
A co
,.. A ~ ---? R - RANGAM, V- VASAM,
~ A- ALINDAM

v v ~
CORE HOUSE RAISED TO
UPPER FLOORS

Core and one alindam raised

r--1 ---+-1~,f I I I 5H02A 2H10A
SH 18A 2H10A 5H18A 2H16A
Core with 1 alindam Core with 2 a/indams N
N
N A
~ I
I
A
A
R
E A
<(
co
,_
A E
J: <( A A ---?
M 0
,_
,_
v J:
<D v Core with 1 ,2,3 or 4
,_
alindams

A
::Z::...z...
I I •

( I I I
N I t I
5H2A 2H16A 11 H02 A
1
Core with 3 a/indams Core With
• a/Jndams
• on all 4 sides I (Not tor~, /_

FIG.04.22 EXPANSIONS OF EKASALA VERTICALLY

. R - RANGAM, V - VASAM, A - ALINDAM
(Not t o f /
FIG.04.21 EXPANSIONS OF EKASALA HORIZONTALLY 179

178
 Manus.yalayacandrikabha~yatn •

Manu~yalayacandrikabllasya1n
N

l- ... E
--
1 2 3
ALONG ONE AXf S
A

• ALONG BOTH AXES

2 4 CULL/
'
I -
KACAM

-- L •
-- E
1 3 FIG.04.23 I/
EXPANSION OF CATUSSALA
I
ALONG THE AXIS

- -
YAMASURPAM
S/DDARTHAM

,.
HIRANYANABHAM
-
SULAM
•

. DAM
DAN .. -
VATAM
/_

FIG.04.25 TYP·ES. OF DVISALAS

SUK$ETRAM PAKSAGHNAM
•/ -
FIG.04.24 TYPES OF TRISALAS
18() l R1
 M anu~yalayacandrikab ha~yam
NOMENCLATURE OF TRISALAS AND OW/SALAS Man u~~yalayac andrikah ha~y am
Stanza- 28 Stanza- 29
•
~ 5ilqiql~=t:u~~ift'1&> . . TT CbliflfllU
. dG ~ \l~l~s:IGJI I lliHitCBJ~ds 'QRdl Rftiii~Cbl~cir I
' '
tci={i: qfiiJJt ~llcllll ~~{"gd &ill I ~s:Jc! •

'ftlnit;t '(} f%xollo:tl~fllRI ~ ~d5ic! ~i~GIII
Then the trisala without the eastern sala is suksetra
•
which gives prosperity. The one without the southern
sdla is culli and it causes loss of wealth. That without the
western s'ala is dhvamsa causing enmity and loss of
children. The one without the northern (saumya) is
hiranyalliibhi which always gives wealth. . north and east) are absent (in acatusslila) death, fear, quarrel
Commentary
This stanza explains the nomenclature and the effects
of the 4 types of trisalas (fig.04.24).
TABLE 04.04
NOMENCLATURE OF TRISALAS
ifl~ifQj 51CIG •(lid: Sb'fCI}liJG llJillJRcb q;~~d II
' '
lf the twin is done without eastern and western it is
caiiedkaca, which will result is quarrel and fear. In the twin
without southern and northern, called sidhdrthaka,
acquisition of wealth results. If the coupiedsdlas beginning
from east (i.e. east and south, south and west, west and north,
and receipt of wealth respectively are said to result.
Commentary
Six combinations of dwisalas are possible (fig.04.25).
Their names and effects are given in table 4.
TABLE 04.05 NOMENCLATURE OF DWISALA
•

S.No Dwisala with Name Effect

Trisala without Name Effect
1. Southern and northern Kaca Quarrel and fear
Eastern sa/a Suksetra
•
Prosperity 2. Western and eastern Siddhartha Acquisition of wealth
Southern sa/a Gulli Loss of wealth 3. Western and northern Yamasurpa Death
4. Northern and eastern Danda Fear, misery
Western sa/a Dhwamsa Loss of children; Enmity • •
5. Eastern and southern Vata Quarrel
Northern sa/a Hiraf}yanabhi Wealth 6. Southern and western Siddhartha Acquisition of wealth

It may be noted that the preferred one as given in the

According to Brhatsamhita, the combination of western
previous stanza is the suk$etra type. The hirar;yanabhitype
and eastern is grhaculli and will cause loss of money
is said to be good for the kings. Some texts eg. B[hatsamhita (Ref.04.07). This is a better way of naming because (1) it
(Ref.04.06) calls the dhvamsa type by the name of avoids the confusion of calling two combinations by one
pak~aghna also. • name and (2) two sa/as opposite to each other is not
auspicious.
182 •

JR3
 Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y atn
Man u1ya;layac andrikab hasy atn
04.06 lllllJ~;:j f.31~11clc:f> f4\I~I~ICb~~ttd
EkaSala is the most common type of house used by '
commoners, mainly because of its flexibility. Starting with a "tl&i EFt t:t q~ ~ I ct f~ a ~trccj '« ~ ~ Cf> ~ t:t II
' ' '
core (sthayt), living areas can be added to it by constructing B.S., Llll.,38
(alindams) on one or more sides and also by raising the
sthayi to second and third floor. Dvisala, especially the 04.07 RiCEI~~t:tq~~JI4 ~'i'<i'(cj qf~iflct~ I
combination ,of southern and western sa/as (siddhartha) is ' ' •
CJ Ittl ~ell TTlJ rnlur:;::~(t~>I {Ill til II
TT!JI
also commonly seen, but trisalas are very rare. ' ,3
yy;r;~:t;:r'qrt't-t ~;:r;;;::;tt Gf&t ofl \I ~ Cf> Ii01 ii I
REFERENCES '
ffiCE I~(Q)~~I : II
04.01 ~ ~t\IJ~Cf) ci~l~l'1 ~:qiltet:4 ~i~Cb ~ii,ct~4> i ' '
' . ' G0'5cttft G0~1~cit Cbcl~lalJI: xi~CI ctldt~cit I
V.L.,28 t:;:rt;:t::rrgy"g"t-=rr,;:m" \)"st I fij f4;{\l:l: ~ ljd: II
B.S. ,LVIII, 39,40,41
04.02 ~llcll~=(j ~ct~l f~f~I"JlG ct~IIG fq I V.M
04.03 xCl ffi 'li ~ Jf
..... ~~l'":7· '\T.f'Dr:::r;:rtrrr;r.:::r ~i I •

' '
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- ~

~~~*II~ II
•

B.S., Llll, 31-35

04.04 ll~~d'i I
'
--- """'. rr ~i '! Cl a1 ~ ~ Jl ti ct xtl ~ 1'1 Cb ~ 11
~ -' ' '

M.M., XXVI,66-67

1R5
•
1R4
 •
•

•
J

-
 •

Manusyalayacandrikabhasyarn
•

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig.
05.01 FOUNDATION DETAILS
Page CHAPTER- 5
190
05.02 POSITION OF DRAIN & JASMINE PLATFORM 3T~ .J Still~:
194
• 05.03 JASMINE PLATFORM
05.04 VERTICAL ELEMENTS OF A HOUSE
194 PARTS OF HOUSE
197
05.05 SHIFT OF CENTRAL LINES OF SALAS
197
~lll:
05.06 DIFFERENT TYPES OF BASEMENTS FOR HOUSES 206
05.07 BASEMENTS FOR TEMPLES
206 RAISING THE SITE FOR DRAINAGE
05.08 PARTS OF A PILLAR
210 Stanza- 1
05.09 ORNAMENTAL PILLARS • •
05.10 DETAILS OF UTTARA
212 , lJ ~ Ill -;tcp::-::a:r::ctnl-;r.:~;:;:::r~rrq~;:r ~i 'i x' I
215
05.11 ORNAMENTAL POTIKA
217 +t I d~· J I +t I x=<h~ ;:rq I '5·» (i1 'i I ?I rt'5·J I 'i I
' l '~ ~' '
05.12 TYPICAL ROOF FRAME
223 ~ I ttl I •<1'! I'5·J I o111 dl ;<t 11 'I ;:w Ill 'I tlt-
05.13 DETAILS OF CEILING ' '
223
05.14 DECORATION OF TULAPADA
224
~ •·I\CJGltStf4~~1<1 ~ : II
05.15 DECORATED CEILING
224 For the flow (of water) from the outer and inner yards
05.16 MADRAS TERRACE FLOOR
' 225 and to avoid the defect of depression in the middle, the entire
05.17 STONE ROOF DETAILS
225 area earmarked for the building should be raised by 8,12
or 16 a1tgulas with soil, stone etc.
Commentary
It has been stated earlier (ch.1, st.20) that sites
'
depressed in the middle should be av~i~ed, a~ sue~ sites
would cause stagnation of water and dtfftculty 1n dratnage.
Even in a level ground the building site is to be raised by
8,12 or 16 angulas for easy drainage of water from the
central and outer yards of the house.

Most of the text books on Vastusastra, including this

book describe only the parts of the building above the
grou~d. This has given rise to_ the ,telief tha! n_o importance
•
is given to the foundation in Vastusastra. Th1s ts not correct.
Manasara (Ch .12) and Mayamata (Ch .12) give details of

189

•
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha$yam

Man u~yalayac andrikab hasy am -

UPAPITHA, THE SEAT BELOW THE BASEMENT
foundation in the section on garbhavinyasa (foundation Stanza- 2
deposit). It is stated that a foundation with all the prescribed
~hn:lrr. :r::::nr:JJT;J~:rts tt: ~i ¥II· <II a
components adds to the success of the building and an '
incomplete foundation deposit leads to failure (Ref.05.01 ). ";t:"J~-;:h't~~ll"'t:=t;::r;:::n:nnn"?: J I\ill t1 '5·ncll G'lJ+f I
'~ ' '
It has been stated depending on the soil conditions, that
31•<1~fi) (j 1Jd\~1JOJJ:t~ . . C'(J~dl<fli
the depth of the foundation shell be equal to
a) the height of the basement; ~it~d SII\S'fd II
• ' '~
~
b) kaya (height) of a man; Below the basement (masura) of all houses, an
c) up to the hard surface (rock) or water table, or additional seating (or pedestal or socle) should be made
d) one-third the width of house, but not loess than 1 H8A with a width of one to two hasta, with increments of SA,
(96cm) .. for strength, beauty and height. Inside, a depressed yard
For heavy structures (prasadavastu), the entire plinth area (gartankava) elongated (in the NS direction) in
is to be dug up to hard surface, filled with soil, sand and pieces vrsabhayo1zi or dhvajayoni with a passage for water
of stone in different layers and consolidated with water layer (~ain) towards north or east directions in the northeast
by layer either by ramming or making the elephants walk over side should made.
it. At the ground level, a layer of stone or brick is laid to form Stanza -3
the shoe (upanaha) or the levelling course. The basement
~..tot",. ~;:rr.r7u:~n '< =tt 1tl-
(adhisthana)
-. is to be built over this shoe (fig.05.01 ). •

PADUKA •

.
tei~·Cbl~li~{c,~a) CIT ti~EC¥1' I
'
~-r--r..,.....,,..-,-"T"""-r--r-T~~~..,-----::- ~GR 0 UN D LEVEL ......,....-r\-,r"''"r:'1~m,..,r\+;:rT.::"c:xn : ~~ Id
z '
0 ~:;:;t;;t;;:;i;;:;;t;~::;f;;j~~f;;;;;pp-- S H 0
E WITH PAVED
d\IG~tft: qtaCbtti ~~t1'1 II
~ BRICK OR STONE, ' 3 '
c SAND & RED EARTH The height of the socle of houses of humans can be equal
z
::> to or 5/6,617, 7/8, 8/9 or 9/10 part of the height of the
0
u.. CONSOLIDATED basement of the house. Footings etc. are to be done by
IJ..
0 LAYERS OF STONE, dividing this.
::r: SAND & RED EARTH
1-
a. Commentary
w
c •

This text prescribes that every house should have a

•

FIG.05.01 DETAILS OF FOUNDATION pedestal (socle) above the ground and below the basement
for safety, beauty and height. Mayamata also recomm~~ds
This text recommends the raising of the building site the construction of socle below basef!1ent (Ref.05.02_). h iS l

above the surrounding area. Preferably the site should be is an additional basement (upapitha) , made w1th the
ploughed and all biodegradable substances removed before
••
19 l
raising it with soil and stones . •

19()

prescribed elements (avayava) of a regular basement (vide
stanzas 18 to 20 of this chapter). Its projection outside the
basement is 1H, 1 H 8A 1 H 16A or 2H and height equal to or
a fraction 5/6, 6/7, 7/8, 8/9, 9/10 of the basement.
Mayamata prescribes the projection to be one-tenth to
five-tenth of height of basement. It may even be one to three
danda. (Ref.05.03). Mayamata categories the socles into 3
viz. vedibhadra, pratibhadra and subhadra (Ref.05.04).
Safety from(1) erosion of the ground outsjde the
basement, (2) from water logging and (3)from reptiles is
achieved by this. Since the entire building will be elevated,
it will add to its appearance.
Though this text as well as Mayamata prescribe that
the upapTtha is a necessary part (sakalanilayamasurato-
dhassamantat), some others say that it is optional
(upapTtham tu kartavyam yadhavasyam naralaye).
Therefore, it can be said that this is necessary only when it
is required for the safety of the building or it is desired to
have an elevated platform for majestic appearance.
-
Inside the courtyard, the offset of the upapitha will cause
a depressed rectangular yard (gartankaQa). This should be
in V[~abhayoni or dhavajayoni. It should have an outlet drain
in the NE corner, either in the north or in the east direction
(fig~05.02).
PLATFORM FOR JASMINE PLANT
Stanza- 4
JId!'116·J I OJ d t'!ffiS
' (karnasUtra) (fig.05.02). Though circle, square, octagon and
~ffll'41ti'"ICJIC{> Tf l=f~liHj'lJ3)teltCCb~tidlt;ll(h I
v;:;;:~~r"'Jlll'~·rcrrr;::r:nt: ~ Gf&1 ul
II
192
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yarn
After leaving half the ayama (elongation) exceeding
the width of the gartanka(za in the north and half in the
south, when the central square is divided into 8x8 grid, the
platform for the jasmine plant should be made in the
northernpada of the twopadas ofapa or then in the southern
cell of the two padas of apavatsa in the middle envelope.
Stanza- 5
~-n.... ;:::r;::rr;:=l'"hJT~I\;I"';:;rt; ......,.~......• ~ q fCt rte q;) ai
-;:r:;::r· err =<fl qq) diEICI~Cit{i ~d ~~CII~f:~d err I
-
-a"O II
'
That platform for jasmine plant is prescribed with
dhvajayoni; and may be square, octagon, 1~ sided polygon
or circle with the limbs beginning with upapitha etc. or with
kuntuda belt etc. The height is to be equal to the height of
adhisthana or one part less when it (adh~!htina) is divided
by (~~mbers) 6 to 11. It should avoid crossing the diagonal.
Commentary
It is commonly seen that a platform for jasmine or tulsi
is made in the ankara. The central square of the ankal}a is
taken leaving half the elongation on the north and. half on
the south. The square is then divided to 8x8 cells. Smce the
BrahmavTthi should be left free in the houses of humans,
the platform is constructed in the N-E co_!ner in th~ northern
pada of Apa or the southern pada of Apavatsa In such a
way that it will not vitiate (cause vedha of the d1agonal
16 ~ided polygon are adopted as plan shape.s for the
platform, the square is the most common shape (ftg.05.03).
To avoid karnavedha, its lateral dimension is to be less than
the width of .a cell in the 8x8 grid by half the width of the
ll)3
•
 •

Man u~yalayac andrikah ha$y am

Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yatn
.. ,.. - sutra on either side i.e. its width will be 15/16 times the width
1/2 AYAMA ALTER ATE of pada. The height is such that its top will be in level with the
LOCATIONS top of adhi~_thana of house or a little below that level(1/6,1/7,
OF DRAIN '
1/8,1/9,1/10 or 1/11 of height of adhi~thana below the top level
of adhi?.thana). It is usually constructed with paduka, jagati
and prati and sometimes with kumuda, gala etc. (The details
of these elements are given in stanzas 18 to 20 of this chapter).
PADA
~----~--
OF The outside perimeter should be in dhvajayoni.
APAVATSA
SHOE AND THE PLINTH
Stanza- 6
\3 q 4l dl ci1 ~i 'il oil I ~,...._...__...... ~~ ~ a¥i I
'
LOCATION II
OF The shoe of the basement should be constructed firmly
-
MALUKA- -
to the level equal to the top level of the upapitha. Above
KU!!fllMA that theptiduka (footing) should be done up to the patramana
as prescribed.
Commentary
- -
112AYAMA
Where there is
-
upapitha,
its top should be strongly
FIG.05.02 POSITION OF MALLIKAKUTTIMA & DRAIN IN ANKANA constructed as the shoe (regulating course). Mayamata
' .. ,
refers to this,-course as the origin (Ref.05 .05). Where there
•
is no upapitha, the shoe will be at the ground level
(fig.05.01 ). The lowest course of adhi$!hana, viz, paduka is
constructed above the shoe with its outer edge in plumb
....
with patramana .
KUMUDAM -
PATRAMANA •

Stanza - 7
FIQ.05.03 PLATFORM FOR
JAGATI JASMINE PLANT ~ict?il \I~~ Iin q tStCff4~ttl C'~ ~~I G --+-1o: -
' '
- • ~..... <J \=J~d~'ld q?IJOtl;:i : I
PADUKAM '
-
Al,~~nrt·
•
~~~~ II
194 •
195

•
 -

Manu~yaJayacandrikahhfi$ya'n
M anu~yaJayac andrikab hii~y atn
What is prescribed everywhere (in all houses) as the •

outside offset of eight a1zgula of the basement is known as -

STUPI'
patrii1n1za (offset). Either this (i.e. 8angula) or its double or
,
treble is prescribed. Then, like that, six a1zgula in south and SIKHARA
north and in some places twice that (i.e., 12 a1zgula) in west
(are prescribed).
•
GRivA
Commentary PRASTARA
•

The offset from the outer vertical edge of wall plate

(bahyottara) outside edge of the plinth is called patramana VIS TARA
•
STAMBHA I BHITT1 1
(fig. 05.04). It can be 8 angula or multiples of eight angula.
This is for keeping the yoni of patramana the same as that
-
ADHISTHANA
of the yoni of the outer perimeter of uttara. But sometimes • •

the outside offset is 6 angula in north and south and 12

I BHUMILAMBA
angula in the west. With such offsets also the yoni rule will I
be satisfied as the total increase in perimeter will be 64 l---
angula or 8 pada.The paduka (lowest footing) of the
basement should be such that its outer edge should be FIG. 05.04 VERTICAL ELEMENTS OF A HOUSE
vertically below the outer edge of patramana. ct
Stanza- 8
x~.'i
. . . ~ xi 'i ~
• • NORTHERN HALL
~ .......
(Y........?i""'""'"'"f..,..,.l-...'1......
--..d.......

Ql• (I Sl--q ...... I

'
2"'"' 5
~ • -+V..r-,,;..,· _..., ,._ ., - - - •

WESTERN HALL 0 7
II EASTERN HALL
Thatpatra11ta1za is prescribed outside and inside with
equal or unequal measurements and with perimeter having
prescribed JlJizi, for the houses of humans and for the 10
- I
-
dipa111iila of a1ztahara structure and for glJpuras of temples. 1- BRAHMASUTRA
•

SOUTHERN HALL -
2- YAMASUTRA
~

-
Commentary 8 - BRAHMANABHI I

0 - POSITION OF DOOR
,-
Th e offset of th e plinth (from th e verti cal plan e of uttara) C- CENTRE LINE OF SALA

ca n be equal or un equal at th e in side and outside. Thi s I-

-
appli es to th e dipamala stru cture for oil lamps whi ch form s
FIG. 05.05 SHIFT OF CENTRAL LINES OF SALAS

1Y6 197
 Man U$yalayac andriwb ha~y a1n
Man u~ya.layac andrikab ha~y am
coJaj 314014 !'lt;~olttltl Mllll~ffi CJfA'!-
the third parakara and to the gopura (gate house) of temples
also. But in all cases, the yoni of the perimeter, both inside • ~rr.~ ;::r.~~: ~:q m~ \il '1 ~'!I CJ ~ ll4> err ttcf: I I
and outside, should be that prescribed for the house. For
If the central lines of the inner courtyard and the
walls of wood viz, nira, it is advisable to take centre line
houses coincide, the residents of that house will suffer
perimeter.
the loss of children and grand children. Therefore, from
ANKANA east onwards (east, south, west, north), the shift (gamana)
•
shall be done in clockwise direction by 3,9,7 and Sangulas
Stanza- 9
• so as to generate their yo1zis and if necessary by yavas
..... : 5'11'5·31 OJ
' (instead of angulas).
I Stanza- 11
'
~Gi~fi~~dl~
~~~~~nn~~~~~ I
•

For all the four houses, the portion outside the paduka "]T;:I:~ d Gift ~ CJ f:\) ~ (f-
is mentioned as prankaiJa (yard) by learned people. This is ' '
~tq II
rectangular with north-south elongation and with dhvaja-
yoni. Itstiytima will be 1,2,4,8,9,12 or 16angulas or 1, 2 or 3 The gamana1tgulas prescribed for the specific
hastas or (computed) by gunams'a rule in the sa1ne manner . directions are suitable with addition of8,16, or 24angulas
• •
for those directions. Therefore, for houses with narrow
Commentary corridors, they are to be used.
The ankarJa is the yard outside the lowest footing of the
Commentary
basement. The outside yard is called bahyankana and the
•
inside one is called madhyankaQa. The madhyankaQa (also It has already been mentioned under stanza 11 of ch 2
called prankaQa) should be rectangular with its longer side in that the coincidence of the centre-tines of the ankaoa and
north-south direction. The difference between the length and the main house constit·utes vedhadosa •
and should be
the width (ayama) can be 1,2,4,8,9, 12 or 16 angula or 1,2 or 3 avoided. For this, the centre lines of the houses are shifted
hasta. The proportion between length and width can also be clockwise (fig.05.05). The shift is 3 angula towards south
computed by guQ§m5a rule (vide st. 6, ch 4). for eastern house, 9 angula towards west for the southern
house, 7 angula toward north for the western house and 5
RULES FOR GAMANA OR SHIFT .OF CENTRE LINES I angula toward east for the northern house. If it is difficult to
Stanza- 10 • align the pillars when the gamana is done in angula, it can
be done in yava units also i.e. it can be 3,9,7 and 5 yavas
respectively.
199
198 •
 Manu~ya,layacandrikabha~yatn
The gamana is decided by the yoni number of the
house. For example for eastern house, the gamana is 3
angula. Multiplying by 3 and dividing by 8, the yoni of gamana
is 1 ( dhvajayon1) (3x3/8, remainder1) as prescribed for
eastern house. For the southern house, gam ana is 9 angula.
Multiplying 3 and dividing by 8, the yoni number is obtained
as 3, the same as that prescribed for the southern house.
The same consideration applies to the other houses also.
By adding 8, 16, or 24 angulas to the gamanangulas
the yoni remains unchanged. Hence, these higher values
can also be used. These will become necessary to avoid
vedha in houses with narrow corridors. · wide , naturally, the cost will increase and will result in waste
There is an anomaly in the units prescribed for the shift
(gamana) of houses. If the gamana of the houses are in
angulas why must they be multiplied by 3 to compute the
yoni number? In the case of perimeter of the house this
multiplications was needed to convert hasta into pada.
Hence, here the units given (3,9,7 and 5) are more likely to
be parva than angula. Additions prescribed to them in para
11 (ie. 8, 16,24,etc.) also can be in parva. This is to be
investigated from extant buildings or other sources.
CORRIDORS ..
Stanza- 12
f4 Cfib) oII cl :q '""' ~CI·<~tel•<l~lcll
; r '11 ~ OG-
' !.
fiHSC"4 (j ~~lllll ~ lf4~('lf~dl &.Hl:lit I
S ·<I~ f4 tn~(CJ IG ct: ~ llJ~ft
. ft~'{fli~ldlS~Cf>d~
'
To separate the main houses (in the cardinal
dire~tions) and the corner houses, there are eight
corridors. If they are large, waste of money and if small
diseases will happen. If the walls touch, death will occur
2 ()()
•
Manu •sya Layacandrikab J£a~ya1n
•
because of lack of gap. Therefore, generally it is not
desirable to have the width of corridor too much greater
than, or more than 2 or 3 angulas shorter than, one sixth
of the length of the house.
Commentary
Eight corridors connect the 4 main houses and 4 corner
house. Since the main function of the corr"dors is to link
the houses, their size should be optimum. If they are very
of space and money. If they are very narrow, the ventilation
will be affected and they will not serve as passages. Hence
they will not serve as easy passages.
The width of the corridors is made approximately equal
to 1/6 of the length of the house. The width should not be
much more than this and should be not be less than this by
2 or 3 angulas. If we take passage width of 1 H-8A (96cm) ,
the length of the house will be just 6 times this (ie. 8H),
leaving 2 corridors each of 1 H8A on the sides.
- -
PADAMANA
Stanza- 13
· t~tli~ · ~:ctx'<ll \l~1qt~~1-
-~· x=tlf~q;~f.31co1f:l1a~cj \Cl~Jcl~ 1
'
II •
201
 Man u~yalayacandrikab haUJ a1n
Manu~yalayacandrikahha~yam Stanza- 15
Commentary . +tctf .\) ()~: I
Padamana is the height of the building up to the level ~~=t I~ ~I J II'S·Cf>G ~l ~lli tJ II~ II
-
of uttara (fig.05.04). If there is upapitha, it is measured from '
the top of upapTtha and if not from the levelling course at the Thus there are 14 measurements of basements. From
ground level. Padamana is thus the height of adhi$.thana plus them, if one part out of 6,7,8,9,10 and 11 divisions is
the height of the wall/pillar. The minimum value prescribed for subtracted separately, (they become) 84 types.
padamana is 3H 6A (234cm). It can be equal to the width of
Commentary
the house or 1112, 11/4, 11/6, 11/7, 11 /8, 11/ 9, 1111o, 3/4, 5/6, 6/7,
7/8, 8/9, or 9/10 of the width i.e., it should be between 3/4 to As mentioned earlier, adhi?fhana is a fraction of the
1112 times the width. If the minimum measure of padamana of p8dam8na. This fraction can be 1/3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7, 1/8,
3/4 width corresponds to 3H-6A, the minimum width of the 1/9, 1/10, 6/21, 5/18, 7/24, 2/7, 4/15, 4/14- altogether 14
sa/a will be 4H-8A. The inside width of this house will be values. In addition to these, the 5/6, 6/7, 7/8, 8/9, 9/10, or
3H-16A, assuming a wall thickness of 8A. 10/11 part of each one of these 14 values can also be used.
Thus there are 14x6=84 values.
During the early period of evolution of the house form,
the roof was supported on pillars rising from the levelled It can be seen that some of there fractions are the same,
ground without basement. Hence the term padamana was e.g. 6/21 and 2/7. In short it can be taken that the height of
used to denote the total height of the pillar. When adhi?thana the basement is to be between 1/ 12 and 1/ 3 of the
was added as a distinct feature, the term was continued to
padamana.
be used to denote the height up to the uttara (i.e., height of
basement + height of pillar/wall). ELEMENTS OF BASEMENT
BASEMENT Stanza -16
•
~~ ~ Cl ~ ~~ {4~ ct> :
•

- ::::;:::rrk.)'" ......

.........h...• ":C"':J"~;:rrr.;::rr-;:~~ ~<Fit~ ~I~ ct~ Shit oI I

- '
......_~......· liJ~ch 'f-ltld SJRtti(Yt~~d V<ol

' qy II
T<Jt~G-mr;nt1'rr2-:4i·mrr ~ m
' '
II When the desired height of adh~{hana is divided b.y 9,

en this pada11iana is di ided b" , 3\4 5 6 7\8 9 or 10,

"
·vel the ) can be
one part of that ,,,ill form the basement. imilarl. \ 6 parts
. rhen di \ .ded b 21 5 parts \Vhen di rided b r 1 , 7 parts
1
e outward
'''hen di' ·ded b .. ' 24 2 parts \vhen di\rided 7 and parts
2()3
\ rhen divided b . 15 or 14 '''ill al 0 t rnl the basenl nt. •
 . . . ,. ... et padutra \ · cur e e .. ~ e e t ree- Thus three types of galamancaka have been
al or one-th.rd part f "ts n he· ht r parts mentioned. For prati, the outward shift (offset) will be
.llLJLe di ·ded b • 5. equal to that ofjagati. The inward shift of gala of those
galamancakas should be one-fourth of the height of the
gala. .
Commentary (Stanza 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20)
II
e e desired height of basement · eli · ded b • 6. These 5 stanzas give the dimensions of the different
b_ one part padltka, then bj• 3 parts height ofjagali. b . its ornamental elements (avayava) of the basement (fig.05.06) .
one part ~ala and siJ;riilarl.. prati should be designed.
7 Ornamentation is achieved by the subtle proportions of these
parts and by sculpturing on them.
Stanza- 18
;m ll Cb i ~ rPi g ~:T;rj~~ ur,:::~~~n+:r~~..,.,.....,....._.: 1 For ordinary houses, the simple basements without gala
and prati (fig.5.06. a & b and c) are used. For more
e&i .$ffdrs~ \JiZIJldt JIQi ~· ~Cbctl f4't4il~~fa <IT II important buildings, galamancaka (fig. 05.06 d,e and f) are
Or hen the height of basement is di · ded b :. b . one used. In the case of temples decorative motifs are sculptured
~

over prati, gala and sometimes over jagati. Some ornamental

pa1 t of it the padrtka then b __ 2 pal ts jagati., b. one part
7

basements used in temples are given in fig.05.07. The bold

gala and then prati also shal be constrn ted.
- horizontal lines of the parts of the basement give a rythm to
Stanza- 19 the building. Mayamata has given 14 types of treatments
for the basement (Ref.05.06) from padabandha to kailasa.
They are used in religious buildings. Texts like Mayamata,
M8nas8.ra, Silpatantra, /SanaSivagurudevapaddhati
prescribe that the topmost moulding (prati or stereobate)
should not be broken for placing the door ie. the door should
be placed over the prati (Ref.05.07, 05.08).
-
PILLAR
Stanza- 21
•
-;r-;::::ntc)" ----~~· GG d X¥i~ d "tjt) ~ ci
•

I
'

2(}5
 •

Manu~ylllayacandrikabha~ya1n

Man u~~yalayac andrikab Fla~y atn

~

PRATI
•
Thus, after making the basement with strength, then
- GALA
I

I
what is left of padanza11a is to be known as the height of
• ~
N
~ • the pillar. Here, by adding or subtracting one part after
-
~
~
M
• •
dividing by 6,7,8,9,10 or 11 also, (the height of pillar can
N ipADUKA
be) adopted. From the desired length of the pillar, the
-~-----
-
height of the seating (piidap(tha) known as oma and the
MANCAKA PRATIMANCAKA GALAMANCAKA
- thickness of potika should be deducted.
I

Commentary
FIG ..05.06 DIFFERENT TYPES OF BASEMENTS FOR HOUSES
The pillar or wall supporting the uttara is supported by
•
I
the basement. The difference between the padamana and
the height of basement is its height. The actual height can
be reduced or increased by its 1/6, 1/7, 1/8, 1/9, 1/1 0 or 1/
PRAT/ •
11 part. The pillar is seated on a pedestal known as oma.
~ I GALA At the top of the pillar a supporting bracket called potika is
~
,.... -
.... ·~
:s
fKAMPA provided (fig.05.08) to distribute the load from the uttara
/ ........
N
~ over the pillar. The thickness of these two should be
KUMUDA KUMUDA
subtracted from the calculated height of the pillar to get the
:s ' •
actual height of the shaft (ka[Jga) .
JAGAT/
Stanza- 22
•
f4·~H:ilq qJG~d Xj~G
-

PADUKA

PADABANDHA PRATIBANDHA

-
={, 11111 tft rm7hllrnt;:irrltctt::r;:rr~ . err d ~ ~-~ lt-
•
' '
l·fltlt~fl;:i ~ "CfG'"f)q+J+Jfq ~~ CIIG1'11Eif;4d ~ II
• "FIG. 05.07 BASEMENTS FOR TEMPLES '
• Then, thepadap~ha (onza) made with hard stone or core
of wood, square, octagonal or sixteen sided or in some places
circular section should be placed above the basement with
•
•
, width equal to the diagonal at the base of the pillar and
height equal to half that (diagonal) or 1/3 or 1/4 or 1/2 less
than that, resembling lotus flower and sometimes with
fillets.
2()6
207
 Manu ~ya.layac andrikab na. yarn
•
Stanza- 23
~' 11111 : ~~:r::n~r::rr'tiT'lJT11rt:]"t=1t;;11r:rl"]:r::;ITn1hn-:Ji=~T~t::n :
. ~\ii~fdcbJ'! &1 dGifd~l<'fl'i~l(gl: xili,,ll: II
' '
. All pillars, with square tenons of width equal to one
third of own width, should be placed above their own
onzas with the said tenons joined with their mortises.
Commentary (Stanza 22 and 23)
The om a should be made with strong materials like hard
stone or heart -wood. Square, octagonal, sixteen sided or
sometimes circular shapes are adopted. Its width is equal
to the largest diagonal dimension at the base of the pillar
and thickness is 1/2 the width. It can be made in ornamental
shapes of lotus and/or with vajana (fillet). The connection
between pillar and om a is made with mortise and tenon joint,
with the tenon of width equal to one third width of pillar firmly
seated in the mortise made in the oma.
Stanza- 24
~~r-=rr·rtTTTr:::::rr.~s Qt~ d GC1 lt q Ien ext ;?J G0\5 ,4 :il : I I
The bottom width of the pillar will be 1/4, 1/5, 1/6,
1/7, 1/8, 1/9, 1/10 or 1/11 of the height of the pillar and
the top width will be reduced by 1/8, 119, 1/10 or 1/11
part of the bottom width. This (top width) is called da~z{ia.
Then by this, the dimensions of timber works are
computed in some place. The top width of the pillar in
the wall (viz., pilaster) is named as the da~ztfa for its
decorative works.
I
Man u~yiilayac andrikab ha~y am
Commentary
I In the commentary on stanza 14 of chapter 3 mention
was ~ade of the p~oportionate system of dar;riam~na used
for p~lars and carv1ngs. Its details are given in this stanza.
The load-bearing capacity of the pillars depend on their
~lend~rness ratio viz. ratio of its least lateral dimension to
1ts he1ght (length). According to this text, this ratio is to be
between 1/11 and 1/4. For pillars of wood, this is usually
1/10 or 1/11. For stone pillars, it may be between 1/8 or
1/9 and for brick pillars it can be 1/6 or 1/7. For pillars made
of mud this ratio will be 1/5 or 1/4. It is interesting to note
that the con.cept of slenderness ratio is used in the design
of columns 1n modern engineering practice.
The pillars usually taper towards the top. The top width
is 7/8 to 10/11 part of the bottom width. According to
Mayamata, the diameter at top is 5/6 to 11/12 of that at
bottom. This is taken as the unit ( daoga) for computing the
dimensions of all other parts (fig.05.08) as indicated earlier
in commentary on stanzas 13 and 14 of chapter 3. (also
ref.05.09).
Stanza- 25
'2\ 11111 f\ I• '1~ d I\! ~"Hf:::::r:;y-::::r:r.J3i) t4+t I J II : ~i ~ f\ II
&ZTJ>f~>4 I: I
& tI ~i ~mtl~-;:::r;:J~rr.::~r;r -
Cl ~:q sm: ~1 ct ffi "A±::r::rrr,:r:]'Jr;rtr'"~-:q ll aI f4illlt : I I
All pillars must be made with square (section) at the
t •
top to the length equal to its bottom diagonal
(kar~zapranzaiJa), with square shape at bottom to the
length equal to 31/2, 3, 5 or 6 times kar1Japrantal}a, with
square section at centre equal to karJJapranta'!a (of the
mid section) and with octagonal (section) at top and
2()9
 •

Man u~ytilayac andrikab ha~y am

Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
bottom of that (central square section), or with circular
~
ez or octagonal or 16 sided (sections) throughout.
z 0
-
......
~
-
0
t-
()
~
0
()
z:::;) Stanza- 26
~ ~ z:::;) ~
~ -,
t::: ~ -, •
~ 0 :q '{ 011 {?flf) slft '{t2H G't:Fh II aCHj'{ .1301 Cf> I CfT I
0
Q..
~&I ~ tll-=t .!3'1'f\&li~T.f tl~ I ~il ~I : I I
These 3 pillars of circular (sections) etc. (viz., circular,
16 sided and octagonal), should be made square below
the middle or with bottom square section (to a length
•
equal to) the diagonal of width .
a:
<
..J
Commentary
-a..
..J
These two stanzas deal with the mixed cross-sections
<
u. recommended for the pillars. For square pillars, there will
0
en be 2 belts of octagonal section between the square sections.
1-
z a: The dimensions are given in figure 05.09. The pillars can
-
0
f-
m
• u 0 ~ also be made with their upper half in circular, octagonal or
() co
w 0
• 16 sided sections and lower half in square section. The
U) Lt)
t
U) 0
U) • height of this square section can also be equal to the diagonal
~
0
a:
()
-u. of the bottom section.

&.0 • According to Mayamata, square pillars are called

·w -
...J
Brahmakanta, octagonal ones are called Visnukkanta, the
=> sixteen-sided ones are Saumya and the circular ones are
0 z
~ Q Rudrakanta. A pillar comprising 3 equal parts of square
- en
z z
Q ~ octagonal and circular sections is called Rudracchanda
en
z -0
w ...J (Ref.05.1 0).
~ ~
-0 a:
w Stanza- 27
~ ~
u ffi~ ·o~
0
~ ~
0.0
~ m
azL-9
•
••
0
••
0
.. .......r-TT'~· ~I~ I f1l:
lJ GI fll ~ te Cf> I f1l: rt;:J1~1Jcr~~;r.r II

2 11
21 ()
 •

Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y am •

M anu~yaJayac andrikab ha~y am

For very high pillars, the height equal to or 11/2 times
the height of the basement or in some places the portion
•

•
below the middle, should be made with width equal to
II
~ ~ 11/4 or 11/2 of its (prescribed) width. This should be done
I I

• .....
, 7' with stones in properly prepared mortar or strong bricks
•
-.. ~
in some places for the entire height or half height.
c 'P.J •

~
•
-"' Commentary
.... r I I

...
-..... •

•
3 3 When the pillar is very tall, its bottom width is increased
I.
I
• to 11 /4 or 11 12 times the usual width. This is done to a height
2 2 ~~
•
'(., equal to 11 12 times its prescribed width: Alternatively, for
the entire bottom half, the width is increased. In such cases,
, '\
• the bottom portion can be made with stone masonry or brick
's J
_.4
masonry. Also the entire pillar is made of stone or brick, if
J.. {
•
it is felt necessary to do so .
N ~ Stanza- 28
~

~rn:r;:;urrl'\"Yr';mrt q ?II f:i] d =til (I ~ I

•

D 0
~
-....r-r

={' 11111 Di1~~rm"!nt~:r;:;r:mc:!ll'i~~liJTI\lt~~,rn1il te I ~'Ill) -

i1 ~ 16·l i Tl ~~ru:r:rwJ"9T1~.'·~,~~J· II
' '
If there is only one vajana (projection or fillet) for the
uttara, the central square section is not desired for the pillars.
1-1 2-2 3-3
•
In uttara with small vajalla and in patrottara, pillars are
• desirable with decorations of pearl Izecklace, trunk of
•
•
elephant, and rings etc. All the elements of the house should
FIG. 05.09 ORNAMENTAL PILLARS be done based on (dimensions of) uttara.
Commentary
•

Uttara (wa.ll plate) which transfers the load of the roof

to the walls/pillars is an important structural element. Hence
it is given great importance in Vastuvidya. The auspicious
•
213
212 •
 Man u~yalayac andrikah na~y am Man u~yalayac andrikab Jla~yam
perimeter is calculated on the basis of uttara. Similarly, all
parts of the roof and decorations are made on the basis of
the measurements of uttara.
COLLAR
RIDG&
PIN
Vajana means wing. For uttara, vajana is the projection
K~UDROITARA
from the vertical face (fig.05.1 0). Vajanothara is the main KHAtyQOTTARA
f'ATROTTARA

uttara with projections. Patrottara is the uttara which has its

thickness equal to three fourth its width (ref.05.11 ).

If the uttara has only one simple vajana, the central

square section of the pillar is not made. If the uttara has a
mahavajana (large vajana) and one or more alpavajana I
RUPOTTARA CULl

(small vajana), the central square section is given to the I

pillars. For patrottara also, the supporting pillar will have -

VAJANA
•

central square section. The pillars are decorated with

carvings and reliefs. Here it appears that the details of the
#'

central section of the pillar has a role of identifying the type -

VAJANOTTARA
of uttara coming on it. Thus the decoration becomes SECTION OF BUILDING
'
• SECTIONS OF UTTARA
symbolic of a function.

POTIKA, THE SUPPORTING BRACKET ABOVE THE

RAFTER ·
PILLAR · ~-- .. .,

Stanza- 29
~!(111ll!fl\l=(di=(~JJIGclf4~i:tl~ d~l ~,1111'"1-
-
~~iltiGCI!II~iddi -:q df! clEI'1i 'Qq) \I~ q)~Cblli I KILA
;
~

' '
~WTn1f~;::m:c;:r.:!';::n~~l'J'1T':mf.i~· en (, =(-
•

• BRESSUMER

cJU::H8J&'f'{i'tllldi Cf>clll{j '{;:II'~ cltt& IG1'11Jt II • KSUDROTTARA

•

Potika (bracket) should be made above the pillar WALL PLATE

supporting the riipotlzara with (its) width equal to half the PILLAR--........,
WALL
sum of the widths of top of pillar and uttara or equal to the DETAILS OF JOINTS ·

width of pillar at its middle, with its thickness equal to half •

FIG. 05.10 DETAILS OF UTTARA

the width and with length 3, 4 or 5 times theda~{la generated •

by the top of the pillar or with length of 3 times the width

(of the potika)
115
214
•
 •

Manu$yalayacandrikabhasyam • Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam

Stanza- 30
•
;
. ~

For patrottara, this potika will have thickness of three-

fourth times the width and for khal}tf,ottara, its thickness is
equal to the width. In all cases, all (elements) can be done
to give beauty. .
Commentary

Potika (also called bodhika) is the bracket above the pillar

for supporting the uttara and for transferring the load from
uttara to the pillar. Its dimensions will vary according to the •

thickness of uttara. Classification of uttara into rupott ara,

patrottara, khar.dottara, etc. is explained in the next stanza.
The thickness will be half and three-fourth of its width for
riJpottara and patrottara (respectively) and equal to its width
for kharycjottara. The width can be either equal to the width •
•

at the middle of the pillar of half the sum of top width of

pillar and width of uttara. The length can be conveniently
fixed as 3 times its (potika's) width or 3,4 or 5 times the
•

daf)c;ia (top width of pillar). But potika, like the capital of the
•
Greek columns, is made an ornamental piece. Hence the
dimensions must be chosen to make it beautiful. Several
motifs like lion, elephant, gargoyle, dwarfs etc. are carved •

I
on the potika (fig.05.11 ).

WIDTH OF UTTARA •
•

Stanza- 31
~'11111tt'<'ll~iJG !'1Cf>~'1f4~~q) \lxiDii ~ d I~
POTIKA FOR A CORNER PILLAR
• •
'

~ r~ ~ ct> eXt il c; err ~rr\tr.Jrrrr;:;~rht;J~I'itJ'Tlr:2'=JT~

•

I
' ' ' •

. ~D'S) \I~ d~d~'<i~tl;:j lftll14 q?l'<i~i riG. 05.11 ORNAMENTAL POTIKA

'
qJc;);flvci Cf>~~ f4d~Gclt14 =Qlfl\I~J{,<lJJOf II ••

'
217
•
216
 Manufyalayacandrikabha~yam ManusyalayacandrikabhasyaJn
• •

The width of the uttaras should be decided by the rule
mentioned for the bottom width of the pillars or as 6, 8, 12
or 16 angulas. That with thickness equal to (its) width is
the auspicious khal}tjottara, that with thickness equal to
three-fourth the width is called patrottara and is medium
and that with thickness equal to half the width is called
rupottara and is inferior.
Stanza- 32
\3(t~f4~'11~EI4 «t\ll~=lJifq !'l<b~~d &qlfq I
' '
O?T q 'tdl d'flttitcutf~a : II
In some locations, the width and thickness ofuttara can
be alternated. That is calledculi (cuzhika-bressumer). Due
to this (position) the rafters should be fixed on that.
Commentary
It has been mentioned earlier (Stanzas 21 of this chapter)
that the bottom width of the pillar should be between 1/4 and
1/11 of its height. The same rule is applied to fix the width of
uttara. Alternately, the width may be taken as 6, 8, 12 or 16
angu/as according to the requirements of strength and
appearance. The thickness can be 1/2, 3/4 or same as the
width as dictated by the considerations of its position and its
strength(fig.05.1 0). These 3 types are called rupottara,
patrottara and khaQcjottara respectively. In locations like
verandah where the uttara is supported on pillars placed wide
apart, the depth is to be more than the width to avoid bending.
Such an uttara is called culi, or culika . While there will be an
additional uttara called k$udrottara placed above the 3 types
of uttara mentioned earlier to take the rafter, in the case of
culi , the rafters are directly fixed to it. This is because its depth
is equal to more than its width and can easily accommodate
the rafters.
218
DECORATIONS OF UTTARA
Stanza- 33
CUGf-;f' llCl<:~d'Hil ~l'<ltlfGi~ I
-::r:;:;~·qyn']'T";j-::r ~ "SF> ¥011 SQl ~=ll q c c'"f C1 ~I te+t 131 a: I I
'
If there is only one vajana, when the thickness of uttara
is divided by five, by two parts the projection and by the
remaining part, the belt (pa!ta) are to be done.
Stanza- 34
~ IJ I+II fTt ~ '"f ~ (1 f5i+JI3J ~ : I
I --<"-1 ~~I ~:q ~'*fill: '<<fl ti1 ffi q ¥'tfa}f1l : I I
In uttara with minor vajana, when the thickness is
divided by eight, by three parts the major (vajana), by one
part the minor (vajana), by four parts the belt and by their
owQ heights the projections of both happen.
Stanza- 35
~JOJi~l·ll~clld'<~ (j Gt'Rli 'i~ct Clt\li;i
-;r;t:-::rr:;:rn:rorr.rl;:rl~ 'i ~ d q c e ~ ~I tC i ~ I~ : I
'
~2HcftSQt~qfA-'qJii~t~ '<i<ihi'<~Cfiffi
: II
For all uttaras, when thickness is divided by 5, the major
vajana should be done by 2 parts, the minor vajana by one
and the belt by the balance. When the thickness of all uttaras
is divided by (numbers) 4 to 11 the projection ofboth vajalzas
should be done suitably by one (part). In other places also
this is the rule (for vajaJlQ ).
Commentary
The uttaras are made with stepped verticat faces. The
projecting portion is called the v8jana (wing or fillet) and the
219
 Manu ~yiilayac andrikab ha~y am
l?wer portion is called the belt (paga). If there is only one
ftllet, the ratio of thickness of vajana and patta is 3:2. If
there are 2 fillets, the lowers portion is patta and the two
proje:tic:~s are Va.janas. The top v8jana i;· major vajana
(mahavaJana) and the lower one is minor (a/pavajana). The
proportions of their width are shown in figure 05.1 0. The
projections can be from 1/4 to 1/11 times the thickness.
Stepped projections (vajanas) are made in other wooden
members like oma, potika, door frame etc. The above
mentioned rules are applicable in those cases also.
Stanza- 36
~ tt Ill trtt~:-r.rr.=ci-· --r""P.....+-+
Then after placing the potika over the pillar, the
uttara should be fitted such that the tenon of the pillar
projecting through the hole in the potika will be in its
mortice (avata).
•
Commentary
The tenon at the top of the pillar will project through th e
hole in the potika (fig.05.08). The uttara will have a
depression to which this projection will fit.
MINOR UTTARA
• •
Stanza- 37
31~tt:il veil viJoG~dl~i
: ~:cilfildGI'QCb9~: II
Then the uttara reaper (uttarapa{!ika) called minor
uttara (k~udrottara) with height equal to the height of uttara
and width equal to its half should be placed vertically on
the uttara with the outer portion flush with it and pegged
by suitable wooden pegs .
22()
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam
Commentary
The rafters are generally not placed directly over the
uttara but fixed to what are called minor uttara (k~udrouttara)
placed over the uttara. These minor uttaras will have depth
equal to depth of uttara, but their width will be half th e depth.
Wooden pegs, pegged in between the rafters are used to
fix these to the uttara (fig.0512). These pegs should have
thickness equal to 1/3 the height of the minor uttara and
width equal to 4 times its (pegs) thickness. The purpose of
the k?hudrottara is to support the roof frame when it is made
• and assembled on the ground as well as to facilitate the
~--................. I removal of roof frame without affecting the lower portions .
This enables one to dismantle the roof frame without
II removing the uttara. The masonry wall is held stable by the
uttara as a tie and it also serves to support the roof thus
giving stability to the structure below and above it.
Stanza- 38
ctlclJ(-\i ~sfq -=q GJ~'i~
~tf!~l q~> <_f~Ffi '«'ill~ qRCb~~~~~ , -:q <tJ•Hi
: : ~Cb<.>t(_fll~'i~~ll ~~I: II
These pegs should be placed along the centre lines of
kuta and centre of all house and doors. All of them (pegs)
should be fixed with a shift of one yava from the centre.
• After spacing the rafters generally by adjustment, the pegs
~I
should be placed centrally between them. The pegs are
'
prescribed to be in odd numbers and all the rafters are to
be in even numbers.
Commentary
This describes th e positi on of th e pegs . It is prescribed
th at th e pegs should be pl aced at vital points like th e ce ntre
22 1
 Nlanu~ya,laya<. andrikabha~·y anz
~ es of t e kuta, midli~ es J!
house a c~ - e r es o!: co rs.
- e pegS a "9 . 0 be OlaCeiJ ~en- a -
KUTA
..
- o eve he cen re line o~ e pag s o a s · ~e by RIDGE
_a ara in ya /a LJni s in he ~ ~~ · ise · ec-·o - ese COLLAR

r es. 1:. as been prescrioed • at - e e t a'•ers RAFTER L.UPA

e e en and t e numbe ::: e odd. KSUDROTTARA
• PIN
- ic ess o pegs rs .. /3 t e e ~ o~ ,.
UTTARA
,.-,,. .-,. is ~ t1mes ei r hickness .
EAVE
THE CEILING
Stanza- 39
~~!::iTrr.:::nt;~~~7T"D"Cl't;t ~ ~ l til t1 ~ '41 \J1 ;j msaI~Cf>
'
I
'fCt(t.Jhbh:ll Gl tt. ,ft ~>\Cflj4 ~i
FIG. 05.12 TYPICAL ROOF FRAME
~fffi~ gIG ila (9) fiJ d ttTil45 cl Cf,f ~ x,I ·~OI)t4l~~~ I'i I J
' '
..Mter fi t placing the l ajana l fijall aara of depth of A

ne or 3/ module o er the rtaara. the joi f ne module

depth and 3/4 module ' ·dth at-e pia ed r ~ -, ~· e til)·ak
"th the eros pieces ·a anti encr ac ine b.. eir half and
PRATI
e el at its top. the top should be l: l , .. ered ' i ut ere' ices
• • • • • • • • •
CEILING
-.,,. ro \ of planks of suitable thick KAPOTA

Commentary TULA

UTTARA VALABHI
· or u ara is placed O\ er the ai en there '
•
~e il i g. en ere i ~ ""e li .... . _ ailed
BHITTI A
ara are placed o~ er the a T en,
·~.. i em. j ists are pi a~ e j 'r e h of
- •
ara is "' d a . (i a an d a \ e . ~ ,t1 11 e ,t r
SECTION A A

a a.. ere aanda • •

i: th n e
FIG. 05.13 DETAILS OF CEILING
le1 era i en-ion 1t the i 1
on n e in g h e s e j ~ t~ ~ ,ith h I\ e J 1 r : . t1 e r
1 1

r jec ing into the earn t h It r t

fig.05.13). The t p i then le\ ellel1 r · , \ cr~
223
---
•
 Manusyalayacandrikabhasyam Manusyalayacandrikabhasyam
• •

--
TULAPADA (JOIIST END)

,. --~-- .
.. - -- -- - - ---
.,_.-.. -..... .----,.._·..-.- -----6-
1
/

•
~
I MUD /LIME 'PLASTER
I
L._._ - - - - - · - - - - __ .J... WITH ADMIXTURES
•

'' •
•
'' •

--- . •
•

'' ~

• 0 CORATED PLANK
•
2 COURSES OF BRICK
JOIST
'' ON EDGE IN LIME MORTAR
'' •
/
•
WALL -· SECONDARY JOISTS <JOISTS

FIG. 05.14 DECORATION OF

- -
TULAPADA
•

NAVAKHANDA
•
DECORATED WITH FLORAL-MOTIFS IN TEMPLES, DECORATION WILL
•

.at: WITH NAVAGRAHA FIGURES OF FIGURES OF LAKSMI OR OTHER DEITIES FIG. 05.16 MADRAS TERRACE FLOOR

•
COPING

•
•
.,._ _ PARAPET

STONE ·S AB ,,
•
SPOUT

KAPOTA
WALL /PILLAR _ ___,

•
FIG. 05.17 STONE'ROOF DETAILS
•

• •

FIG. 05.15 DECORATED CEILING

I
• •
225
224
•
-
•
 Manusyalayacandrikabhasyam
~
Manu ~yalayac andrikab hasy a1n
of suitable thickness without any crevices. Over this certain REFERENCES
leaves which resist termite attack (eg: Acanthus sp) are
spread and a small layer of soil is rammed to form a good 05.01 ><"NCf~«1'Hj 'ft•'hi TRlf 'ffif ~i·'1Gi qG~ I
' ' ' '
floor.
~cl1~'1~'(i;q~ lf'{lf '(i'{Cff4qdCb'{~ II
Stanza- 40 ' ' ' '
M.M.,XII-02

0 5. 0 2 31 ~tO I'1 {~ "T.f1'tf ~~:11 q tfl d SJlit \i1 i1 q I

•

: I
~~~~'{~tll'j~df'{~ -:q vft . d~Cf II
-:rr.::h. ~ ~ U\5· 4> c'1 Cb I~ f4 fi:l ?I ~ ?1- ' ' '
M.M.,XIII-01
,. .,.· +t ~ d tlll a I I
'
Or (it) can be done majestically with special treatment 05.03 q->ili~ll·d~~tOFI \il•~IIG Pl'{ 1~~
3 I
' ' '
of beams like kapota, valabhi, tuwpada, facing planks and GO.S crt '(if'{l:tGO.S crt ~Go.S crt f":31GOZ5Cb 'f! II
so on and also by kha1Jflaphalaka with beautiful paintings, ' M.M.,XIII-04
drawings, different figures and so on.
05.04 3t~tdl~\i1lJ(lll CIJ ttli d(ttl<:;~ll{ICbJt I
Commentary
~ SJRJ'+ts; x.ptS: -:q ~et'! II M.M.,XIII-05
In the case of buildings with ceilings, kapota is made
• ~··
with stone to throw away water (fig.05.13). The ends of the 05.05 \3~dl
joists are made to project outside in some cases especially
II
when they are protected by alinda. These projecting ends
are called tulapada. The space between the tulapadas are •
M.M., XIV- 9
covered with carved wooden elements called valabhi
(fig.05.14). The ceiling can also be decorated with carvings. 05.06
Motifs of lotus, Laksmi
•
etc. are carved in the cells between Sll\1>1~ ~rctJ;:r I
the joists and cross-pieces. The joists and the }ayantis are
decorated with vajana and the nodal points are carved with ~ix ccltfUI
'
floral motifs (fig.05.15). I1 M.M., XIV-38
There is no reference to flat roof construction in
05.07 >I ~ t) ci ";:f Cf> x\I al ~i ~ C1 ~ cj : I
Manu~yalayacandrika probably because flat roof is an ' '
adaptation of the floor construction, as typically seen in the GIXI'{~ <ffi SJRii.9ci '{i·'IG 61~ Tl 4("ltcl~ I
•
' ' ' '
Madras Terrace roof. (fig.05.16). In the stone roofs of 41G~·Q'"I~tdl;:j t)c:;4)li ll~l~d¥0f 11
temples, the tula (joists) are seen replaced by stone slabs , '
M.M., XIV-44
simplifying the construction (fig.05.17) .
227
226
 Manu. yiilayac andrikab ha~yam
•

05.08 30Jfclt)~WOf ~ Gl~ ""1" Cf>Gii.H I

· I.S. Kriya, XXXI, 1 01-1 02

0 5. 0 9 ~1 xct q) fa CJ> £11 ']"T':;::::T ~ I ~ I~> ~ ~ f4 fit f5t ttl I ELEMENTS OF ROOF ·
' '
•• •
M.M.,XV-28

M.M.,XV-17

05.11 \3tl~ f5tf4tj q1Gf4~=<11~ ddtt'"flGJf¥=f~ 1

' ' '
~qiGlG!f ~~'fl oQ f4~=t:ll~ qiG tt: x1¥iJf II
'
~ otil tl~ q?l~ .tf ~)q) tl~fllfcl ~m 1 •
r.
~+I I J i CIT ~+t I J ft '1 ~ xtf CIT Cb '( oI ~ xJ I¥i Jt II
' ' ' '
M.M., XVI-2,3
•

22R
 ManusyaJayacandrikabha$ya1n
•

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig.
Page
06.01 ELEMENTS OF ROOF FRAME WITH ARUDHOTTARA CHAPTER- 6
• 233
06.02 DETAILS AT EAVE
233 31"~ S~Ztlll :
06.03 ROOF SHOWING STRAIGHT AND INCLINED RAFTERS 238
06.04 ROOF SHOWING JACK RAFTERS
238
ELEMENTS OF ROOF
06.05 DETAILS AT RIDGE
241
06.06 PYRAMIDAL ROOFS
06.07
..
KUTA
241
•
244 RAISED UTTARA (ARDDHOTTARA)
06.08 AJAYUDDHSANDH/ AND ARDDHAPANISANDHI 244
06.09
- -
BALAKU!A
•
245 Stanza- 1
06.10 DIFFERENT SLOPES OF ROOF FOR TEMPLES .J;:;tt til 11 ~ CiU trl ft Cl 11 ~ RJ \q I~><~ 11 Qj d ~
(MANASARA) 247
06.11 DIFFERENT SLOPES FOR HOUSES (MANASARA) 248 I
06.12 LENGTH OF RAFTERS 249
~ ~:-nTI~rr;:;r,m~~;:r;:;:r: '{~I Gffit •4 (j "ffi!
06.13 WIDTH OF RAFTERS 253
06.14 MARKING REFERENCE LINE OF RAFTER 256 diCJd -;r.;:n~~~ q;o}tt~~ f4tibi1141C:t~RI: II
. '
06.15 METHOD FOR CUTIING RAFTERS WHEN
In small houses, only the outer (bahyottara) (is
SLOPE IS NOT 1:1 256
sufficient); in large houses the raised uttara (arudhottara)
06.16 ROOF FRAME WITH CENTRAL POSTS 258
06.17 HOUSE AS PURUSA 258 also occurs. That is to be done over the tie beam
•
(vi~kambha) with inward shift of 8, 16, 24 etc. al'zgula
•
(from outer uttara) and yonis etc. prescribed for that
house. Its rise is same as the shift. The length of the
(inclined) supporting strut of the beam is equal to its
diagonal.
Stanza- 2
-::t::"::::rr:::r.:n1t?T:~ : I
~? II
'
The supporting strut of the tie beam should be
•
decorated with different wave motifs and pictures of
kalpalata etc. and also with buds and flowers emerging
out of the large wavy patterns .
•
•

J3
- 1.
 •

Manu.syaJayacandrikabna~yam
Manusyalayacandrikiibha~yatn
•
Commentary •
•

The previous chapter (ch.5), ended with description of the -

KUTA
RIDGE ----.....- •
ceiling. This chapter deals with the inclined roof.
.,.__ RAFTER

If the span is small, only the wall plate (uttara) to give •

PIN - •

support at the bottom of the rafters is required for rigidity r

ARUDHOTTARA
~
-

VISKAMBHA
, (TIE)
and strength of the roof frame. The rafters connected by
the ridge at the top and fixed to the wall plate at bottom will
KSUDRO :4RA
form a rigid frame. Further, there will be collars between •
- UTTARA
•
~- VI$KAMBHAPADA (STRUT) -~
the rafters to tie the rafters against spreading and these
•

collars will be held rigidly by the continuous collar pins. In

addition to these, the eave reaper at the outer edge will add
rigidity and strength to the roof frame (see figure 05.12). ALINDA CENTRAL SPAN ALINDA

If the span is large, there will be an additional supporting

uttara in between the ridge and the wall plate. This uttara is FIG. 06.01 ELEMENTS OF ROOF FRAME WITH ARUQHOTHARA
called arudhottara. It is supported over tie beams
(vi~kambha) which are supported by vertical or inclined struts •

(vi§kambha pada) fig.06.01.

•

The horizontal distance between the wall plate and the •

EA
arDdhottara is called alinda. This distance should be an r-"2 ~
2 J 1
' ' .... ..
integer multiple of 8 angula. It is prescribed that the yoni ... .. ~
.... ...
and other characteristics of the perimeter measured outside KSUDROTTARA ...
•
•
0 . .. ..., EAV REAPER
....
arudhottara should be the same as that prescribed for the cr·,
perimeter of the house. This is ensured by the shift of WALL PLATE
arDdhottara by multiples of 8 angula from the wall plate. SECTIONS OF EAVE REAPER
This shift is called alinda. The alinda width should not be
greater than the span between arudhottaras (central span)
i.e. it should not be greater than the total span .
FIG. 06.02 DETAILS AT EAVE •

The inclined supports of the tie beams should be carved

with sinusoidal motifs with creepers and leaves and also •

flowers and buds. This prescription is to · highlight the

structural importance of the struts , requiring special
considerations of strength and size of the member.
•
•

232 233
 •
Man u.sya.layac andrikab ha~y a1n
In south Kerala, the arudhottara is taken as the most
important element for fixing the perimeter while in north
Kerala, importance is given to the wall plate.
EAVE PROJECTION
Stanza- 3
~T;:r:;::r;:ny:::r-::r;::rTs • a G~ ~ \ ~
f\111tl v4 ~l'!+tlfGid ~dllctl llai'S·Cf>
' by numbers 6 to 11 or by subtracting or in some places by
~ ~1jl
'
?lli~lttfl~ld ~ ctlf1lcl~d
'
The vertical drop of rafters from the lower level of
uttara (viz. lupalamba) should be done as desired,
according to the suitability of each, in 6 ways as
mentioned: by 2 parts when the height of pillar is divided
by 5 parts, by 4 parts when divided by 9, by three parts
when divided by 7 or 8 and similarly one third or even
half of pillar height.
Commentary
Deep projecting eaves are characteristic of Kerala
houses in Kerala and Konkan. This is to ward off the heavy
driving rain and the mid-day sun. The depth of the end of
the rafter from the lower level of the uttara (called eave-
drop) can be selected suitably from 6 proportions: 2/5, 4/9,
3/7, 3/8 1/3 or 1/2 of the height of the pillar. The smallest
value is 1/3. This means that not less than 1/3 the height of
pillar or wall is covered by the eave projection. (fig.06.02)
and this can go up to half the height.
In good designs, the perimeter measured outside the
eave also is considered important and is made with the
same yoni as that of the perimeter of the wall plate. This
means that the eave-projections shall be in multiples of 8A.
234
Stanza- 4
cl•cils"ti f4~<11G~'(~:q'(on oi)s~·11JR'6~1f·Z'it)-
,
~ affircllll f4~f%a1 ecl'il I
tiS I
cl• ~ s~ qq ~ Gf.4 ffi sTTM,;:rr.:::::r:~ms~-;:;nts~ I I
a:
The height of the pillar below this drop can be increased
sfilf4 : I or decreased by one part when (the pillar height) is divided
- •
adding 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 a11gulas from the prescribed height
II of the pillar. The lowering can be equal or unequal on the
two sides.
Commentary
In stanza.3, ratios have been mentioned for the lowering of
the eave. While doing this, if it is found that the height of the
pillar is too small or large, the height ?f pillar below the eave
level can be increased or decreased suitably by 1 ,2,3,4,~,6 o~ 7
angu/as. This change should, however, be in conformity w1th
p8.dam8.na, i.e. for larger valu~s of pad~mana, .larger ch~nges
can be allowed i.e it should be tn accordtnace w1th convenience
and also safety from driving rain.
Though it is desirable to have th~ same eave level _on _all
sides it can be different for the outs1de eave and the ms1de
(ank~na) eave if necessary. This rule is applicable for houses
with Central courtyard (madhycinkaQa). At the outs1de deep
projecting eaves are necessary to ward of driving rain and hot
sun. At the central courtyard there are buildings on all s1de,
I
hence eave projection can be smaller.
UTTARA, NOT TO BE BROKEN
Stanza- 5
:I
")~ "
- --
 Manu~yalayacandrikabfia~yam Manu~yaJayacandrikablla~yatn

II
The eave-drop can be done by 1, 1112, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7
times the width or the depth of uttara. When combining
with other houses, the rafters, eaves etc. can be broken. But
uttara is the most important part of all houses, hence the
uttaras should not be broken.
Commentary
When large eave projections are not required, for example,
when two houses are combined, the drop of the eave can be
made 1 to 7 times of the width or depth of uttara. When two
houses are to be combined, the rafters and the eaves can be
broken, but the uttara should be continuous and complete, since
uttara is the most important part and is the basis for deciding
the yoni which in turn decides the orientation as well as the
dimension of the building.
RULES FOR RAFTERS
Stanza- 6
?li~'"l ~.:q I{,ell I ~'1 ~ I : :I
\T.Jlt~~~~;r.:::;::r:;:::r,;:,.r,rn~:rr: I I
fixed on top of the minor uttara with their top fitted in the
I
ridge (vanzsa).
Commentary
The rafters are divided into two categories(1 ): the
straight (rju or prak{ta) ones also called common rafters and
the(2) slanting (vik[ta) ones.(fig.06.03). The slanting rafters
are again divided into koti (hip rafters) and upakoti or anukoti
(slanting rafters on the hip ends). The common _rafters are
called madhyalupas in Mayamata and have the1r top ends
fitted into the ridge and bottom ends into the minor (ksudra)
uttara fixed above the wall plate. The ko[i is the longest
slanting rafter and upako_tis are the shorter slanti~g. rafters
at the two shorter sides. All the slanting rafters f1t 1nto the
kuta at the top and the minor uttara at bottom. The nu~ber
of straight rafters should be same on both sides of the ndge.
The slanting rafters will be equal in number at both the
hipped ends also.
This may be compared to the modern pra?tice in which all
the rafters on the two ends are fixed on the hlp rafter and are
called jack rafters (fig.06.04).
RIDGE
Stanza- 8

Equal and straight rafters are straight rafters

:t-mrr::r;:;rn-nr;m-tl~rat
,..,. 4~ 11 c~ lll x11 !I~ 1
(fjuntancas). Unequal and slanting rafters are hip rafters ~~ .;rt.;:r:rrfTV'tmr~CfClrRl~"lf· ill~ CJ I I
JjCI<ct I
(kotis)
•
andalasi rafters (upakotis)
•
and are equally positioned
on the sides. ,
......-'...,...J\~·"ft'TT,..Rr~~~~ttn>T ~ ~i 61 G1 ~I I I
Stanza- 7 ~·ll
•

: ~i~t<tl: I
ra ters on e SI ' h
~ ~FcfchNI ~~~kll!ll: f1'<!1tll·~11~ II . h ·dth and length both equal to t ree-
The r1d e can ave WI
All slanting rafters should be made with the ends on
the kuta, and all the straight ones on the two sides should be
•
• 237
236 •

•
 -
Manu$yalayacandrikahha~yam
Man u.syalayacandrikab ha~·yatn
At the joints with the rafters, belts and fillets should be
HIP'RAFTER STRAIGHT RAFTER
f made with 3 or 4 times the rafter thickness.
Commentary

I VamSa literally means clan. The ridge is called vamsa

because all the rafters join there. The ridge piece is to be square
1
a:
w with its side equal to 3/4 h the width of uttara or equal 6 angula
w
~ I
t:< or 7 angula. At the joints with the rafters, groves should be
~
a:
,Q.
~
0 made in the ridge to fit the rafter end. The width of the groove
~
•
w
< z
-0
~
should be 1/3 or 1/4 the thickness of the rafters.(fig.06.05).
· ==
z
• - KUTA
Stanza- 9
•
tht17nln:rn"Trh1rr;tr;~hTcln:n::rrn:;:::rm~ Ict c :
·
•

PLAN
• sv--rtrhr.:;::r;;rurn~,~#;:n tT: c61 cl x=t ~- c61 ~a : 1
'
FIG. 06J03, ~OOF SHOWING STRAIGHT & INCLINED RAFTERS 3f Itil fl S~ ;:;roT'lTrl~trrrt~n d ~¥II Gtfl ~-
ci1 tt>)s~ II
• •
w The kU,ta should be such that the tenons of the hip
~ ~ rafters will fit the mortice in it sides and the ends of the
w
II rafters coming from the sides are fixed by iron nails. The
tenon at the top of the rafter is the support for the kuta.
•
II

-c
l) •
Hence, this is prescribed to be bottom down. In a square
~-~ house, all rafters are slanting (vikrta).
·a: I• '
w
t:< Commentary
a: a:
w
-%
Q.

,.. t The hip rafters and the other slanting rafters on the sides
• <
a: are fixed to the kuta (pendant or newel) which is fixed at the
•

~ , I
~
0
..,ct:
end of the ridge piece. The kuta will have mortices (randhra) to
I' accommodate the tenon of all the slanting rafters. This requires
•
STRAIGHT RAFTERS
provision of as many number of mortices as there are slanting
PLAN rafters. As this may cause difficulties, this practice is generally
FIG. 06.04 ROOF SHOWING JACK RAFTERS limited to temples and other important buildings. In unimportant
constructions, the slanting rafters (other than the hip rafters)
239
23R
 •

M anu~yalayacandrikab ha~yam Man u~yalayac andrikab hasy am

are fixed by nails. The kuta is such that when pushed down,
the joints will become stronger. Here the kuta is said to be ~ RIOG
"bottom down .. (adhomula) because it is supported on the RIDGE
ridge and the hips and hence is considered as hanging from
RAF,TER
them.

In buildings with square and circular plans, there will not

be any straight rafters. All rafters will be slanting and will be RAFTER~
..
fixed to the kufa at the centre.(fig.06.06).
Stanza- 10
FIG. 06. 05. DETAILS AT RIDGE

~n:;-;;:;::;;:m~r,:ns ~ CJ I~J Tl"t':~~n : ~:q 101 tlll Gtr : I

WALL PLATE
~~rronn;:r;:~~~ -;r cfims~
RAFTERS
S~ltl~ t~cil~q?lf4~~i· II~Zt~~ ~j) II
The kuta
•
is to be like the datura flower with 8 or 16 EAVE
corners or (is to be ) circular or (is to be) like full blown
lotus flower, with rounded shape below its middle. Its \..

length (height) is equal to twice the lateral dimension.

The length can be reduced by one part of 8 to 11 divisions
with its middle portion decorated with bands over 4 or •

moreyava.
WALL PLATE
Commentary •

RAFTER

This gives details of kuta in square or circular or regular •

EAVE -~1

polygonal plans. Ku.ta, the pendant to which the hip rafters

and the sloping rafters at the hipped ends are attached ,
should be made in the shape of inverted datura flower or
lotus flower. The bottom half should be rounded. In the
middle portion, decorative belts of width 4,5 yava or 6 yava FIG. 06.06 PYRAMIDAL ROOFS
can be made. The entire roof is made and assembled on
the ground and then dissembled and reassembled over the
walls. Dissembling can be done by lifting the kuta , upwards
by hammering.
24 1
24() •
 Manu ~yalayac andrikah ha§y arn
Stanza- 11
II
Kuta should mostly be done with circumference equal
to the sum of the thicknesses of all rafters or width equal to
that of the uttara and with (suitable) yo1ti etc. computed in
a1zgulas. The belt where the rafters are joined should have
length equal to the slanting width (vitanarekha) of hip
rafters. The shape etc. of the erect ku{a with decorations is
stated thus.
Commentary
This also gives the details of the ku.ta of houses of square
or circular or regular polygonal plans where there are no straight
or common rafters. The circumference of the kU.ta is equal to
the sum of the thickness of all rafters. The width may also be
equal to the width of the uttara. In any case, the circumference
shall be in suitable yoni calculated on the basis of angulas, i.e.
the circumference should be taken in angulas, and divided by
eight to give the balance as yoni number. The belt of the kuta
where the rafters are jointed should have width equal to the
sloping width (vitanarekha) of the hip rafters (fig.06.07).
JOINING RAFTERS IN RECTANGULAR HOUSES
Stanza- 12
ci~liihiFfCliGI: I
,-r,r:t: r:;::rrrr : ct>9 fc1 d I ttl t1 : : II
In rectangular houses, the slanting rafters are to go into
the kfl.ta connected to the ridge. The other common rafters
•
are to be fixed with iron nails with their tops at the ridge.
242
Commentary
For rectangular houses, there will be common (straight)
rafters as well as slanting rafters. The slanting rafters are to be
connected to the kuta which is fixed to the ridge. The common
rafters are to be fixed to the ridge and nailed down. But in good
constructions, the nails are not used. The rafters are connected
firmly to the ridge by tongue and groove joint.
CONNECTING KLiTA TO RIDGE
•
Stanza -13
cgcqr~-
""l'::: : I
-
~=lit tit 1Id +f c:r 1ft -rr;:r"ttr';;lrrtrr f:t \t1 ~ II
'
The connection of the tenons at the top and bottom
ends of the ridge to the groove in the ide of the kuta is
through ajayttddha joint. By the joint of support and
supported (adharabheda), here also the bottom of thekuta
is below.
Commentary
The kuta is supported on the ridge. The tenons at the top
and bottom of the ridge-piece (i.e. two end of the ridge) are
fitted into the mortices on the sides of the l<utas. The ridge is
the support (adhara) and the Kuta is that which is supported
(adheya). The joint is called ajayuddhasandhi (goat-fight joint)
(fig.06.09). Since the Ruta is supported on the ridge, its major
•
portion will be below the ridge. The ku_ta should be made with
the timber kept in the natural position i.e. bottom portion below
and top portion above. The final sabha roof form was clearly
evolved from the simple sa/a roof as given in stanza 14.
243
 i\1auu~yiilayac andrikiih ha~ y a1n

J\1anu :'"Yiilayac; andriklib ha~'y atn

...-- K~LA FACIA BOARD

HIPPED END RIDGE GABLE END

NALA •
RAFTER
•

KUMBHA
BALAKUTA
•

PADMA

ODD RIDGE
-
KUTA
-
KUTA
•
•

KUTA FOR SABHA ROOF

KUTA FOR PYRAMID ROOF •

0 0

FIG. 06 . .07 KUTA

ll

1 r
I I
I !
.......' • I .
I_,I
~
- TYPE 1 TYPE2
r-'
•

'J

ARDHAPANI$ANDHI TWO WAYS OF ATTACHING BALAKUTA

AJA YUDDHASANDHI • •

FIG. 06.08 AJAYUDDHSANDHI & ARDDHAPANISANDHI

•

BALAKUTA AT EAVE

- -
FIG. 06 ..09 BALAKUTA

245
•
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam
Manufyalayacandrikiiblta~yam
Stanza -14 thrid balakuta is fixed in the middle of the ridge. Since these
•
Cl~l: I are supported by the ridges they are send to be bottom up
' (urdhvamD/a) ·

For buildings with gables, the ridge will be extended to COMMON RAFTERS
the end of the gables. The procedure for joints at the top Stanza -16
and bottom ends of the wall plates (uttarantuldgrayoga) of
the gables is the same as that for the houses (gehavat eva). •Hcf~teJC!fltiP~ Rf4tttr: Cf>f{ZqdJ?I m I
Commentary
m~ c:p)fe: ~ta ct>)ottfl~~
: 1
'
Everywhere in the desired rectangle, that line drawn
In gabled roof, the ridge will be extended up to the end of as horizontal (tiryak) is the base (bhuja). Then, the line from
the gable. The rafters are joined to the wall plates at the two top to bottom is the vertical (ko.ti) and that which goes
sides at the bottom and the ridge at the top as explained earlier through the corner is the diagonal (karrza ).
is stanza 12. The ridge piece may be extended beyond the
wall to protect the wall from rain and sun and the gable fixed at Commentary
•
the ends of the ridge piece. The gables are generally given
The length of the rafters is calculated by drawing a right-
decorations.
angled triangle on a flat plank (called pramanaphalaka) usually
Stanza -15 •
to a scale of 1:8 to represent one half of the roof frame. The
base of the triangle (bhuja) is half span and the altitude of the
triangle represents the rise of roof above the level of the wall
plate. The hypotenuse (karna) will therefore represent the
~·~~~~~~~·~~~. straight rafter. Texts generally describe a slope of 1:1 for the
•
roof, but other slopes like 8: 9, 7:8, 6:7, 5:6, 4:5, 3:4, 2:3 and
.~~~::r3T:~7 : II 1:2 are also used (fig.06.10 and 06.11).(Ref.06.01)
Kuta
•
should be fixed by hammering wooden nails at
8 kama
•
the top and bottom (2 ends) of the ridge which is connected 7 6 5
koti
•
in its grooves at the bottom. Because this (ku{a) is supported • 9 8 7 6
Bhuja
on the ridge, it is bottom upwards (urdhvat1tiila111 ). Balakuta
Ambara Viyat Jyotis Gagan a
also is supported on the top member as the ku~ta.
Commentary 4 3 2 1
•
5 4 3 2
This describes the additional kOta called balakuta fixed
• • Vihayas Ananata Antariksa Puskala
•
near the original Kutas. The balakD.ta is a small kuta which is •

fixed in houses with rectangular plans to the ridge mainly as FIG.06.1 0 NAMES OF ROOF SLOPES FOR TEMPLES
an ornament, one at each end (fig.06.09). In some cases, a
247
246
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam Manu~ya.layacandrikabhafyatn

Stanza -18
ft'5·{.,cll:IJ: cnt~ran~~Tt?~~-r::ri· ~ ·
~.I c141 ~I "ffif-
'
II
: Cbt'' ., II=<~ "if Thus deciding the spacing of the slanting rafters, mark their
positions on theuttara line. Then the diagenal measurement from
the selected drop of the rafters (1ziscitalupaJamba) to the side of
O~Cbl ~!~OIX~H1PfCJ>es . f41ittfl lfa': II the kuta directed through the marked location of each (rafter),
Then, subtracting 1 from twice the number of slanting forms the length of each rafter.
rafters like ko.ti and upako.ti, these numbers (the numbers Commentary
obtained as balance) are to be considered everywhere (as
In fig.06.12, the position of the inclined rafters in the wall
the number of spacings). Then 2 parts between each of the
plate are marked as 8 1 , 8 2 , 8 3 , 8 4 • From D, the position of kuta,
slanting rafters like kofi, upako_ti etc. separately and one draw lines passing through 81' 8 2 , 8 3 and 8 4 and terminating in
(part) at the centre of the width of house, thus the division the horizontal line 4-4 at E1 , E2 , E3 and E4 • DE 1 , DE 2 ••••• etc.
is accepted. · will give the lengths of the upako.fis.
Commentary
•
Stanza- 20
• • •
~~~~~~~~~ ~ql~l ~
The triangle ABO of figure 06.12 represents one half of
the roof frame. AB is half the span. It is universally accepted r:r;::!~~~rrrn~.']T:::r;::r.J,'I'Ttt'-::rtt~· ct If·4 d ii I
'
that the number of rafters should be even so that there will not
be any rafter at the centre line. (This is to avoid sUtravedha).
· 'iiht'HH~ills~~~~dJ~&i T.T md 1ff:
Therefore, the number of rafters along the half-span AB will
be half the total number on that end. The spacing between
In all houses, the width of straight rafters and inclined
. the rafters will hence be 2 times AB divided by twice the number
rafters can be equal to the width of the wall plate, or one
of rafters in half span minus 1. For example, if there are 5
part less or more when the width of wall plate is divided
rafters (including the kot1) in half spanJ the spacing will be
2AB/9. This S!oka says that the spacing will be twice the half
into 8, 7, 6, 5, 4 or 3 parts, or 2, 1314, 11/2 times of the width
pan divided by 2r-1 where r is the number of rafters (including of wall plate. Its thickness can be made from 1 angula to 6
kot1) in half pan·. In the centre, the distance of the rafter from a1zgula with increments of 1 yava.
u~,e' c ~ntr lint~ will be tlalf of this. This spacing is to have
Commentary
cJirn ~nsion < f 18 or 2,2A to ti fy the pada~ oni rule.
st~•t•z,• -1 The width and thickness to be adopted for the straight
rafters are given in this stanza. The width can be 2/3, 3/4,
4/5' 5/6' 6/7' 7/8' 1 ' 11 /8, 11 /7' 11 /6' 11 /5, 11 /4' 11 /3, 11 /2'
13/4 or 2 times the width of the wall plate. The thickness can

251
J i ()
 Man u~yalayac andrikiib hasy arn
• Manu~yalayacandrikabh11.$yam
be made from 1 angula to 6 angula in increments of 1 yava.
of the square, DB will give the width of the hip rafter (kot1)
(Ref.06.05). Some texts use the word dalav[dhya instead
(Ref.05.06). Assuming that the base of the square is half-
of yavavrdhya. This means that the increment should be in
span, mark points indicative of the positions of the slanting
terms of angula and not yava. The minimum thickness is
rafters described earlier in stanza 18.
1112 angula according to this text. I

D ~-------.

The width and thickness will depend on the span, the

quality of wood used and the type of roofing materials. The
fact that a wide choice is given for the depth and thickness
A8 =AD= Width of
shows that the actual values are to be decided at site Straight rafters
according to these factors. As the width of uttara is specified
as 1/16 of the width of the room, this is also the minimum
depth of rafter.
FIG.06.13
A..___~_.._ _ _.___ 8
Stanza- 21 WIDTH OF RAFTERS
81 82 83
3r61J3t Jt -=>-i.1 Cb '(=tl Md fa f'1 d Jt ~ I Cf> c-Cill d, Cb oi Jt Uf - Then draw diagonals through these points 8 1 ,8 2 ,8 3 ,8 4
'
•ll =<:it c;_ ~GIIlll 'i~ -~~r,:r (fig.06.15) to D. Then DB, 08 2 , 08 3 , will be the widths of
~r:::::::~:-rri-nn'TTT'i' -:ur;:::r .._,; ~ ~rrrr::rt· -........ +- ~..... ~"'~--
the slanting rafters, from the centre to the hip.
"~ -: '(=lf ld
The pitch line (dhwajasutra) , which is the reference tine
"tll~ A:"T'rt. \:CI \if I ~ ?Ill 'I~ TJ f4 d I;:j TJ &I I~ Tf ~u I I
to be drawn on the rafter for making the cuts and joints and
Drawing a square (with sides) equal to the width of also the base and perpendicular lines to be drawn on the
the straight rafter, its diagonal is the width of the hip rafter are explained in the succeeding stanzas viz . stanzas
rafter (koti). On the base (of the square), the points 22,23 and 24.
corresponding to the number of slanting rafters are to DRAWING THE REFERENCE LINE ON RAFTER
be marked. The projection of each on the diagonal
Stanza- 22
through these points will be the width of the slanting
• ~s~·Cf>i~t·t~tils <41onf:tta ct>~~\c:tl
rafters separately. The flag line (dhwajasutra) and the
•
horizontal and vertical (lines), should also be marked. x=t +I •' II t1 I
'
Commentary
'
tt&l CiJJDJi~JdS c:;ffifVi)Ji ilJt~ltt-«11~ II
•
The width of the common rafters (straight rafters) on I \

the two sides of the ridge is decided first on the basis of the The line called flag line (dhvjasiitra ) has to be drawn
conditions mentioned earlier. Then draw a square with its on both sides of th~ rafter in the middle after dividing
sides equal to the width of the straight rafter. The diagonal the width into 9 parts and leaving 4 parts at top and 5
253
252 •
 Manu§yalayacandrikabha~yam
parts below. Alternatively, it is to be made dividing into 7
parts and leaving 3 parts below and 4 parts above or dividing
into 5 and leaving 2 parts above and 3 parts below.
Commentary
The cuts for seating the rafter on the wall plate and
holes for the collar pin etc. are made with reference to a
longitudinal line drawn on both sides of the rafter. This line
is called flag line ( dhvajasutram) or pitch line. Ttl is is drawn
at five-ninth, four-seventh or three-fifth distance from the
top cut of the rafter such that it will always be below the
longitudinal centre line of the rafter (fig.06.16).
Stanza- 23
~T7T:'C:~;n:n-:t::r q; ~ il d =<:r?l 'i
' ·~ '
._Fr::::rr.;:ron: . d t I ~ '<' II ~ Jf I ~ ~ lf Jt : =<=lfl d I I
'
On both sides (top and bottom) of the pitch line, lines
have to be drawn at a distance of2angula (from the pitch
line). The measure of width of each has to taken below
and top of these.
Stanza- 24
ip\CII
-:::r;t"GT'3fl(fltCboi~all~~ f4al;:i ~ cl•4 TJ f4cald 1
' ..
:flci~G<t f4itlJ Gll'ffil ctclli~HCJ?Cictl'fll"'f­
\T.Sn~ ~'1":7r.:::r;JT2Tt1nrt: ~............ ;ft ~ c;t I ~ I· (I ct1 sfq I I
c corner touches the line AB. In that position, m.ark on the
Drawing a square of side 4 atzgulas on both sides of
~
all rafters with reference to the pitch lines, the two
diagonals of the square are to be known as horizontal
(vitailant) and vertical (lantba1n) lines. These two have to
be drawn everywhere at the positions of collar pins, at
the joint with ~he kuta, at the seating over wall plate etc.
254
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~ya1n
and at end of eave drop.
Commentary (Stanza 23 and 24)
In the roof frame, the rafters are kept inclined. To mark
the holes for pins and notches for seatings on uttara etc.,
the horizontal and vertical lines (vitanarekha and lamba-
rekha) have to be marked on the rafters. For this, lines
parallel to the pitch line are drawn on both sides of the pitch
line on both faces of the rafters. These are generally drawn
at a distance of 2 angula from the pitch line. Then squares
of 4 angula sides are drawn with these two lines as
boundaries at required places like positions of pins, joints
with kuta,, seating on uttara, eave end etc. The two diagonals
of the square will give the hofizontals and vertical lines.
(fig.06.14). The top end (ridge end) of the rafter is cut parallel
I to the vertical line. The top and bottom sides of the pin holes
and top of seating on uttara and the seat bird's beak at the
lower end are all parallel to the horizontals.
This procedure of taking the diagonals of the square
as vertical and horizontal lines is true only when the rise is
half the span. For lesser slopes, this rule will not apply. In
such cases, the procedure followed is as follows:
\
Draw the triangle ABO as in figure 06.12 to scale with
AB representing bhuja, AD representing koti and DB
representing the length of rafter. Take a rectangular woo~en
plank of width equal to the upper part of the rafter (p?rt1on
with the line DB (fig.06.15a). Slide it alan? .os till the bottom
Then mark on the pitch line of the actual rafter, the pomts
where the holes and notches have to be made. These are
the rafter and bottom edge in line With the pltC me a
255
 •

Manu.:~;yalayacandriklihhli~yaJn
Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y atn

•
move it along the pitch line till the edge E conincides with
one of the i?.fabindus I (fig.06.15c). In this position, transfer
•
the point F to the top edge of the rafter. The line joining 1F
S!a VfRTICAL LINE will be the vitanarekha. The lambarekha is drawn perpen-
.
dicular to this .
•
4ASQUAR •

FLAG LINE (PITCH LI~E) . ALPAMANDIRAVIDHI

Stanza- 25
~ err qq~Gc)ti'tf:~~fc)tft d?ll~ - : ~~~at

•
sftr -:q 1
• ' I
HQLE FOR PINS ..., ,....,.
<;ll\ilrl err qq tCQ~ ~t11J'5·Cf>~ tf-
, ~ ' '
-:::rt'TT$t.Tl ~:q I !I til ~ I ~ oI : I I
..
NOTCH FOR UrTARA ... -__..;;
•
In small houses, culi (can be used) in some places. Even
• •
BIRO'S BEAK t , ~ ...._ ._....._ in such cases, the cross beams (vi$kambhas) are prescribed
to be in even numbers. The ridge (is to be placed) on top of
FIG. ·06.14 MARKING REFERENCE LINE OF RAFTER ,
•
the central post at its (that of cross beam) centre. From the
D length of the post, one part out of 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11 parts can
be reduced in some place. Here the rafters with their ridge
WQ~qEN PLANK KAR!fA
are to be fixed over the culi.
•

A ----- ~--...::: Commentary •

BHUJA ..
For small houses, ie. houses with small span, the wall
0
PITCH LINE plates are placed as culis (bressumer) with the depth more
/
VERTICAL LINE than the width. In such cases, the minor uttara (k$udrouttara)
RAFTER~
HORIZONTAL LINE
/
is not necessary. The rafters are placed directly on the culis
(fig.06.18). Cross beams (vi~kambhas) are provided
•
between the culis in even numbers 2 ,4 etc .. At the centre of
the vi~kambhas, centre posts are provided to support the
•
0 .' , ridge. The height of the posts may be half span (45° slope).
•
The height can be less than this slope if desired .

1n buildings with large span and in all important

buildings , the roof-frame will be as described in the earlier
stanzas. The ridge, arDdhottara, wall plate , eave reaper,
257
256
 • Manusyalayacandrikabna~yam

rafters, collars and pins give rigidity and strength to the frame.
In buildings of small span, 8rUdhottara is not necessary. Minor
I
uttara for fixing the rafters is also avoided. In such cases, tie
beams at the level of the uttara and vertical posts supported
•

.
RIDGE on these tie beams give sufficient strength and rigidity to the
I
•

CENTRAL STRUT roof.

RAFTER EAVE REAPER

•
UTTARA WITH VAJANA
•

•
FIG .. 06.16 ROOF FRAME WITH CENTRAL POSTS ..
The width ·of the eave reaper (nivraphalaka) is to be
---
.. - ---- - made by 6, 7 8, 9 or 10 parts when the width of uttara is
----- --__ _,_- --
--~--- --ST0Pi (TUFT)-------------- - - .
divided by 10 or by reducing one part out of 4 parts of the
---
.
------- ..... . . . -..
width of uttara or by 3 parts when divided by 7. The
thickness is 1/3 of this. The thickness can be made by 2
• (parts) when the width is divided by 7 .
Stanza- 27

- 41st&Hxl ~l'{i~l·~ m;f -:q

~....................... ttec! =tNiiJtfCt fctilli ~ t:tf~'+f ih I
•

~ • PADA (LIMBS)
' '
ID~ ct~iqec! f3tf~NfCt 'f~IG'Cl:
-
•

,
-:q m;f qeei\4>-
'
~ err ~PI'+frl> Gitcrt~PPP'f1}\Ri~ld: CbC'4~~1: II
-- -- - . When the width of eave reaper is divided by 5, the top
v v - - -
ADHISTHANA
- -- -- belt is to be done with 2 (parts), then with 2 parts the groove,
• • and by one (part) the last belt. Similarly when divided by 6,
---r~======~~~~
(KNEE)

_...... - --- - --- --- its top belt is to be by 2 (parts), groove by three (parts) and
_ - UPAPfTHA (FEEn by one (part) the lower belt. Likewise when divided by 8,
•

they should be designed by 3, 4 and 1 parts .

FIG. 06.17 HOUSE AS PURUSA
•
259
258
 Man u~yalayac andrikab ha~y am
Manufya.layacandrikabna~yatn
Cornrnentary a

Stanza- 28
Stanzas 26 and 27 give the details of the eave reaper
;fl~cJtt~ f4+tj), ~~\(~~.-:t<:~f4: x=tcidt 'JffJi
The eave reaper connecting the lower ends of all the rafter~
adds rigidity to the roof frame. In the roof frame, the collars ...............~1~1~ · q;)fect>olitcl~l?ll
prev~nt lateral t~isting of the rafters. The collar pins not only '
;tl(C(J . cjq l'{j fClll~~ fc)ftt;=wt .
provrde connectron between the rafters and the collars but also
prevent b~ckling and bending of the ratters. The eave reapers
prevent_drsplacement and torsion of the free and of the ratters. When the width of the eave reaper is divided into 5,7
The entrre root tram~ is made at the ground and erected part or 9 parts, 3 parts should be the transverse shift of the
~Y. part. Eave reaper rs the last element to be jointed. Therefore corner above the pitch line everywhere and then the eave
frxrng the eave reaper is considered to be an important tunctio~ reaper should be fixed on the rafter so as to accommodate
and, ~houl_d be accompanied by rituals like V8yavya hom a as the eave-board.
explatned 1n the next stanza.
Commentary
The width of the eave reaper is prescribed to be 3/7, 6/1 o,
Apart from the structural function explained in the previous
about 43 Yo to 100% of the width of wall plate. stanza, the eave reaper has another use. It helps to give an
upward tilt to the roof covering at the tip such that the water
. The thickness is 1/3 or 215 of its width, the larger ratio draining from the roof is thrown off preventing the water dripping
berng used when the width is small.
along the edge (see fig.06.03). This practice may have its origin
. The cross-section of a typical eave reaper is given in from the time when tiles were used for the roof covering because
fr.g.06:03. The proportions recommended for a b and c are it prevented the end tile from sliding. The eave board serv~s
gtven 1n table 06.01. ' as a protection to the rafter-ends and is to be fixed flush wtth
TABLE 06.01 eave-reaper vertically.
Type a b c As indicated earlier, it is prescribed that vayavya homa
1 should be done at the time of fixing the eave-reaper. This shows
2/Sw 2/Sw 4/Sw the important of the eave-reaper as a major element of the
2 2/6w 3/6w 1/6w •
roof frame. Moreover fixing of the eave reaper marks the end
3 3/Bw 4/Bw of the work of erection of the roof-frame.
1/Bw
The lower belt c is avoided in certain cases. Then a =3/5 The artisans who are engaged in the work should be given
W, b=2/5w, C=O. food, cloth etc. to please them. The text Vastuvidya prescribes
that the eave reaper should be washed with pure water, coconut
water, milk and pancagavya (the five items received from the
outsrde e~ge ~f the eave reaper should be in yoni prescribed cow, viz. milk, buttermilk, ghee, urine and dung). (Ref.06.07).
for the orrentatron of the building.
26() , 26 1
 Manu •syala.yacandrik-ablza~y
- ll .11L
COLLAR P·IN There the width of reaper is d ·b
thickness by 9 yava Th 17
II_Ia e Y yava and i'-.J
tanza- 29 •
. . · ·e gap as three.f I . •

JfjltCliHj'(~ ~cJl~fjc"i O?r tj ~- •

per y naal· .
& ?21~-:Jcll•\i st>itDJI '
Commentary

· cre1q~fd = t:tR?cttt ~fltd a T~is gives the dimensions of the reapers Th e w·

'
II · va . 75cm an d

The collar pin has been seen by the sages in 6 ways, • . · cause tn ear"er
from 14 yava square to 3 a1zgula in increments of 2 yava.
Among these, it should be made to suit the rafter prescribed
the reapers IS to be 35cm equaivalent to 131 .25 yava .
here.
Stanza- 31
Commentary
cit t(! '( I'iU l'lh) :i1 G~ cl Pf {fftl:;) q fee COl~ '«1 X: '(~ 1(1
The collar pins (liernes) fix the collars to the rafters. ' '
ad~ I~ ~~~fit cotmsfq 1:f tt'iq;ctcot~-w~ ~<tict))C't : 1
They are of square section inorder to prevent buckling of
the rafters. Their size will depend on the width of the rafter. cilECJtll'(lll f"&>f;:qq_ d&ilift'l J 'a•'CtlXUII~
The side of the square pin varies from 14 yava (5.25cm) to at!lXJ'iUIEhi (_! d{'NiFH \I
3 angula (9.00cm) in increments of 2 yava (0.75cm). The
recommended widths are, therefore, 5.25cm, 6cm, 6.75cm, In all buildings that are covered by tiles, there should
7.5cm, 8.25cm and 9cm. be rows of reapers. In some situations, thick planks fixed
by nails also are to be fixed and a groove for the lip of the
The holes for the pins are made on the rafter below tiles also (is to be made) to fit the nib (of the tile). If
what is known as the pitch line (dhvajarekha). The pitch line temples etc. are covered by copper plates, this groove need
is drawn longitudinally on the flat side of the rafter a little •
not be made .
below the centre line. Usually 5/9 part of the width is kept •

above and 4/9 part below the centre (fig.06.16). Commentary

•
•

If the roof is covered by tiles , the spacing of the reapers

REAPER
should be according to the length of the tiles. Instead of the
Stanza- 30 reapers fixed with gaps in between them, the entire roof surface
Q?l ffl?IC::~I~~~: '{'jdl qf&cpJfcld~'(;scoXl~il~ : I is sometimes covered by thick planks fixed to the rafters by
' ' nails. If the roof is covered by tiles, grooves should be made in
a<;_ 1:l ;:j Ef;!f 4~'1¥01 •<1 ~ ff ·C:: ~ <j4 l'q c5t C'l~ : II the planks to accommodate the nibs of the tiles as otherwise,
the tiles will slip. The depth of the groove need only be sufficient
•

262 263
 Man u~yalayacandrikab ha~yam
to accommodate the nib. In important structures like the
5u<:Jt, M brus~ ~, GOliM f~, YeA.ftY ~t~. oft~ roof He,;ta, tt &; m,or~
garbhagrha of temples, copper sheet is used as roof covering tJ.f1WOf YUU(!.; to · ~~ er 6 wiUdv MAuib~ & otker ~t; of tM
to give full protection from pouring rains. In such cases, of roof. swertU- ed.dorsjoUourthM malwd. HtH.A:h, it u foUowed ~ thu book a.Uo]
course, the grooves are not required as the copper sheets are
directly fixed over the planks. REFERENCES
Covering the entire roof surface by planks is like providing
a ceiling below the roof covering. This gives security also. But 06.01 ~ CIJ-=ti ~UjttiOii ":q' (j4'il4 li~ISh'i'!_ I
when tiles slip or break and causes leak, it is very difficult to ~~~ i1Cl1li f4ll\l1 \Tltl~~ 1111;:j "!ij f4~ttl~ II
VI ' '
detect the faulty tiles and effect replacement.
3t-=t·d i:U·d~IS -:q \f<bt'i =rutem = 1
Stanza- 32
~ctl~i ~~~~&; . :"
:s:t~~l'hCf~I"'Pjch . '{=ltlq I '
¥OJ ~ \:11 ~ I Cb I~~ eft ,.. :i+-1-w+ :q) t eft C1 '{j·£N I I
~........~......,., ........................ d~~'ll'!'fl~~·li~~IC: tFf T.T II '
' ' ~~..... ttt-;:ht ;'hl'nf;::Dlri qy-::;nt "
The turban of the man called the house is mentioned
M.S.,XVIII - 86,87,88
as apidha1ta. It should be face down. Its width is half or
three-fourth of the height of basement and thickness is the 06.02 Gfif%q:}J 'i.f f4ttk1Cl1l ~~~~~t:m I
thickness of paduka (adyamla).

Commentary ' .
~ .......~r"r [4'(,11~ q~:qj~j g~l'"fi~Cfl! I
In Vastuvidya, the house is considered as a human being
(puru§a) (fig.06.17). The roof is considered as the head and • •

the ridge as the top of the head. The ridge is covered by a .........-~rivr-;r 4 •t1 Ct G I
plank called apidhanaspecially when the roof covering is done ~~,rfa;:n~ ~t(gx1ettt n
~Cctl~i~i ~ ~
with copper plates. Being the last wooden member of the roof,
~~· 'flllti" ~ $hC1'!_ I
it is also called the last plank (avasana phalaka). This plank is
compared to the turban. The width of apidhana is three-fourth
or half the height of the basement. Its thickness is equal to the
thickness of the paduka, the bottom course of basement.
__..~~:t+.:l~';:f ~~ ~ x=t ~I ~d 1: II
.....
In ordinary constructions and in constructions where ridge '
'
tiles are provided at the top, this apidhana is not generally
provided. ' ~~·mrtv:c;rrd II
----------------~--~--~---------

[Not(!.;: St~ZA.£ 25 to 32 · ~ tltU er a.,.r(!,; s~ 3iv-eH, PJS stoW 1 to 8 .....

d ..... ~"''""''ll-:::rEI"I~nirr:t<l::r.e~~91111'l
( .....
c~utptu 7 ~ tM rext edceed by {j~UUJ.f'IU& fMtr?. ThM(!,; stous duGYW£!,; t~ duds M.M.,XVIII, 7 - 12
•

265
264
 Manu~'\yaJayacandrikabha~yanz

tCI J I i . lJ ICl f4 ~ lll1 d i f&t ~ d I

'
: Cf>~OIJtct . ci~ll~~l·<l~l~~tl II
' ' ANCILLARY STRUCTURES
V.V.,XI-03
•
•
. . . -.
ct \I q 'I""'"I~G:-b-~-'<i....-Gt.....l-d d \ I• II~ Ill d ~: II '

M.M., XVIII, 23 - 29

• • •
06.05 ~ii~Cfilljcl ...... +l-1~~
'<i.....
•
• .J t jUJ zrrt

V.V.,X.03
•

06.06 : I
r.;ror.:rrll"t"tlrn::;;:;rrrt-;:r II
d~"ll Cb'!tiiJ~~i at~ CJ>)cill~'ii stcfilfittd 1
' '
V.V.,1 0-04

06.07 '<i~~lfUI !'lqf2cCbt: I

'
00 '11~41\!)c:&;~ -:q I
.-.
tBl~o1 -:q ~ qi<:CII
3flfflul q->:q J 1~&)'1
'
V.V.,XII-7

. --------------------------------------
266
•

Manu~yalayacandrikablfa~yam

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig. Page·
CHAPTER-7
07.01 LOCATION OF DOORS 270 , 3T~ SV~Ill:
•

07.02 DETAILS OF DOORS 272

07.03 LATCHING DEVICES 277 DESIGN OF ANCILLARY STRUCTURES
07.04 ACCESS THROUGH CORRIDORS 284
07.05 LOCATION OF GATEWAYS 287
07.06 EFFECTS OF GATEWAYS 287
07.07 ONE-STORIED & TWO-STORIEDGATEWAYS 288
POSITION AND DETAILS OF DOORS •
•

07.08 INCLINED PALISADES 288 Stanza- 1

07.09 GROUND COVERAGE & VERTICAL PROPORTIONS 293
07.10 USES OF MAIN HALLS (MAYAMATA) . 297
: I
07.11 LOCATION OF ANCILLARY FACILITIES 297
07.12 LOCATION OF KITCHEN •
303
07.13 LOCATION OF WELL & TANK 303

Doors should be placed below in east etc. with the

centres located midway between the centre lines of courtyard
..
and houses and with income, age and yoni computed in
angula. The two door posts with vfijanas (should have) width
equal to width ofuttara and thickness equal to or 3/4,2/3 or
•
1/2 of (their) width with sill and head .
Stanza- 2 ,
.....................---........~~.....~'~...............~~...._.~ : ............. ~-

' ' {4~41 I

'f4tetlll'f1~ ~ t4aRt: tt~J<t cull

The sill should have thickness of one-fourth or one-third
part more -than the ~ickness of posts and no vajan!J. The
• top beam should be similar to the posts. The posts s~o~d
be made with their tops reaching the uttara. The mside
269
 Man u~yalayacandrikab ha$yam
Manu~·yalayacandrikabha~·yaJn
perimeter of the frame should have yoni suitable for the should be more than the expenditure (vyaya) . The age should
direction and excess income etc. The width (is to be obtained) not be in the range of death (maraQaparyanta) . The other
from the semi-perimeter by its i~{adirgha or gul}limsa. astrological factors like star, phase of the moon also should
be auspicious. Table 07.01 gives some measurements that
Commentary can be used for the doors.
The doors described here are the doors for entering TABLE 07.01
the sa/as from the courtyard. It has already been described DIMENSIONS OF DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
that the centre lines of the main sa/a should be shifted from
the centre-lines of the courtyard in the clockwise direction Inside dimensions
to avoid vedha (affliction). The doors should be located such Description Height Width
that the centre of the door opening should be at the centre H-A em H-A em
of the shift (gamana) of the centre line of the house from i) Doors
the centre line of the anka(la (fig.07.01) (Ref.07.01). 2 -16 192 1 -4 84
Main door
Mayamata also says that the door at the centre line of the
do 2 -14 186 1 -6 90
house is suitable in temples, palaces and the houses of
Sub door 2 -10 174 1 -2 78
brahmanas.
•
For all others it should be to one side of the
central axis (Ref.07.02). The doors should face the ankarya. i i) Windows
,
N Large 1 -16 120 2 -4 156
0 .•
r-- ... N - NORTH _ :

1 -14 114
do 1 -22 138
X Zw H- CENTRE OF SALA (HARMYA NABHI)
Small 1 -18 126 1 -2 78
G \ I G- SHIFT OF SALA (GAMANA) -
78
--+---+--- H 6~ X-SHIFTOFDOOR CENTRE (DWARA- do 1 -10 102 1 -2
t--r- ~ MADHYA)
•
•
/ \

iii) Ventilators 0 -14 42 1 -6 90

/ \ .........,. ENTRY DOOR OF SALA IS LOCATED IN •

/ \ BETWEEN3NKA/jA, SUTRA AND do 0 -12 36 1 -0 72

._z HARMYASUTRA
1
EXIT DOOR OF SALA IS LOCATED WITH For the door posts, the width should be equal to the
ITS CENTRE ON 6TH LINE OF 10 LINES DIVIDING THE REAR LENGTH INTO 9 ,_ width of uttara (fig.07.02). Their thickness can be equal to
PARTS AS SHOWN FOR A TYPICAL WEST FACING SALA. IT CAN ALSO BE
ON THE 7TH LINE OF 12 LINES DIVIDING THE LENGTH INTO 11 PARTS the width or equal to 3/4, 2/3 or 1/2 the width. The door
•

FIG.07.01 LOCATION OF MAIN ENTRY AND EXIT

DOORS OF BUILDINGS
The inside perimeter of the door frame should be in the
yoni prescribed for the house, i.e. dhvajayoni for the door in
the eastern house and so on. For finding the yoni, the perimeter
should be converted to angula units, as already mentioned in
the commentary on stanza 13 of chapter 2. The income ~gya)
27()
reach up to the uttara. There should be upp_er and low~r
and head should be same as that of the post. The thtckness
of the sill should be 11 /3 or 11 /4 of the thickness of the posts.
The head should have thickness equal to that of the posts.
-
271
•
 a
.\fa /Ill yy fay ac all dri k ah /za ~J aIll Man u~yalayac andrikab lla~y a1n
- / . .
or gwyamsav1dh1. ~rom the semi-perimeter, the i$tadTrgha
is subtracted to gtve the width or the semi-perime~er is
\ divided in the ratios prescribed by guQamsa rule.

•
For example, let the perimeter of the door be 8H8A in
dhvajayoni. Subtracting yo~i number 1 and taking length to
width ratio as 3, the i$fadirgha is 3H. The corresponding
MANGALAPHALAKA .......,___....,
width is 1H 4A. By guoamsa rule, let the semi perimeter be
TENON & SOCKET JOINT_
' _ 4H4A. Dividing by 14 and taking 4 parts as width , the width
-
adjusted to angula is 1H4A and the length is 3H OA.
•
HEAD
According to Ts'anasivagurudevapaddhati, (Ref. 07.03) the
thickness of the sill and head are arrived as follows:

Subtract the height of doors from the height of the pillar/

' ' wall and divide the remainder by 5. Then two parts will give
•

· STANA the thickness of sill. Three parts wiH give the depth from the
\
•
uttara to the bottom of the head. From this value (i.e .. 3
•

...-LOCK
parts), the head of prescribed thickness (i.e. equal to that
•
of post) is kept and the balance is used to provide the
managalaphalaka (described later in the next stanza) .
•

0
,..... 1------1 DOOR POST MANAGALAPHALAKA
Stanza- 3
II
DOOR LEAF •
'
•
li~ECJ:tlqJfll ~ ..........~~r.::~kl· Qlcl&>i fclc;:gnq II
•
Then above the head of the door, the plank (called
•
mangalaphalaka) should be placed with the sculptured
SILL · d d · d
images of Ga~zeia, Lakpm or KnrJa rna e as es1re a nd
with the images of different birds .
.
HINGE
Commentary
This describes the mangalaphalaka fixed above the
FIG. 07.02 DETAILS OF DOORS head and between the door posts. It was stated in the last
•

273
272
 Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y a1n
Manu .yyalayacandrikahha~yam
uttara for strength. Then the gap above the door head is
covered by this plank. This should be decorated with carved DOORS OF WALLS ABOVE CELLARS
or relief figures of Gods and birds. This served the purpose tanza- 5
of not only covering the gap above the head of the door, but
3i·<l~l~\11'if:~~ £1~(1~ ~;;t qq~~
also providing a storage space behind it. • . . .......
~
'
~~!41\5'11 ~<11~1~'-Sil l:l'1~ I
DOORS IN THICK WALLS '
-
Stanza- 4
f4=<,11~f\)l ~qfiCf>~~tfGidS•<IJ~~~- •
If the walls are made very thick in buildings generated
with inside perimeter, in some places, the wall is to be done
QI sfl &:i ~ II ~' fcrt:tllt I· <I x f4 ~ d ~ x I cl J ~'"I t ~~~ Tl
~
I
with its edge up to the paduka of the building's courtyard .
•

f!>\CII -a-c;:x-_y1 The doors and wall plates are prescribed to be taken outside
flr\t~6·lll4l~ ~Gdx~l~ltl : II to the edge of the selected wall obeying the centre line rule
' of respective Siilas and yards.
Wall of great width is to be divided into 12 and
keeping 7 and 5 parts inside and outside (respectively), Commentary
•

the door posts should be placed with their centres at this There was a practice of raising some digg[has and/or
line (viz. dividing line). Sometimes, above these, a strong vidiggrhas by constructing an additional adhi?th8na by placing
top plank (urdhvapatti) and above that the limbs of the a second p8duka over the first adhi~.th8na. The wall is
••
constructed over the second adhi?.thana. 'n such cases, the
wall should be done, with strong stone or combinations
limbs of adhisthana like jagati, gala, prati are generally shown
of mud and mortar.
only outside 'the ankaf)a wall. Such raised sa/as are. called
Commentary •
antarnahamandiras because their dimensions are dectded by
•
considering the inside perimeter. Such ~8/as are generally ~~ed
In walls with thickness more than the thickness of door as strong rooms for keeping costly articles. For such s~/as
posts, the door posts should be placed such that their centre also , the doors are placed
/_
midway between the centre lmes
line is at 5/12 times the thickness of the wall measured from of the yard and the sa/a.
•

outside i.e. the door will be towards the outside edge of the
RULES FOR DOORS
wall. Above the top beam, instead of the mangalaphalaka, Stanza- 6
masonry wall or stone wall can be constructed. In such
cases, a strong plank (urdhvapatta - manpalaka in
: ~=t I'! it~-:q ~Eilf~~ -:q II
•• •
Malayalam) is kept above the top beam for supporting the .
' '
wall. The urdhvapafta serves the function of lintel. The tw'o shutters (kavii_tayugma) should be made with
•

•
width equal to half the width of the opening plus their own
275
274
 . Manufytilayacandrikabhasyam
1'vlanu ~yalaya c andrikahhlisyain
thickness. The thickness can be made 2112 or 31/2 •

ntairangulas or 4 ntatrangulas.
Stanza- 7
"' Ect ttt \! !f 11 o1Cb ll i <'1 x=t f•~ q 1cl- l
• HINGE
- ~ VERTIC AL DROPPING LATCH
b r
>r&l q oft l1 Cl cl til •ll fq q ?I Cf> I ~I I t
"u ~t
:I
• • 0 •
• .J. JL.

Cf>CJICdl: ~: II "' ... ,..

•
~

- . •
.l
There should be hinges (bhra1na!laka) at top and 0 •
bottom, latches (argala ), reaper covering the joint ~ p: - ARAMA
,__ v
ARGALA
(sa1zdhipala; sutrapa{{ika in Malayalam), rings (handles) for • • • • • 0 -
r.t METALSTRAP

closing (prak$epaniyavalayaili), longitudinal and lateral

:i
. ·~
' ••
ARAMA
straps (tiryanciudanci patrakQ!li), Srlmukha, crescent of the I'
ARGA ...-
moon (iltdulakala) and flower-buds and fully blosomed
flowers on the two shutters.
Commentary
• • •• • 0 0

The doors generally, are made with two shutters of equal tr ~

width. The thickness of the shutters may be 2112, 31/2 or 4 • •
''HINGE
.
•

angulas. The width of each shutter is half the width of the ARAMA & ARGALA
BACK VIEW
opening plus the thickness of the shutter. This is for providing
rebates at the joints. The joint is concealed by a runner
called sandhipala placed outside. (fig.07.02). The shutters JAMB

are connected to the sill and head by pinion and socket joints.
The shutters are secured from inside by latches (fig.07.03),
WALL
the details of which are given in stanza 18. For holding the
shutters for closing, plain or ornamental metal rings are DOOR POST
HOLE FOR TENON OF HINGE

provided. Metal straps (of mild steel or brass) are provided

to make the shutters strong. The heads of nails or rivets for PLAN
fixing the straps will ., be
- shaped like flowers or birds .
Ornamentation with srimukha (literally meaning face of FIG. 07.03 LATCHING DEVICES
Laksm1) which are hemispherical attachments and with
curved metal embellishments in the shape of crescent of
the moon, all made of mild steel or brass are also provided.
•

277
276
 Man U$yalayac andrikab ha~y am
RUNNER COVERING THE JOINT OF SHUTTERS
Stanza- 8
•
Ei l{.,clll ~i If~ (11 oj) llfCJ ~tl'! ..
Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha ~·y a1n
timber planks with vajana decorations.
LATCHES
- •

Stanza- 9
OCII'(il dll~=tlti41Gl~dtSif5cl~tll A.Tf I '"flctl Cll 'i lf(t I CbCII elf> <it Cb I m "<j\?1 4~ett l~tt I
CbdClll "CI cl '1 ~I'! JOt~~ I~ c6l\i1~"\l~ I <&ill ~ ~ OfliJ ~ ;ftfft ~:tldl'"f I
'
II 6 I xl c;iJI ~ &t 4G~ I oI'! ~i"' ll tl a€1 i -
The runner covering the joint (sutrapat!i or sandhipaJa) I
r
on•4~~~~~~Sittl~~if%ttl +rr Cf><:rqitttl~'"fl'"f II
' '
should be made with width and thickness equal to one part The left leaf is mother, it should be with sutrapa!~i.
of 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 parts of door opening or thickness of half or That which goes to the right is daughter. For all doors it
three-quarters of its width, with length equal to the door is to be expressed thus. The arama (the vertical piece of
(length), with breast-like projections in odd numbers of 3, 5 the latching device) should be made with length of one
or 7, with carvings of. bands of pearl, Lak~nzi residing in part out of 3, 4, 5 or 6 parts of the height of door and
/
lotus, Kr~!la and Ga!'esa. width and thickness equal to one part of 4, 5, 6 or 7 parts
of this length.
Commentary
Stanza- 10
This stanza gives the dimensions and details of
&t~«uttqlllfati1t at ~XHil{'tt~ ~tCf>t d tlld
decorations on the sutrapatti.
••
This, being in the centre of
the door, attracts the attention of any person approaching I
•

the door. Hence it is made ornamental specially in the case ,/

-
of the main door. Its width is equal to 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7 or
1/8 part of door opening. The thickness can be equal to its II
'
width or half or three-fourth of its width. The sliding latch (argala) is to be made with (l)length
On the runner, odd numbers (3, 5 or 7) of carved equal to one part out of 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 parts of door width,
projections (stanadhya) are made. Carvings resembling (2)width of one part out of 6, 7 or 8 parts of the length and
bands of pearl (muktadama) and carved figures of Lak~mi, (3)thickness equal to half the width and with 2 square blocks
J

.. . and Ganesa
Krsna . are also made on the runner (patt1).
... such that the gap between the blocks will be in the notches
at the top and bottom of ara111as.
Instead of or in addition to the ball and socket joint
Stanza- 11
(bhramaoaka) at top and bottom, lateral metal straps on
the door are sometimes extended beyond the shutters to •

form additional hinges for added security. ...,...,.,.,~·TTTJ'~:::JT

_-rn ..... l{£:211 d -:r.r*t::::nrt;:n':~ :;:t II
'
In important buildings, the door jambs are covered with
279
• •
278
 Man u~yalayac andrikab na~y am
The lower sliding latch should rest on the mother leaf
and the upper one should go on the daughter. Then (they
should be) fixed on the back of the door with the centre of
arama above the centre of the door.
Commentary
Stanzas 9, 10, 11 describe the typical latching device called
arama and argala (fig.07.03). When one is standing inside ie.
behind the door, the leaf on the left side is called mother leaf
and that on the right side is called daughter leaf. The mother
leaf is closed first (from inside) and the daughter rests on the
mother. Therefore, the sutrapaffishould be fixed on the mother.
The doors are secured by means of a latching device fixed
inside the door. This consists of 2 vertical pieces called arama,
one on each door and 2 sliding latches called argala or sak$a.
The length of each arama is 1/3, 1/4, 1/5 or 1/6 of the height of
door. Its width and thickness are 1/4, 1/5, 1/6 or 1/7 of its length.
The sliding latches are to be attached to the aramas, with
the lower latch on the mother leaf and the upper one on the
daughter. The length of the latches is 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7 or 1/8
the door width. Their width is 1/6, 1/7 or 1/8 of their length and
their thickness is half the width. Each of them will have 2 square
blocks such that the arama to which it is attached will be
between the square blocks. For this suitable cuts will be made
in the arama.The centre line of the arama should be shifted
slightly above the horizontal centre line of the door.
Stanza- 12
... : SICbftxfci Gf~qfGQ>clCbtRch ~1Pf I
3f·ll~t . ~i'114Rfd Cl~f.fl 4=;:q~ II
The door posts, shutters etc. made with one kind of
wood is auspicious. If otherwise, some people say that
the ladies will be of bad character.
M anu~ya.layac andrikab ha~yarn
Commentary
The different parts of the door should be of th e same
wood. This is to avoid differential shrinking or warping and
' to ensure tight jo~nts. The warning that the character of the
ladies will be bad, if the same wood is not used, may be
taken only as a warning to see that the prescription of using
the same wood is followed strictly. If differential shrinkage
or warping occurs, outsiders can open the doors by
introducing tools through the gaps and harm the ladies,.
1
Hence, the same type of wood should be used for the
different parts of the door and that too after proper seasoning
for security.
Stanza- 13
~ Ch<1te ............ Cll¥1111~ it'elJGcll <i)q~ Cll~¥11 ~~I<! I
dGt\cl ~ Clt<p~~~-~<"fl CJT II
If (there is) only one door leaf, it should be on the
left side. The aranta should be below or above the centre.
Its sliding latch may be made circular, octagonal or square
or (it can be fastened by) strong chain.
Commentary
For doors with single leaf, the leaf is to be fixed on the
I left side. The arama can be below or above the centre, b~t
not at the centre. One w'ill be on the door and the other Will
be on the right-hand door post. The sliding latch may be
circular, square or octagonal. Its length will be equal to or
3/4 or full width of leaf.
Instead of or in addition to the arama .and argala, the
leaves can be secured by chains to the sill and head . In
addition to these, bolts can be provided at the top and
bottom (see fig.07.04).
28 1
I
 Man u~yaJayac andrikab ha~y a1n Manufyalayacandrikabha~ya1n

LOCATION OF OUTER DOORS

q~fa: ~~tell1~4~
• Stanza- 14 •
•

s~ '<=tl(1il II
311~11
For entry to and exist from the ankaiJa, the important
~Jt~ : I door (passage door) should be placed above the paduka. If
'<=t«11U liCI~'<=lt .............................~-.....~""': '(hjd there is wall for the corner house in the passage outside the
door, the height of (upper) adhi~!hana above the paduka
it~CJtgfa Cf>CIIe4>cl1Cbl l44~'%nit II
should be ignored and its (that of the opening) width should
When length of the house is divided by 10 or 12 lines, I be such that four times the width of the passage gives the
the outer door is to be placed generally behind, on the right perimeter with desired yoni.
side in the 6th or 7th line according to one's desire with
Commentary
suitable yoni etc. If only one door leaf is desired, it will be
on the left side when going out. The doors, so far described are for direct access to
and from the sa/as. The major access is through the
Commentary corridors (fig.07.04). The inner major doors for this are to
In the previous stanzas, the procedure for placing the be placed above the upper paduka, if there is a raised
doors from the sa/as to the ankana were elaborated. This adhisthana as mentioned previously in stanza - 5 for
-
stanza gives the procedure for locating the door for going
• •
antarnahamandira. For easy access, the corridor (antarala)
should be at the same level. If there is raised platform only
out from the sa/as.
for the main houses, naturally the corridor will be at the lower
The length of the houses is divided into 9 or 11 parts by level. If there is wall for the corner house and the corner
10 or 12 lines respectively (see fig.07 .01). The door is placed house is also raised, the an tara/a will be kept at the level of
such that is centre is at the 6th line from the left if the division the upper paduka. For this the width of the antarala is
is by 10 lines and at 7th line if the division is by 12. This computed in such a way that when multiplied by 4 it gives
• • •
ensures that the door is in the left half of the centre line of ausp1c1ous yon1.
the sa/a when viewed from inside. Some commentators take These passage doors are placed in the corridors of
'savya• to mean right and prescribe the door to be placed in respective sa/as (Ref:07.04). The eastern door will be in
the right half. the corridor north of eastern sa/a, the southern door will be
DOORS IN THE CORRIDORS in the eastern corridor of southern sa/a and so on as shown
in fig. 07.04.
Stanza 15
The method of deciding the width by assuring that when
!'II~ I m u 1tip 1i e d by 4, it gives au s pic i o us yon i, is c a! 1e.d
' •
ll d ~(llrr.;::~tfv>Cl"l 'l:J";T.hJ't:;:o;-:rT"D I padayonividhi. For example, the width for dhwa}ayom will
'
283
2R2
 Man u~yalayacandrikab ha~yatn
PASSAGE CONNECTING OUTER For temples (prasadavastu), length also should conform
YARD WITH INNER YARD to padayoni. For square temples, length is equal to width , ·
N hence here also the height (which is equal to width) is
8- CENTRE OF YARD
-
(ANKANANABHI) included in the computations.
•
0-DOOR
GATE HOUSE
A-ALINDAM
Stanza- 16
w G0~1(1 !'11~·11 OI~VtffiS~ ~lxtfc=(il{Jif4=<i\S&QI1 ___........ -
IN A BUILDING WITH CENTRAL ' ' ' ' '
COURTYARD, THE MAIN DOOR IS
PLACED AT THE ENTRY TO THE (
\~IG~liiG~ cftatGf:tJq;q4 &R !'fi11~l~(1't
PASSAGE CONNECTING OUTER
TO INNER YARD.
I1
s
FIG.07.04 The gateway for travel should be placed in the pada
ENTRY DOORS FROM OUTER TO INNER YARDS (cell) of Pu~padanta and those of Bhallata, lndra and
I
Grhak~ata, shifted from the centre of the yard by 4, 5, 6, 7
be 18 angula, 1 H 1 OA, 2H2A and so on, and that for etc. danda.
••
The major gateways and also the eight subsidiary
simhayoni will be 22A, 1 H 14A, 2H6A and so on. gateways can be on high ground with two stories, gables
etc.
The padayonividhi is based on the three-dimensional
•
• concept of the vastu. The perimeter for computation of yoni Stanza- 17
of a vastu is based on the plan composition, i.e. the perimeter ~ :q &l~q~fltt~ I
considered is that of the plan of the vastu. This perimeter is ~~~n:;::h"~fq~r.rll'~~";rm II
converted to the unit of pada and divided by 8 for computing
/ - I
the yoni. The application of guoamsavidhi standardises the In the pada of Parjanya and in that of Bhrsa, Pusa,
measurements of the plan composition. More subtle Bhrga, Dw1trap1tla, So~a, NaiJa, Aditi- thus the eight
standardisation is achieved by using the padayonividhi also subsidiary gateways for residences are desired.
for the plan composition. According to this procedure, the
value obtained by multiplying the width and/or length by 4 Commentary (Stanza 16 and 17)
should be in the prescribed yoni. In g[havastu, padayonividhi
These two stanzas give the positions of the major and
is generally applied only to the width. Since the height upto
subsidiary gate-houses. All these should be in the.outer.rl)_?St
wall plate (padamana) is generally equal to the width, the
envelope (pi$8cavithl) occupied by the 32 gods from /sana
value of 4 times width is in effect twice the sum of width and
to Diti. The major gateways should be in the ce.lls of
height i.e. perimeter of the vertical face.(refer to fig.03.09)
Thus padayonividhi takes into consideration the vertical
east and Grhaksata in the south (fig.O?.OS). Accordmg to
composition also. . '
285
284
 Manu ~ya,Layac andrikab na~y am
Manu~yalayacandrikabhii~yaJn
Brhatsamhita,
'
(Ref 07.05)
- they can also be located in the
padas of Jayanta, Sugriva, Varuf)a and Soma. The effects
of the location of gateways (according to Brhatsamhita) are 11 12
indicated in fig.07.06. The general rule is that for a person
5 MAIN GATE POSITIONS
entering the plot, the gateway should be in the right side. 1./NDRA
10 2. GFJHAK~ATA
3. PU~PADANTA
The gateways have to be at a distance of 4, 5, 6, 7 or 4. BHALLATA
•
-
more danda from the Brhamanabhi according to the width • 5. PARJ~NYA
• •
6. BHRSA
of the plot and the number of grid divisions. (Here danda SECONDA~Y GATE POSITIONS
means the width of a grid division). s -
7. PUSA
8. BH8NGA
6 9. D~ARAPALA
On both sides of the main gateways, Manu$y8.1aya- b::;f---*~+-+--f-t-~---f9 10. SC'J~A
9 11. NAGA
•
candrika allows subsidiary gateways also. Their positions 12. ADITI
8 7
are shown ir:1 fig. 07.05. These are for the use of cattre and FIG. 07.05
. LOCATION OF GATEWAYS
the servants. In modern usage, these can be used for the I'\)

passage vehicles. Clearly, it is not by the size, but by the •

,.
-N
~CJ1
N
(7)
• ~~
m me>
I'\)

,:c
CD
•
<.0
~
m
(,)
0
•
m
_.
(,)

•
(,)

,0
N
•
~m z >> > z
X
position that the main and secondary gates are identified. en> m ~- >
~
~~~
0
~~
~..
s: :x:Z
-m QOQ
,m
en :X:
QO
3:
~~~ ~~ ....
<
m
:c
~
I II
(/) mo
:c
The gateways are to be built in high ground. This is m
z
-4
(J)
0
z
-~ - (/)
0
z
za z
•
probably to ensure that any stranger can be easily spotted
~ ~
[,
26 t~ 29 30 31 32 1.. FIRE HAZARD
from the gateway or the gateway can be easily located by a p
24. DISEASE 2 2. FEMALE CHILD
24
visitor approaching the house. Two-storeyed construction •

~ 0
23. DECLINE OF
with gables recommended for main gateway reinforces this WEALTH .
23 3. WEALTH
-
-
assumption. Here the ground floors can be used by gate- 22. FEAR FROM
22 N '-;t~
~ . . -- ,_.
ROYAL 1-'l,..,.,, I lUI'
ROYALTY
keepers and casual visitors or travellers and the rooms at 21. GAIN OF rL w '""" 5
WEALTH
lo... 5. ANGER
the top floor can be earmarked as guest rooms or room for .
-'-

20. PROSPERITY 120 6 6. FALSE HOOD

keeping the records (fig.07.07).
•

19. GAIN OF
WEALTH [!!1 7 7. CRUELTY
VEDIKA 18. ENEMIES 18 /_ 8 8. ROBBERY

Stanza- 18 17. HARM TO

·~ 16 15 14 13 tt 11 10
CHILDRE~ v : ... - ,
~' t•111 t1 ~' 11 '! ct1 rrt:;~'I\:J'\J::r:::J\:rnts te i ~ 1ct) err '[]';:t~- ~
_.
•11
_.
~
~

w I\)
~

0
CD
•

-z ,-m ,:D
(7) • •
• • • • •
(J)
m r-
r- r- r- ~
0
SliJI?I oO 0 C)
~ ~
I :X:(/)
-(J) :E(J)
(/)
:D :D
0
0
,men z-r- m
:c
0
-r-
X
mo ~
'o
~, >-n
~
- m
~
-~
lJ
m
(/)
< 0
:D
m ~ c 0 (/) m
FIG. 07.06
z :X: m 0 z
c
EFFECTS OF GATEWAYs
•

2R6 287
 Manu~yalayacandrikiibha:~Yauz

-
TORAft!A.DVARA, The outside offset of the vedika will be by increments
SfMPLE GATEWAY SINGLE-STOREYED GATE HOUSE'
of angula, in conformity with the patramiina. The outside
•
projections from the vertical line of uttara are prescribed
by 2112, 3 etc. angulas.
Stanza -20
•

x~~clt~ct Cttl~~ -
OTTARA
t
•
EAVE -+n~ ~~\J1J~d~ ':c{ f4'{~dJ ttci~~ I
•
j
VERTICAL ~ALISADF;~.J!
.
••tI 31• ,, '1i~'1~r-;r
-:::r.::Jit2' ltt';:1Tt;:d ll~ ~ ~1 t1> 41 (ill
INCLINED PAliSADE ..--· ~.'--r-
. ••.
~
II
II
••I '
t

:t Here some persons say that vedi must be wi~ the s.ame
materials. It is observed that it has been made With bncks,
•
• mud stone and different types of timber for all houses. If
DOUBLE-STOREYED GATE HOUSE
• ,
the basement is lowered, the door should be placed. above

FIG. 07.07 FIG. 07.08. 20

Commentary (Stanza 18, 19 and )
•
-
ONE-STORIED & TWO-STORIED GATEWAYS INCLINED PALISADES . · latform for
•

· f the entrance
•
constructions to be made above a
28Y
2R8
 Manu§yiilayacandrikabha~yam
Manu ~yalayac andrikab Jia~y am
The platforms are to be constructed on both sides of the
•
Commentary
entrance gate-house leaving the opening for the access. It The genera\ rule for the the posts, beams and the rafters
can be door of the constructed in brick, mud, stone or is that they shou\d be in even number and their gap will
suitable timber. Some pratctitioners insist that the material natural\y be in odd number. The spacing of rafters and posts
used for the platform should be the same as that used for shou\d not be more than one hasta for safety and security.
the door frame i.e. if the door frame is of stone, the platform
is to be of stone. Its height is prescribed to be equal to the FUNCTIONS OF THE SALAS
bottom width of the pillar (viz. 1/6 to 1/11 of the height of Stanza- 22
•
pillar, vide stanza 24 of chapter 5), or equal to the height of
5~t=rft4s
the prati (viz. 1/5, 1/6 or 1/7 of the height of adhi~.fhana,
vide stanzas 17, 18 and 19 of chapter. 5) or equal to 1 1/2, Clhllt=tl crt G?Otfll4 sRt~stl H~
0 I
2 or 3 times the height of the prati. The doors are placed t:(J ~:=en t~ ai ~ f4 q ~ fl1 err
above the paduka so that the access way will be at the -:::n'1rT":J:;::r.J.... .........~~ ..........-r-rr:rr· ' l
padukalevel. '

Over the vedika, palisades of wood are constructed with

vertical or inclined posts and horizontal runners. If they are
vertical, the posts of the palisades will be fixed to the wall
plate and, if inclined, to the eaves board. (fig.07.08). The JD ' · · art of these
vedika serves as resting places for way farers, guests etc.
When the gate house is raised to an upper floors the room at
the top serves as rest house for watchmen and guests or as and study.
the place where the accounts of the house hold are kept.
Commentary
Stanza- 21 - 'sa/a is considered to be
?jU:fl'hjcll: {-(fJ1f~qtGtf: ~: - . · ence wors 1p, '
-;r.r;:rt:r.:::;::nrTTI:n : .............. q ~- t I> ll t\ II : I
' '

The beams, posts, rafters etc. are to in even number, . nna a a . ·

but indeed all their gaps (spans) should be in odd number.
If those gaps are greater than the hasta prescribed for that Kubera the god of wealth , was 'dered to be good fo r
house, they will surely cause damage.
291
29()
 Manu~y iilay ac a11 drikab ha~y atn

BRAHMA
family life. These two can be alternated. The western house
is called dhanalaya (the house of wealth). Hence it is used
. - -
for keeping wealth. The southern house 1s dhanyalaya (the
,.
ISANA
soMA
house of grains). This is used for reception of guests. The
MAHENDRA
space left in these two after meeting their normal uses, is
used as bed rooms and also study.

In this connection, it is to be noted that Vastupuru~a­ MARUT

AGNJ
sankalpa can be used to serve as a graphic model for spatial
planning of the functions. Typically the south west (Nir[tt) VARUtjA
corner where the feet of the Puru~a are positioned can be
l
taken as the origin and the activities gain importance towards • NIRF.lTI I

north and east. The south-east (Agn1) corner and north-west

I
(Marut) corner are spaces functionally more important than ANANTA
-/- · OL MASS OF BUlLDING
that in the south west (Nir[tt). Clearly the north-east (/sana) •
GEOMETRIC REPRESENTATION OF COSMOS TO CONTR

corner is the most important position of any room or building '

by this concept. The axis of Vastupuru~a, thus, contains
the secret of organising the functional areas. The -
VERTICAL PROPORTION
perpendicular axis connecting the south-east (Agn1) and OF SECtiLARB\JILDING
-
northwest (Marut) corners, further divides the maQQala into \

two portions. Of these the activities located in the upper

.D
limbs of the Vastupuru$a are taken as more sacred as •
..... f'-o
0~
....
compared to those located in the lower limbs. These l

concepts can be applied to the planning of different spaces

in any building or land use zones in any settlement.

If the symbolism is extended to the third dimension,

the maximum height that can be permitted to the building
will be limited by the enveloping surface of the cosmic form
-
(fig.07.09). For a building located in the manu~yavithi, the
•

ratio of height to width will be ~2. For one located in the

-
Brahmavithi, this will be just above 2. The five proportions
/
of santika, pau~..fika , jayada, adbhuta and sarvakamika
corresponding to the height to width ratios of 13/7, 11 /2, FIG. 07.09 GROUND C
13/4, 2, 21 /8 respectively recommended in vastu texts are
I
')_ (.""'
directly derived within these limits. -;;j

2()2 I
 M anu~ya.layac andrikab has.y am Manu sy iilay ac andrikab ha~y arn
BUILDINGS IN SMALL PLOTS --------
TABLE 07.02 BUILDABLE AREA IN MANDALA
Stanza- 23
Total Celts in Buildable Buildable Area
tpc:QJ ~'t""fCHPJCpfqGf11~ &)?f()}S•c:llf(). Mandala No. of Brahma- Area as percentage
Cells sthana of total area
I

' ' Manduka 8 X 8 = 64 4 32 50.00

~IIC'il:
Paramasayika 9 X 9 = 81 9 40 49.38

Asana 10x10=100 16 48 48.00

•

In small plots (ks_etraka) of 8x8, 9x9 and lOxlO grids, the

central yard is to be made with the inner 4, 9 and 16 cells (padas ). Though the main building should be restricted to the
Outside that, the two envelopes of cells of Aryaka etc. are for two intermediate envelopes, ancillary buildings like co~­
hotJscs. The enveloping set outside that is to be considered for sheds, shed for thrashing grains etc. can be constructed 1n
cowshed, shed for thrashing grain etc. the outer envelope.

Commentary LOCATION OF FARM HOUSE ETC.

Stanza- 24
When the plot is too small to be divided into 4 sectors
the entire plot is considered as the k$efra by taking the
largest square maoc;Jala from it (see fig.02.06). The ma(l(lala ~~nT ~"11<'1~ ~"i4d1 5flil~i a~.uqjqd) I
is then divided into 1Ox1 0, 9x9 or 8x8 grids according to
en
convenience and requirements. The outermost envelope of
the cells known as pisacavfthi is to not to be used for house-
building. Similarly, the innermost space called Brahmasthala
consisting of 4, 9 or 16 cells in 8x8, 9x9 or 1Ox1 0 grid division
respectively, also cannot be used for the building and has
to be reserved for courtyard (ankaoa). The building is,
therefore, to be confined to the two intermediate enveloped
- -
called devavithi and manu$yavithi (refer fig.02.1 0).
. · grruns. n some '
It is of significance to note that the buildable space locations prescnbed for stonng . 'bed for wealth
(Q[havedika) in a ma'!cfala does not exceed fifty percent of building for grains can be in the location prescn
•
the area of the maQqala. For example, the number of cells also, if required.
in buildable area is 32 out of 64 in 8x8 grid, 40 out of 81 in
9x9 grid and 48 out of 100 in 1Ox1 0 grid (Table 07.01 ). The Commentary
house when the harvested
ground coverage of the building, thus, does not exceed 50°/o,
which is as per the present day building code. stalks of grain are kept and the gram
295
294
 Manu~yalayacandrikabna~yam
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam
is to be constructed in the south. The building for storing
the grain is to be near the farm house in the south or south
west. This corresponds to the location of dhanyalaya in the •

south in Mayamata (fig.07.1 0). The building for costly things

can be in all the four cardinal directions or in the rasis of •

simha, tufa , v.rscika and ka.faka. It may be noted that

Varahamihira prescribes that dhanalaya should be in the
north only.
E
PRESGRIPTION FOR COW SHED
Stanza- 25
•

q Gf •~ r:~ q ~ d ~ I i=h\1l''IJ";::r::::::l'?'l~~:r;t I
~ftqq~s~41?1 Ji~qJliJ~ SQ]~I~II- •
1. SUKHALAYA, 2. ANNALAYA. 3. DHANYALAYA, 4. DHAN.ALAYA .

~i '"I~"\ i fll Jt d I I .
•

cll fft1 '1 CfCII Ql ~ ;:rr;J:::r.crttt; ~r:r;:c~·

FIG. 07.10 USES. OF MAIN HALLS (MAYAMATA)
' '
The cowshed (should be constructed) in the cells of N
lndra, Varu~za, Vitatha, Parjanya, ]ayanta, Pii~fl or in the ==r=
cells of thePu~pada1zta, Dvarapala, Bhrnga or So~a. Here,
I

if (it is) the buffalo shed, (it should be) in the cells of Yama. 1. FARM HOUSE
2. POUNDING
The shed for bullock can be in this (south) or in all
/ 3. GRAIN STORE
(prescribed for cows). All the salas in Vastu1narmas 4. COW SHED

should be avoided. E 5. BUFFALO SHED

w
•
Stanza- 26
&i ?I f=ll 'A:T1r1TTT"::rJ"::-::-::r1:1"'::t't=n lll ;:j·
~~fi{1 &i=t:Ff ~ltl I
• •
~ ~ -;:r 5
cliiUl ~~ T1 Cb~oj 111QI: II t.OCATION OF ANCILLARY FACILITIES
• • FIG.07.11
The movement of cattle crossing the diagonals going
to the corners of the plot in all directions is not desirable.
Vr~a is auspicious, sintha is not. In kara!tas, sinzha,
297
296

•

vyaghra, vifti, gardabha and immovable (sthira) kara~zas
(are not auspicious)
Commentary
The location for the cowsheds are in the east, west and
south (fig.07.11) in the pisacavlthi. For buffalos, the shed
should be in south only. For bullocks cells for cowsheds
can be used.
Generally, eastern location is preferred for cowsheds
as the preferred slope of ground is towards east. Arthasastra
prescribes the east side as most suited for cowsheds.
The yoni of the perimeter for all cattle shed should
preferably be V[$abha (yoni number 5), simhayoni is to be
avoided.
ManusyaJayacandrikabhas.;atn
• - - - - - - - -
The dining hall (is desirable) there itself or in makara or
in the cell of varu~a. The rest-house is to be constructed
in kuntbha or similarly in ntakara or in vayupada and if
necessary in v,r~a and me~a (rlisis) and the pounding house
in vay up ada.
Commentary
There are different prescription for the location of the
kitchen in different texts. The location is, in gener~l, related
to the position of fire in the vastupuru$ama_ryqata (flg.0~.12).
Brhatsamhita (Ref:07.07) prescribes t~e kl:~~en ~o ~e In the
c~ll of Agni in the south-east corner In pJsacavJthJ. It may_
also be taken to indicate the direction of south-east ~s Agm

Karaf}a is an astrological factor related to the phase of

the moon (titht). The karaf)as of simha (lion), vyaghra (tiger),
vi$ti (bird) and gardabha (donkey) and immovable kararyas
that kitchen can be m the padas o n_ ra,
are not auspicious. Similarly the marmas are to be avoided.
Bhrs'a and Aryaka all in the eastern Side.
While going out from the cowshed into the outside - . · n be in the
compound, the cattle should not be made to cross the two '· . . da of Pa(}anya sou
main diagonally viz. the karryasutra and m.rtyusutra. The
corner locations are, therefore, avoided .
•

LOCATION OF OTHER ANCILLARY STRUCTURES

Stanza- 27
q\Jl.it q:q~lclli ~~ftl~ err -qq. . . . vrsabha. This means that gener
ca~ be accepted.
. t of vastupurufia in the south
.. on 1n WI
II
· e the nor
It is desirable to have the kitchen in the cells of
~

Parja1zya, Sikhi or Viyu or in (the ralis of) nte~a or vr:~a. ( uttamanga) of the Vastup •
2Y9
29R
 ... - -
Man u~yalayac andrikab ha;y am
Manu $yaJayac andrikab Jlasyam
generally in the north side in Kerata. tn other parts of India,
is generally considered to be a very auspicious functions.
eastern location is preferred.
Therefore, it is natural that the kitchen is located in the north-
east or in the south-east (Agnt) or north-west ( V§yu) or The rest houses outside the main building can be in
anywhere in the east (mesa •
and vrsabha).
• •
the north or east or north-west. The shed for pounding of
grains is prescribed to be in the north-west.
In all regions of India other than the west coast of
Gomantaka and Kerala, kitchen is located in the south-east It is to be noted, that the locations prescribed in this
Agnipada. In the west-coast, the general direction of wind stanza are all in the pi$acavTthi, outside the main building.
during most of the year is from the south-west and hence
the location of kitchen is generally in the north-east (in the LOCATION OF WELL
-/
padas of /sana or Parjanya) so that the smoke from the Stanza- 28
kitchen will be
I
swept away
./
from the house. !Sanapada is
also called sikhipada. Sikhi means burning fire. Hence the ~~~ ....,...;p. - S~SIG'i I
location of kitchen in the north east is justified. "
_.... ......
....... .........--rnT1T'J";:r::::;T.l~~ ~· d~ Ct •s: fGi-
........
For burning of fire, vayu (air) is required. Therefore, • .....-w-
the location of kitchen in the north-west in vayupada also
can be justified. The well is said to be most auspicious in north-east
It is, therefore, to be deducted that the kitchen can be mtnarasz · d abha also
located in the south-east, east, north-east or north-west.

It is to be noted that the prescribed locations of kitchen

are in the outer envelope of piiacav7thi, outside the main
building. This is because the buildings in the earlier days
had thatched roofs which are easily inflammable Location is inauspicious for ladies.
of kitchen outside the main building, therefore, ensures Stanza- 29
safety from fire and smoke. - . .,...rl...~~rr; ~ 4 4 Cbs · act c6
The dinning hall should preferably be adjacent to the
I
•

kitchen. Hence the locations for kitchen are suitable location

~
for the dinning hall. It can also be in makararaSi (in the north) II
or in varurJapada (in the west) if the kitchen is in the _....... ~(f;Uicl . ' ' ~
vayupada in the northwest. Generally, the most preferred . . in the pada of Antank~a
locations are east and north. Manasara prescribes south
· · ble 10 t e P - '·
and south west for dinning hall (Ref.07.08). In stanza 22 of
this chapter it was stated that pujas and homas should be Mahtdhara, Varu~za, Sonza an
done in the eastern data. Because of this, the dinning hall is 301

3()()
 Man u~yalayac andriklih /ia~y am Manus• yii Lay acan dr ik ii hha"• yant
•

It is seen in north-west and west. For bathing and

drinking, unless it is river water, the same (source) is not
(desirable). Hence (they are to be) separately provided.
Stanza- 30
3Jfl4UJi 1tCFt~ Cf4'8Jq;:i . 'CIT (1~1 •

~1~1illl~cb <16d q;c'i G~tul I w E

'
!tt'it~xrq cftffiCbt~ Cf>fd~~mf.{t ~ -::rn'l"._ •

q;oJ:~di sf?r ~~Qid II •

41XtJil
If well and similarly tank have been dug in the south-
east (agni) of house earlier, it causes fear of fire hazard etc.
On south side also similar effect is caused. In the south side s
of villages etc. tanks etc. are not desirable near the houses. 1. WEALTH, 2. REST, 3. KITCHEN, 4. DINING

Similarlly gardens and sacred groves are not desirable near FIG. 07.12 LOCATION OF KITCHEN
the houses.
Commentary (Stanza 28, 29 and 30)

The best location for well is stated to be the north-east

corner. This may be due the fact that the desirable slopes are •

towards north and east and the preferred location for the kitchen •

is in the north-east. The other recommended locations are E

marked in fig. 07.13. Locations in east, north east, north, north-
w
west and west are recommended. The undesirable location
are south-east, south and south-west. · ...

Mfinasara prescribes the padas of /Sana, Antarik$a,

•
Agni and Pu$a for well (Ref:07 .1 0). B.rhatsamhita prefers
north and north-east. All other locations will bring bad effects
• 1. WELL, 2. TANK
(Ref.07.11).
LOCATION OF WELL & TANK
FIG. 07.13
Tank can be made in the padas of Mahendra I
(in the
east, Varuoa in the west, Soma in the north and Siva in the
-
north-east (all in outer envelope) or in the cell of Mahidhara
in the north in the intermediate envelope. It can also be in 303
..
3()2
 Manu~ya.layacandrikabhafya1n
me$a in the east. Tanks in south-west and north-west also
have been observed. Thus, only south-east and east are
the locations to be avoided for tanks.
It is also stated that the water from the same tank should
not be used for uses like washing, bathing etc. and for
drinking. Separate tanks have to be used for these uses.
But water from the same river can be used for all uses,
because water does not stagnate there.
Tanks or wells in south-east and south will give rise to
fear of fire hazard. It may be because they will be far away
from the fire places in NE and SE. Therefore, if there are
wells or tanks in these locations before the construction of
the houses, they should be filled up. In settlements also,
location of tank in southern sector is not recommended.
Natural groves and sacred groves are also not desirable
near the house. This is because snakes and other reptiles
etc. are likely to be seen in these.
RULES FOR THE HOUSES OF RULERS
• Commentary
•
II
In the houses of the kings and the brahmins, the
building for daily worship is in the courtyard, and the
installation of family deity etc. is in the of north-east, east
south-east or west. The proportioning of these buildings
should be with dhvajayo1zi in north-east, east, south-east,
south and in v,r.sabhayo1zi from south-west in order, for
prosperity.
3()4
Manu§yaJayacandrikabna~yam
Commentary
For daily worship, a pujagrha can be made in the yard
in the houses of rulers and brahmins. Hence the anvar.a is
"Rajnam bhilsurasya ca dhamani.. ." It can also be "Rajnam
dhamani bhusurasya g[ham ca ... ", in which case, it can be
interpreted to mean that in the palace complexes of kings,
the house for the priest who performs the daily worship can
be made in the ankana. •
But the former meaning is more
appropriate. While the daily puja can be in the courtyard,
the family deity is installed in north-east, east, south-east
or west. Dhvajayoni perimeter is prescribed for the shrine
•
rooms in the east of yamasutra (south-north axis) and
vrsabha yoni for those on the west side. These shrines are
in the house complexes of nobles. Hence they will face of
complex. The yon is are prescribed accordingly.
Stanza- 32
•
g """'P"'~:tt""'t~q I
-n-::rrr:nr.:r::r::rT~n ..... .........+.;~':ft" ~ Cl f: a d <; I I I
The shrines of family deities that are worshiped
should be indhvajayoni in north-east etc. and vr~abhayoni
in south-west etc. Then they will face the house, town,
city, village etc.
If a shrine is to house a family deity, it should f~ce the
house occupied by the family. If it is a shrine worshtped by
the public, it should face the settlement which uses .the
shrine. The yoni should be appropriately fixed. T.he yom for
the shrines east of the yamasUtra will be dhva}a and that
for the shrines in the west will be vr~abha.
Stanza- 33
-m: ...... nr:c:~ dI:til'! I
t4~~til: I I
'
3()5
 Man usyaJayacandrikab ha~y am
• •

Those deities that are installed in different shrines Manu;yalayacandrikabha~am

of niranga and sanga characteristic, will be specifically •

dealt with according to their characteristic of being r-u:::::r.:::n !II in'~ 4Oq IGll :
movable and fixed and according to their rites.
, ~l!fi...,:q
~~ SPfflq_ II
Commentary Compound wall at the boundary limit with mud or
stone is said to be superior. Its encircling trench is
Shrines or £Tik.ovils or vim8.nas are of 2 types; niranga medium. Then fencing with twigs etc. is interior. Its (that
and sanga, The deities in nirangaprasadas are movable (not of fence) posts etc. (posts and intermediate covering)
fixed) and those in sanga shrines are fixed. Small shrines should be with branches of thorny trees, creapers and
for movable --.L@/-s like salagrama etc. are classified as bamboo etc. Hence the choice is to be made according to
niranga. Such niranga shrines can be built inside the houses availability of funds. The prescribed trees also are to be
complexes as stated earlier. Sanga shrines wi.ll have the planted.
prakaras (see fig.03.07) and hence require more space.
They have to be built in spacious locations. The rites Commentary
performed in there two types are necessarily different. The importance ascribed to defining the mandala is
Stanza- 34 stressed here. In large plots, the mar;gala taken for the
an lysis is demarkated by low walls. Where existing buildings
~=n ~ell I~ . . . . . . ........ s ..t";;t •
•

are found to be in inauspicious locations, vastumaf}cjala can

«lllii~SJfclij; ~~ ~?fia) ~·11.._1~ qGf.lJij; I
•

be redefined by this method to make it auspicious .

~ ffillqaJ TJ 3.JI•tlct4; The boundary is to be fixed outside the maQc;Jala. If

compound wall is made with stone, mud etc., it is ~most
~l'<"?lltti f~?tiffl &taq~ -:q ~luti3J~'! II •
4
If only a trench is dug at the boundary, it is
-'"''

The pleasure - house for enjoyment of kings should •- ,..+ rAsort. If fencing is adopted,
-
be (in thepada of) Mitra, play-house in (thepada of) Vayu, - - ho~ of thorny

exercise is Argala and also in Nirrti, bath-house etc. in gs,

• •
the
Parjanya, dinning hall in Indra and Varuna, dance etc. in
• ldS .
Gandharva weapon-house etc. is Nirrti, sleeping house in j as
the pada of Grhaksata or in the e~t.
• •

Commentary

The prescribed locations are shown in fig.07.1 ..,.

Stanza:.. 35 •

<:; 0 \S I• \ j ~i 'f tfJ \ll • ........-tr+n"'P: .. ~--.-.-! t:r.::::rnn

. 'ffi! qfl~5U ~ 'iEtl'i'id .........~.... ~T.tl~'i'! I

3()6 3t)7
•
•
 Manu~yaJayacandrikabha~yam •

Those deities that are installed in different shrines

•
of niranga and sanga characteristic, will be specifically
dealt with according to their characteristic of being ~:r::::rr !II iU 1~~ 4Oq I~ ll :
•

movable and fixed and according to their rites.
Commentary
/-
Shrines or srikovils or vimanas are of 2 types; niranga
and sanga, The deities in nirangaprasadas are movable (not
fixed) and those in sanga shrines are fixed. Small shrines
for movable ,.tfb,Js like salagrama etc. are classified as
niranga. Such niranga shrines can be built inside the houses
complexes as stated earlier. Sanga shrines will have the
prakaras (see fig.03.07) and hence require n1ore space.
They have to be built in spacious locations. The rites
performed in there two types are necessarily different.
Stanza- 34
~tl~lif ""I-9"PP~ ........
• lftttllTi!'.
«tllll'ils~~cl&> ~?tid) ~·11~1~ quf.ll&> 1
•
' CII!rt"-Tl ~&j
Sb 'i Iq I I
Compound wall at the boundary limit with mud or
stone is said to be superior. Its encircling trench is
medium. Then fencing with twigs etc. is interior. Its (that
of fence) posts etc. (posts and intermediate covering)
should be with branches of thorny trees, creapers and
bamboo etc. Hence the choice is to be made according to
availability of funds. The prescribed trees also are to be
•
planted.
Commentary
The importance ascribed to defining the mandala is
stressed here. In large plots, the mar;dala
•
taken for the
an lysis is demarkated by low walls. Where existing buildings
f4~1tlS •
are found to be in inauspicious locations, vastumaf}cjala can
be redefined by this method to make it auspicious .

~ dlllqtfi TJ ~.ll•tlct&>=- The boundary is to be fixed outside the mar:u;tala. If

compound wall is made with stone, mud etc., it is most
satisfactory. If only a trench is dug at the boundary, it is
secondary. Fencing is the last resort. If fencing is adopted,
1. Pleasure house the intermediate posts should be with branches of thorny
~~
z'/
•

trees and bamboo and the covering with thorny twigs,

~ 2. Play house creepers and bamboo. The type of the construction at the
• f./
3. Gymnasium boundary is to be done according to the availability of funds.
•
~~
VJT.I
t"'}""/1
4. Bath-house After securing the boundary, trees should be planted as
w~ ri1
,/_

~ recommended earlier is chapter 1.

5. Dining
~~ 6. Dance
7. weapons
8. Rest house
~ ~ ~
FIG. 07.14 I

307
•
 Manu~ya.layacandrikabha~yam
JI\CII offtl:t II
' dak~ina according to the prescriptions and taking his
•
After, constructing the house thus, the acarya who
was chosen in the beginning should make the artisans
engaged in the construction satisfied according to their
desires by (offering) bangles, ear-rings studded with
precious stones etc. Then he should receive the house
himself and should perform all auspicious rites of
vastupuja etc. after entering the house with the owner at
an auspicious time.
Commentary
. In the first chapter it was mentioned that a ~erson
desirous of building a house should first accept a learned
person as acarya to guide all activities connected with the
construction (ch.1 slokas 9& 10). The ac§rya helps the owner
to select a suitable site and also a good sthapati. Then,
after the construction is completed, the acarya should satisfy
himself that the construction has been done according to
the prescriptions. He should then make the artisans
engaged in the construction happy and satisfied by giving
them gifts. Only after this, the icarya should enter the house
along with the owner and perform vasttipuja and all other
rites Ilike GaneSahoma etc.
•
According to the text Vastuvidya, the presentation of
gifts to the artisans is after the Vastubali (Ref.07.12).
. Stanza- 37
~TI Chill fclfa~c;~~ffi c;~oti ~~,qf'! I
311 :ill 'tiC: Ill d~lll~flg~~~~~ \714 sfl Dlll'i : 0 .
' V. V.,XIII-15
~:efta:~·~
'
308
Manufyalayacandrikabha~yam
_ Then; at the end of the rites, after feeding the revered
•
acarya and offering him cow, land etc. and the main
permission, the owner should please all persons with
several gifts and live happily in the house, fully satisfied
for a long time along with his family.
Commentary
•
•
This and the previous stanza specify that the owner
should occupy the house only after propitiating the gods,
the acarya and all the artisans and workers associated with
the constructions. Mayamata prescribes that entry to the
house shall be only after all the works are over (Ref.07.13).
B[hatsamhita also says that the deities should be worshiped
and the house cleaned and decorated before the owner
enters the house (Ref.07.14).
All these show the importance of the obligation of the
•
owner to please all the gods, acaryas and workers before
he enters the house. The blessings showered by the gods
and men who are thus pleased are expected to provide
prosperity to the occupants. Unless the owner pleases the
acarya and workers, it is believed that he will be in debt
([Qa) and this will make his life miserable. Builqing a house
is a noble act. The puf)ya in doing the noble act rests with
those who were engaged in the construction. By the offering
I
gifts, the puoya gets transferred from the Sppins to the
owner. The entry to the house (grhapravesa) becomes
important owing to this symbolic act of taking possession of
the grha from the Silpin to lead therein a prosperous and
happily life.
REFERENCES
7 01 ~~21 !(~ ~Ei"'9""!"1~,.,..'l~~=rr~ ~!(:tl....l_.,. cl ;:n'\lr.;:nrt-;;;~r.r::;r-nt:: I
' ' '
II
309
 •

Manu •syalayac andrikab hafy am

Manu~yalayacandrikabna~·yaln

07.09 ~i~?lltl·\1~ XidiSVF'f'i~H'«'i I

'
f4a~ «<tf4·~ · ~ Ji;{}~ff'i 11
'
07.03 Eilxl oil ~)tfq->:qji} ~Clci~IEili(CI~I I M.M., XXVII-118,119

\i?=<Cfi : tpclCblil?l~f31cll II I.G.P. 07.10 31•(t;ft~l~ ..,..~ ~ q~UIJ~j I

' ' '
~ ~i~~tii ~\Jf;;wtclll'i II
' '
M.S., XXXVI-14
I
tra !JII ~-4~g -::t:"l'tt::r -;::nt;!r v... : II Tll
' '~
~=:ft Cf) cl ~: ~~eft f(! d ~ ~i c2t' ~rr.::D~Tt=lt: : II
V. V.,XIII-20 '
B.S. LVIII, 116
07.05 : I
• 07.12 tl I~ t b f4 Rl "11 "d?r CH ~']Cb ~ff '« 'i I tll T.T I
;:tT;J::rTt-ir;ra~~r~~~:;::~l~?l ~ ~ ~ Iii\JI ~ ll tl : I
----------------------------------------------------- '
~ Cf> =< d I Cb ~ li Cb 1'! I~ tt Rl Cb ~~r:r rr.::r:-: II
: ~cltl~itl+r: ~i'ix~jOI~i;qq_ I ' ' ' '
V.V.,XV-14
~.. ~................. ';r.r:::l~ ....... ~: r~~~ -;r:=<OCJJt n
'
B.S. LVIII, 71-75 07.13

07.06 d={llld =<i~CI!'Itt<:Jt.-:t ............................ f4CI~\il~d I ~ ~Sf~¥:f~~ld . ~grn1~ 1 101J~it=<i~c;t'! I

' ' ' '
~
•
'
•

M.M., XVIII-1 ,2

07.14 'PI-~ !"r"'P f4 Cb ;{ t(i ffi =< oi ~TTT::rTJT;'I:;-;:;r"!nTcr9"111~rli I

II
07.07 Cf>I4Jtl3~l£114i I •
,
''
B.S., LVIII-125
'
B.S., LVIII-118

07.08
•
311

310
 I

•
•

•
; TrU4 Art tD Birtk ~ta¥~j
D Treu
rrar
 APPENDIX- 1
REFEREN CF=S
-

1979. J

Delhi 1989. '

03.Balakrishnanasari S., Taccud8.stram Bhasa.(Mal.) Kerala

Trivandrum 1982.
04.Bruno Dagens, Architecture in the Ajit8gamaand Rauravagama, ·
Sitaram Bhartia Institute of Scientific Research, New Delhi, 1984.
05.Bruno Dagens (Tr.) Mayamata, Sitaram Bhartia Institute of
Scientific Research New Delhi, 19.85.
06.Chandrasekhara Pilla V. and Ball akrishnanachari S ~.(Ed.)
vastuvidya
(Mal.), Kerala University Oriental Research Institute
and Manuscript Library, Trivandrum 1978.
07 .Chandrasekhara Pilla V. and Balakrishnanachari S. (Ed.)
Vidwakarrn7yam (Mal.) Kerala University Oriental Research
Institute and Manuscript Library, Trivandrum, 1979.

• ·~
r / - - •
/sanasivagurudeva Misra, (Samskrt) Trivandrum Samskrt Ser1es
No. LXXVU Govt. Press, Trivandrum 1922 .
09.Ganapati Sastri T. (Ed.) Manu~yaJayacandrika, (Samskrt)
Trivandrum Samskrt Series No. LVI G~ovt . Press, Trivandrum, 1917.
1O.Ganapati Sastri T. (Ed.) Mayamata of Mayamuni, (Samskrt)
Trivandrum Samskrt Series No. LXV, Govt. Press, Trivandrum,
1919. I 1'-

Trivandrum Samskrt Series No. LVI , Govt. Press Trivandrum, 1917.

Baroda, 1929.
 Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yam
~ Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~yatn
13.Karta N.G, Si/pakaumudi(Mal.) S.T Reddiar Press, Quilon 1125
(M.E). APPENDIX- 2
14.Kanippayyur Sankaran Namboodiripad, (Ed.) Manu~yalaya­ TREES ASSIGNED TO BIRTH STARS
candrika (Mal.) Panchangam Pustakasala, Kunnamkulam, 1983.
Star Assigned Tree
15.Kanippayyur Damodaran Namboodiripad, (Ed.) Tantrasamu-
~ Local name Botanical name
ccayam, Silpa Bhagam (Mal.) Panchangam Pustakasala, 1. Aswati
Kunnamkulam, 1983.
2. Bharani •
16.National Building Code of India (1983), Bureau of Indian
• 3. Krttika
Standards, Group 1-5, New Delhi, 1989.
~
4. Rohini
17.Neelakanthan Asari K., Manu~yalayamahacandrika, (Mal.) S.T. '
Reddiar & Sons Quilon, 1987 . 5. MrgaSirsam
•
18.0useph P.V., Manu~yalayacandrika, unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, 6. Ardra
Calict:Jt University, Dept. of Samskrit, 1992. 7. Punarvasu
19.Prabhu Balagopal T.S., Vastuvidyadars~nam(Mal.) Vistuvidya- 8. Pusam
- I•
pratisthanam, Calicut, 1994. 9. Aslesam
.. ~
•

20.Prabhu Balagopal T.S., and Achyuthan A : Viistuvidyapravesika 10. Makam

"A Text Book of Vastuvidya". Vastuvidyaprati$_thanam, Calicut, 11. Purvam
1994. 12. Uttaram
21.Prabhu Balagopal T.S., and Aehyuthan A : Vastuvidhanadipika 13. Hastam
"Design iA VBstuvidya .. , Vastuvidyaprati~{hanam, Calicut, 1997. 14. Citra
•

22.Ramakrishna Bhat M., (Ed.) Varahamihra's Brhatsamhita, Part. I 15. Swati

. '
& II Motilal Banarsidass, Delhi, 1987. ,/ 16. Visakham
23.Ramakrishna Sastri, (Ed.) Vastu/ak~hanam Silpa Vi¥ayam(Mal.), 17. Anisam
•

Madras Govt. Oriental Series. No. XXI, Govt. Oriental Manuscript

18. Ketta
Library, Madras, 1950.
19. Moo/am
24.Sankar Bhat V., (Ed.) Vidwamitrasamhita, (Samskrt), Rashtriya
Samskrt Vidyapeetha, Tirupati, 1991.
20. Pooratam
J ,_ .1111 "

25.Sambasiva Sastri K., (Ed.) The Silparatnaot Srikumara, Part.ll,

21. Uttratam ~

Trivandrum Samskrt Series No. XCVIII, Kerala University Oriental 22. Tiruvonam
Research Institute ancl Manuscript Library, Trivandrum, 1929. 23. Avittam
••

26. Seetha Padmanabhan and Sampath R.N., (Ed.) Padmasamhita 24. Cathayam
Vol.l,• Pancharatra Parisothana Parishad, Madras, 1974. 25. Pururuttati
'.
27.Stella Kramrisch, The Hindu Temple Vol. I & II, Motilal Banarsidass, ...
26. Uttrattati
New Delhi, 1991. 27. Revati I

•
317
316
 Manusyalayacandrikab ha$yam
• A1an usyalayacandrikab hasya1n
' \

APPENDIX- 4
Similarly other vyama values also Gan be normalised. By this
DESIGN TABLES process, 4 sets of perimeters giving the 4 characteristic yoni
numbers can be generated (tables AP.01, AP.02, AP.03, AP.04).
01 THE PRIME DIMENSION
02.02 ASTROLOGICAL CRITERIA
The prime dimension of vastu can be its width, height, area
The auspiciousness or otherwiSe of the perimeter is
or perimeter, according to different texts. Of ttlese, the perimeter traditionally determined from astrological computations. On this
has come to be accepted as the prime dimension, because it can basis, perimeters are classified as most auspicious (uttama,U)
be directly measured for all shapes of vastumar~ala and it moderately auspicious (madhyamB, M) and less auspicious
incorporates other shape factors also depending on its form (adhama, A). Among the less auspicious perlmeter~, some are
(akara). In traditional practice, design tables are prepared to obtain considered to be highly inauspicious (based on what IS known as
suitable perimeters based on the twin criteria of i) orientation (yont) their .. age") and are not recommended for constructions. Wit~ out
and ii) astrological properties defining their auspiciousness. But in going into their elaborate computatiofls, ~he classi~ication a~ g1ven
modern practice, the design generally starts with the area. Hence in classical computational tables are relied upon 1n prepanng the
it is convenient to link up the two methods, so that both practices 4 tables mentioned above.
can be ~uttJally adapted.
•
03 ELEMENTS OF THE TABleS
02 ACCEPTABILITY CRITERIA FOR THE PERIMETERS
1n the tables , the first column refers to the serial order .o~ the
02.01 THE CRITERION OF ORIENTATION
The perimeter of a vastu is ehosen to satisfy its primary Perimeters. The second column gtves the vyama category.
. · · and the
criterion of orientation. This is known as the canon of yoni as
explained in chapter 3. According to this, perimeters expressed
in the sub-unit of pada, when divided by 8, shall yield remainders
• lllV \ • • • • The side of the square
of 1,3,5 and 7 for vastu located to the east, south, west or north
side respectively of the focal point of the maf)cjala viz. the
Brahmanabhi. These remainders a~e called yoni numbers. The
perimeters can, therefore, be conveniently put into 4 groups, each irom the given pen meter Will be a
with a different yoni number. In effect, this is a system of is given in column 9 in square meters.
normalising perimeters from the criterion of orientation. For erimeters of the set 1 are the
example, a perimeter of 1 vyama (equal to 8 pada) can be
norrmalised to
' IUffi SIZe
i) 9 pada to give yoni number 1 ( dhwajayon1)
ii) 11 pada to give yoni number 3 (simhayon1),
iii) 13 pada to yield yoni number 5 (vr.sabhayonJ) and
iv) 15 pada giving a remainder of 7 (gajayon1).
are those of prasadas a 321
32()
 - , -
Manufyalayacandrikabha~yam
classification helps one to choose the perimeter suitable for all
desired functions.
04 PADAYONI PRINCIPLE
It was mentioned in chapter 3 that padayoni principle gives a
refined system for proportioning spaces. According to this
principle, the width and the length of a rectangular space are
chosen such that perimeters of the squares constructed on them
also have to yield yoni numbers characteristic of the room. The
padayoni principle has been applied for determining dimensions
such as the width of staircase, the width of corridors, the length
of steps and other features of a building which are specified by
one lateral dimension alone. This principle can also be used for
fixing the vertical elements like height of plinth, height of wall etc.
For example, the width of a passage for a building of dhwajayoni
category can be directly taken to be 150cm, 198cm etc. from
column 8 of the table AP 01. The ruling perimeters of these
padayoni widths considering squares of 150cm and 198cm which
fall in the same dhwajayoni category will be 6.00 m and 7.92 m
respectively as seen from column 5 of the table.
05 PROPORTIONING BY PADA YON/ PRINCIPLES
For square rooms, for any given normalised perimeter given
in columns 4 and 5, the side of the square is given in columns 7
and 8 in traditional and metric units respectively. For rectangular
rooms, the width and length are decided by the following steps.
1. For the given perimeter, read the padayoniwidth from columns
7 and 8 of the table. For example, for a dhwajayoni perimeter
of 19.44m (27HOA), the padayoni width is 4.86m(6H 18A)
(table AP01 ).
2. For obtaining the width of the room, 48cm or its multiples can
be deducted from the padayoni width. An equal increment
is added to the padayoniwidth to get the length. For example,
for the above case of 19.44m perimeter, the width and length
could be 4.38m and 5.34m or 3.90m and 5.82m. It may be
noted that these values can be directly taken from both sides
322 ,.
Manu~yalayacandrikahhii.yatn
of the padayoni width from the tabl e.
3. From the chosen width and length, the area can be computed
For th; select~d examples the areas will be 23.4m2 and
22.7m respe~t1vely. These valu es can be seen to be less
than the max1mum area given for the chosen perimeter
namely 23.62m in column 9. It can be seen that as the rati~
2
of length to width increases, the enclosed area decreases
i.e the space enclosure efficiency of th e rectangle decreases
by the shape factor. Therefore, it is evident that when the
design starts from a given area, one should chose a perimeter
corresponding to a higher value.
06 THE PROPORTIONING OF ROOMS OF GIVEN AREA
In modern practice, the area of the room is specified. Let
2
the specified area be 22m . Let the room be in simhayoni. Start
2
from 24.80m , column 9 of vyama category 10 of table AP-02.
The corresponding padayoniwidth is 4.9.8m. We can have length
and width equal to 5.46m and 4.5m (adding and substracting 48cm
from padayoniwidth) or 5.94m and 4.02m (with 96cm increments).
2 2
The respective areas will be 24.57m for the first case and 23.88m
in the second case.
07 WIDTH AND LENGTH HAVING PADAYONI DIFFERENT
FROM THAT OF THE ROOM
It has been shown that by substractin g and adding 48cm or
its multiples, the resulting width and length have the same
padayoni as that of the room. This limits the choice of values for
width and length. Hence some practitioners reco~m~nd t~at ~he
increment may be 12cm instead of 48cm. Th1s w1ll st1ll g1ve
padayoni values, but the yoni will be different from that of t~e
room. For example, take the perimeter of room to be 27H tn
dhwajayoni. It-s padayoni in dhwaja is 4.86n: (tab!~ AP-01., set.2).
I
With increments of 12cm, we get the followm g pa1rs of w1dth and
length: ·
4.74m and 4.98m in gaja and simha respectively;
4.62m and 5.1 Om both Vf~abha;
323
 Man usyaJayac andrikab ha~yam Manusyiilayacandrikahllasya
•
~
m
TABLE AP01 22 177 59-0 42.48 M 14-18 10.62 112.78
DHWAJAYON/MEASUREMENTS FOR PLANNING AND DESIGN OF 4 23 185 61-16 44.40 A 15-10
•
11.1 0 123.21
BUILDINGS 24 193 64-8 46.32 M 16-2 11.58 134.1 0
. 25 201 67-0 48.24 u 16-18
'"C
Q) c ~Q)
12.06 145.44
> -·- ·-
(/)
·-
-c-:::s
(/)
~ 26
~ ~ ~ .., (/)
~ ~

cv Side of the square Area

0
E ·- ~ > E
Set ~g' ~ c
Traditional units c.(.)c E with the given 27 217 72-8 52.08 M 18-02
~~
0 :::s
·- ·- G)
perimeter 13.02 169.52
z (/)
G) ~ a:
(.) ~..,

~ Q)
H-A m m2 28 225 75-0 54.00 M 18-18 13.50 182.25
Pada Hasta -Angula o E
1 2 3 4 (.) 5 6 7 8 9 5 29 233 77-16 55.92 u 19-10 13.98 195.44
I: 1 9 3-0 2.16 M 0-18 0.54 0.29 30 241 80-8 57.84 u 20-02 14.46 209.09
2 17 5-16 4.08 u 1-10 1.02 1.04 31 249 83-0 59.76 A 21-18 14.94 223.20
1 3 25 8-8 6.00 u 2-2 1.50 2.25 32
4 33 11-0 7.92 M 2-18 1.98 3.92 33 265 88-8 63.60 M 22-2 15.90 252.81
5 41 13-16 9.84 A 3-10 2.46 6.05 34 273 91-0 65.52 u 22-18 16.38 268.30
6 49 16-8 11.76 u 4-2 2.94 8.64 6 35 281 93-16
•
67.44 M 23-10 16.86 284.26
7 36 289 96-8 69.36 A 24-2 17.34 300.68
37 297 99-0 71.28 M 24-18 17.82 317.55
8 65 21-16 15.60 M 5-10 3.90 15.21
9 73 24-8 17.52 M 6-2 4.38 19.18 38
2 10 81 27-0 19.44 u 6-18 4.86 23.62 39
11 89 29-16 21.36 u 7-10 5.34 28.52 40 321 107-0 77.04 u 26-18 19.26 370.95
12 97 32-8 23.28 A 8-2 5.82 33.87 41 329 109-16 78.96 A 27-10 19.74 389.67
•
7 42 337 112-8 80.88 M 28-2 20.22 408.93
13
115-0 82.80 A 28-18 20.70 428.49
14 113 37-16 27.12 u 9-10 6.78 45.96 43 345
448:59
15 121 40-8 29.04 u 10-2 7.26 52.70 44 353 117-16 84.72 u 29-10 21.18
•
3 16 129 43-0 30.96 M 10-18 7.74 59.91 45
88.56 u 30-18 22.14 490.18
17 137 45-16 32.88 u 11-10 8.22 67.57 46 369 123-0
511.66
18 145 48-8 34.80 A 12-2 8.70 75.69 47 377 125-16 90.48 u 31-10 22.62 •

u 32-2 23.10 533.61

19 • 8 48 385 128-8 92.40
M 32-18 23.58 556.02
49 393 131-0 94.32
20 24.06 578.88
133-16 96.24 A 33-10
21 169 56-8 40.56 u 14-2 10.14 102.82 50 401
325
324
 Manu ~yalayac andrikab ha~y am Manusyalayacandrikabnasyam
• •

TABLE AP02 23 187 62-8 44.88 u 15-14 11.22 125.89

S/MHAYON/MEASUREMENTS FOR PLANNING AND DESIGN OF 24 195 65-0 46.80 A 16-6 11.70 136.89
BUILDING
25
-c
G) s:: g'G)
> ·-
0 ·- ·- :::J
0
~
26
~ a- -~ +J
0 -c- a-
Side of the square
0
E ·-
~Cl a- s:: ; ~ E ~ Area
27 219 73-0 52.56 M 18-6 13.14 172.66
Set Traditional units c.oc: E with the given
~! 0 :::J G)
~ ~
0
z 0G) ·-
a- ·-
a,..+J
a- G)
c: perimeter
28 227 75-16 54.48 u 18-22 13.62 185.50
Pada Hasta -Angula o E H-A m m2
(.) 5 5 29 235 78-8 56.40 A 19-14 14.10 198.81
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9
- 30 243 81-0 58.32 M 20-6 14.58 212.58
1 11 3-16 2.64 A 0-22 0.66 0.44
31 251 83-16 60.24 u 20-22 15.06 226.80
2 19 6-8 4.56 A 1-14 1.14 1.30
1 3 27 9-0 6.48 M 2-6 1.62 2.62 32
4 35 11-16 8.40 M 2-22 2.10 4.41 33 267 89-00 64.08 u 22-6 16.02 256.64
5 43 14-8 10.32 M 3-14 2.58 6.66 34 275 91-16 66.00 A 22-22 16.50 272.25

6 6 35 283 94-8 67.92 u 23-14 16.98 288.32

291 97-0 69.84 M 24-6 17.46 304.85
7 36
8 67 22-8 5-14 37 299 99-16 71.76 u 24-22 17.94 321.84
16.08 M 4.02 16.16 -
9 75 25-0 18.00 u 6-6 4.50 20.25 38 ;

105-10 75.60 A 26-6 18.90 357.21

2 10 83 27-16 19.92 A 6-22 4.98 24.80 39 315
107-16 77.52 M 26-22 19.38 375.58
11 91 30-8 21.84 A 7-14 5.46 29.81 40 323
79.44 M 27-14 19.86 394.42
12 99 33-0 23.76 u 8-6 5.94 35.28 7 41 331 110-8
81.36 u 28-6 20.34 413.72
13 42 339 113-0
83.28 u 28-22 20.82 433.47
14 115 38-8 27.60 u 9-14 6.90 47.61 43 347 115-16
15 123 41-0 29.52 A 10-6 7.38 54.46 44
3 16 131 43-16 31.44 A 10-22 7.86 61.78 45
89.04 A 30-22 22.26 495.51
17 139 46-8 33.36 A 11-14 8.34 69.56 46 371 123-16
u 31-14 22.74 517.12
18 147 49-0 . 35.28 u 12-6 8.82 77.79 47 379 126-08 90.96
M 32-6 23.22 539.17
19 387 129-0 92.88
8 48 23.70 561.69
131-16 94.80 M 33-22
20 163 54-8 39.12 A 13-14 9.78 95.65 49 395
A 34-14 24.18 584.67
21 171 57-0 41.04 u 14-6 10.2 105.27 50 403 134-8 96.72
4 22 179 59-16 42.96 M 14-22 10.74 115.35
327
326
 - ,- ,...
Man u,syalayac andrikab ha~y am Manufyalayacandrikabna~yam

•
TABLE AP03 4 22 181 60-8 43.44 A 15-02 10.86 117.94
VRSASHAYON/MEASUREMENTS FOR PLANNING AND DESIGN OF 23 189 63-0 45.36 M 15-18 11.34 128.60
BUILDINGS 24 197 65-16 47.28 u 16-10 11.82 139.71
"'C
Cl) c: 25
> ·-
(/)·-
- ..,
g'Cl)
·- :::J
"'C-
(/)

...
~

Set ,e
~ ...
~
~
E ·-
... c:
(/)

~ > E
~
~
E
Side of the square
with the given
Area
26 213 71-0 51.12 u 17-18 12.78 163.33
~ Cl) Traditional units O.uc:
~..,
::::. ~
(.)
0
z
:::J
~ ·- ·-
Cl) ...
._..,
Cl)
a: perimeter 27 221 73-16 53.04 A 18-10 13.26 175.83
Pada Hasta -Angula
... Cl)
o E •
H-A m m2
5 28 229 76-8 54.96 u 19-2 13.74 188.79
1 2 3 4 u 5 6 7-. 8 9
29 237 79-0 56.88 M 19-18 14.22 202.21
1 13 4-8 3.12 M 1-2 0.78 0.61 30 245 81-16 58.80 A 20-10 14.70 216.09
2 21 7-0 5.04 M 1-18 1.26 1.59 31 253 84-8 60.72 u 21-2 15.18 230.43
1 3 29 9-16 6.96 u 2-10 1.74 3.03 32
4 37 12-8 8.88 A 3-2 2.22 4.93 33 269 89-16 64.56 u 22-10 16.14 260.50
276.22
I

5 45 15-0 10.80 u 3-18 2.70 7.29 277 92-8 66.48 A 23-2 16.62
34
95-0 68.40 A 23-18 17.10 292.41
6 53 6 35 285
97-16 70.32 A 24-10 17.58 309.06
7 61 20-8 14.64 u 5-2 3.66 13.40 36 293
326.16 .
100-8 72.24 M 25-2 18.06
8 69 23-0 16.56 A 5-18 4.14 17.14 37 301
2 9 77 25-16 18.48 M 6-10 4.62 21.34 38
76.08 M 26-10 19.02 361.76
10 85 28-8 20.40 M 7-2 5.10 26.01 39 317 105-16
19.50 380.25
11 93 31-0 22.32 A 7-18 5.58 31.14 40 325 108-8 78.00 A 27-2
u 27-18 19.98 399.20
33-16 24.24 u 8-10 41 333 111-0 79.92
12 101 6.06 36.72 7 20.46 418.61
81.84 u 28-10
•

42 341 113-16
13 20.94 438.48
349 116-8 83.76 A 29-2
•
43
14 117 39-0 28.08 u 9-18 7.02 49.28
15 125 41-16 30.00 A 10-10 7.50 56.25 44 479.61
87.60 . M 30-10 21.90
45 365 121-16 22.38 490.12
.
•
3 16 133 44-8 31.92 A 11-2 7.98 63.68
373 124-8 89.52 u 31-2
17 141 47-0 33.84 u 11-18 8.46 71.57 . 46 22.86 522.58
127-0 91.44 u 31-18
18 149 49-16 35.76 A 12-10 8.94 79.92 8 47 381 23.34 544.7 6
93.36 A 32-10
48 389 129-16 568.3 5
19 A 33-2 23.84
•
132-8 95.28
49 397
•
20 165 55-0 39.60 u 13-18 9.90 98.01
50
21 173 57-16 41.52 u 14-10 10.38 107.74
329
~

•
328
,
•
 Manu~yalayacandrikabllasyam
Manu~yalayac andrikab Jla~yam '
'

4 22 183 61-0 43.92 M 15-06 10.98 120.56

TABLE AP04
23 191 63-16 45.84 M 15-22 11.46 131.33
GAJAYONI MEASUREMENTS FOR PLANNING AND
DESIGN OF BUILDINGS · •
24 199 66-8 47.76 A 16-14 11.94 142.56
-c 25
G) c g'G)
>
cu .. ·-
0 ·-
-~ ....
0
·-
-c-:::s
0
..
~
Side of the square 26 215 71-16 ·51.60 M 17-22 12.90 166.41
eo
Set f<V E ·-c
.. ~ ~ E ~

E with the given

Area
~!
tft
0 :::s Traditional units a.uc: G) 27 223 74-8 53.52 A 18-14 13.38 179.02
z 0.-·- perimeter
~~
(,) ......
Cl) . .
.. G)
a:
5 28 231 77-0 55.44 u 19-6 13.86 192.10
Pada Hasta -Angu/a o E H-A m m2
1 2 3 4 (.) 5 6 7 8 9 29 239 79-16 57.36 M 19-22 14.34 205.64
30 247 82-8 59.28 M 20-14 14.82 219.63
1 15 5-0 3.60 u 1-6 0.9 0.81
2 23 7-16 5.52 A 1-22 1.38 1.90 • 31
1 3 31 10-8 7.44 M 2-14 1.86 3.46 32
13-0 3-6 271 90-8 65.04 A 22-14 16.26 214.39
4 39 9.36 M 2.34 5.48 33
93-0 66.96 M 23-6 16.74 280.23
5 47 15-16 11.28 M 3-22 2.82 7.95 34 279
6 6 35 287 95-16 68.88 u 23-22 17.22 296.53

21-00
•

36 295 98-8 70.80 u 24-14 17.70 313.29

7 63 15.12 M 5-6 3.78 14.29 330.51
101-0 72.72 A 25-6 18.18
8 71 23-16 17.04 u 5-22 4.26 18.15 37 303
2 9 79 26-8 18.96 A 6-14 4.74 22.47 38
106-8 76.56 M 26-14 19.14 366.34
10 87 29-0 20.88 u 7-6 5.22 27.25 39 319
109-0 78.48 u 27-6 . 19.62 384.94
11 95 31-16 22.80 A 7-22 5.70 32.49 7 40 327
A 27-22 20.10 401.01
41 335 111-16 80.40
12 20.58 423.54
•
114-8 82.32 A 28-14
13 42 343 443.52
.
84.24 M 29-6 21.06
•

43 351 117-0
14 119 39-16 28.56 A 9-22 7.14 50.98
•

15 127 42-8 30.48 M 10-14 7.62 58.06 44 484.88

u 30-14 22.02
367 122.8 88.08
3 16 135 45-0 32.40 A 11-6 8.10 65.61 45 22.50 506.25
90.00 A 31-6
17 143 47-16 34.32 u 11-22 8.58 73.62 . 46 375 125-0 528.08
A 31-22 22.98
127-16 91.92
18 151 50-8 36.24 M 12-14 9.06 82.08 8 47 383 23.46 550.37
93.84 M 32-14
48 391 130-8 574.08
19 A 33-6 23.96
133-0 95.76
20 167 55-16 40.08 u 13-22 10.02 100.40 49 399
•

21 175 58-8 42.00 u 14-14 10.50 11 0.25 50 331

33()
 •
Manu~yalayacandrikabhasyatn
a
•

4.50m and 5.22m in simha and gaja respectively; and GLOSSARY

4.38 and 5.34m both dhwaja.
•
It can be seen that in this system, it is not insisted that the
padayoni of width and length should belong to the same class as
that of the room. This appears to be a compromise resulting in
the loss of the refinement expected from the padayoni concept.
08 USE OF PROHIBITED PADAYONI VALUES FOR WIDTH
AND lENGTH · Adhama (93) Least; minimum
It can be seen that when increments of 48cm are added to
or deducted from the padayoni value for a chosen perimeter, the
resulting width and length can fall under the prohibited vyama
category. For example, in the case of 27 hasta perimeter referred
above, adding to and subtracting from the padayonivalue of 4.86m
3 increments of 48cm, the length and width become 6.30m and
3.42m respectively. Though these values are acceptable according
to padayoni principle, they are not desirable as they fall under the
prohibited vyama category. Here also, some practitioners adopt
such values as a compromise. But this clearly violates refinement
of astrological computation in the choice of the perimeter.
09 TABLES AS READY-RECKONERS
It can be seen that the tables serve as convenient and easy-
to-use ready reckoners for design of vastus. The proportioning of
the rooms starting from perimeter and area is made easy by the
table. The auspiciousness or otherwise of the chosen perimeter
can also be easily found out from the table.
• adding % to integers eg. 1Yz, 2 Yz. etc.
• Arudhothara (231) Additional honzontal supp~rt . for t
•
•
•
Note: The ter~, the page in w.hich the term appears first and the
technical meantng of the term tn the context of this text appear in
that order.
I
Abdhyasra (46) Square
Acarya (1 0) Learned preceptor; advisor to the owner and sthapati
on matters relating to vastusthapana.
Adhi~!hana (190) Basement of a building
Adhomula (240) Bottom down as opposed to urdhwamulam
bottom up (relates to placing of kutam)
Agama (9) Literature relating to the syst~m. of worshiping gods in
iconic form; generaBy agamas refer to Saiva worship , samhita to
Vaisnava and tantra to sakti worships .
•
Agni (22) Fire god; regent of south east direction; also manifested
as sikhi in the north east direction
Agra (46) Front~ top
Ajayuddhasandhi (243) Goat fight joint, similar to the scarted
joint
Alinda (150) Corridor; verandah; passage. .
Alpak~etra (50) Small plot generally of width less than ~2 h~sta ..
Angula (39) Linear measuremen~ equal to 1/64 of vyama, also
equal to 8 yava; standard angula ts 3cm. _ .
An kana (61) Courtyard. BBhyB.nkaQa: outer yard; MadhyankaQa.
ce.ntral yard; Gartankal)a : depressed yard .
Apidh8na (264) Top plank of the roof placed abov_e the ndge to
Arama (279) vertical piece of the door lat?h through the cut o
which the horizontal pieces called argala sltde: ·
he rafters
,.
. d uttara stmtlar to pur tn .
A vanata (39) A-shaped frame use or
or floors . .
Avayava (67) Limb; elem.ent . anons known as 8yidi-
1
sadvarga· others being vyaya (expen ' ) •

Ayama (53) Elongatton ; the ron a

yama . 333
332
•
A1 an u ~)Jalayac andrikah lza{;;ya1n
Ayana (42) The apparent movement of the sun from tropic of _ Manufyalayacandrikabhasyant
Capricorn to tropic of Cancer and back over one year; The f~rmer
•
Dipama/a 196 . • ·It

is uttarayana (north ward movement) and the latter is dak~iQayana wa s or on special _

b eyon d th e wall. Wooden framed structure (vilakkumatam)
(southerly movement). . •
·
Dravyaviinana (8) K d . . .
Bahupamsu (20) Excess soil.
1
now1e ge o1 matenals ; matenal sctence.
•
Dr~~~l)a (S) Brahma: supreme creator.
Balakuta (246) Additional, decorative pendent.
• Dvlsala (135) A combination of two eka$8./as -6 possibilities exist
Bhinna ( 150) Separate. 1-
Bhuja (247) Base of the triangle. KoJi is the altitude of a right E~asala (135) Unitary building, put up in any one cardinal direction
angled triangle. KarQa is the hypotenuse .. ~tth reference to the central point Brahmanabhi of a vastu; it gets
Bhumi (18) Earth; land; one of the classifications of vastu. 1t:_ nar;'_e depending on its position in relation to this point eg .
Bindu (255) Point; a ma[Jgala of 0 x o grid; also refered as nabhi, •
purvasa/a, dak~iQasala, pascimasala and uttarasala respectively
)

the focus of a mandala. located to the E, S, W, and N of this focus .

Bhramal}aka (276) : Pinion and socket hinge
Ga/a(194) Neck or recess in a basement· also refers to the recess
'
above the prastara (entablature) of a building and the sikhara (roof)
Carana (120) Pillar
Catu;asrikaratJa (67) Squaring the plot. · portion.
Catu~sala (135) A combination of four ekasa/as with or without • Galamancaka (204) Specific pattern of moulding of basement with
the corner £alas; a structure with halls on four sides around a a neck (gala).
• •
central courtyard. Gamana (52) Shift: offset .
Citra (8) Painting; also used to denote all depictions including GaQ/ta (8) Square mandala of 19x19 grid; mathematics ;
' computation.
relief and sculpture.
Cu/i (218) Bressumer, or beam supported on columns. •
Garbhagrha (104) The sanctum sanctorum; the womb chamber.
Gopura (196) Gate, tower. -·
Dal)pa (96) Linear measurement equal to 4 hasta or 96 angu/a; Grama (102) Village settlements ; large gramas are called maha-
•

also called puru~adarc;Ja; the unit or module ifi1 the proportional •

system of measurement; literally danda means a rod, similar to
the ranging rod used in modern survey.
Darsana (14)Philosophy.
Dhanalaya (296) Treasury, store for valuables .
Dhan graha (89) Hasta measure of length equal to 27 standard
uttamangula. ·.
Dhanurmu~ti (89) Hasta,measure of length equal to 26 standard
uttamangu/a.
Dhanyabhavana (292) Barn.
Dhvajareki:Ja (262) Pitch line; reference line on a rafter.
Dhyanas/oka (7) Meditational chanting generally depicting the
characteristic features of the deity ; basis for paint1ng and sculpture.
DigniriJaya (67) Fixing the card~naf direction; see also
sankusthapana, dik (4 cardinal directions) vidik (corner directions) .
Dik (46) Cardinal directions - 4 in number: see vidik for other
direction.
gramas; other types of rural settlements are khe.faka, kharva!aka;
smaller villages are also of vidambaka ,nigama, and agrahara
categories.
G[hapreves~ (18) First entry into house .. . . .
I Gunamsa (133) Fraction; the rule accord1ng to wh1ch the semi-
perimeter of a rectangle is divided by integers from 9 to 32 and 4
parts are taken for width and the rest for length.
Harmya (19) Building; harmyadivastu means buildings for different
activities 1 th f
1
Hasta (20) Anthropometric linear measurement equa_ to eng o
arm· the standard and most commonly used hasta ~~ 24 angu/a
and' is called ki?ku; 8 measurements of hastas varymg from 24
an u/a to 31 angula with variations of 1 angula are k.nowr. b~
I .g t . the other words for hasta are kara , bhuJa, aratnJ,
dtfferen names,
dormana, kol (Mal.)
lstadirgha (61) Desired length; selected length .
••

334 335
 •

Manu~yalayacandri/Cab ha~yam •
•
Manu~yalayacandrikabha~yatn

/~fadevata (4) Deity of one's choice.
Jagati (104) The vertical part of basement above paduka.
Janaka (160) Creator or origin; that which is derived is janya.
Jayanti (226) Cross beams.
Ka/asadma (295) Farm house.
Kalari (32) Training place .
Kal)pa (207) The shaft of the column; the portion between base
and capital.
Kapota (226) The projecting portion of entablature with an S
shape.
KarpapramaQa (209) PramaQa or reference measurement
(module) equal to the length of diagonal.
it to the grain ~ize-6 , 7 ?r 8 in number denoting the minimum ,
median or max1mum Width , adhama , madhyama and uttama,
angu/as are obtained . . . .
Mancaka (203) Spec1f1c pattern of honzontal mou\ding of
basement .
Mandala (55) Oemarkated area; generally of circular shape but
also used to describe any area defined by a perimeter, regular or
irregular.
· Mandapa (104) Pavilion .
Mangalaphalaka (273) Ornamental decorative plank between the
door head and wall plate. .
Manu$yapramatJa (86) Anthropomet~tc standard~ measurement
system based on the size and proportions ~f human. body. . . •

Karl)asutra (193) Diagonal axis of a mandala; mainly refered for Marma (70) Intersection of orthogonal and diagonal lines of a gnd,
·the line from S-W to N-E. vulnerable point; nodes . .
Karl)avedha (193) The affliction of any reference line or part of Marmavedha (70) Intersection with vulnerable pomts,
the building with a diagonal in the mandala. MilsUra (191) synonym of adhi$.th8na.
Kavata (275) Leaf of the door. Mitrimgula (87) Measurement of angula related to the body
Kha!Jpa (49) Sector. measure , varies with ethnic groups.
•
Kl$kU (91) Standard hasta equal to 24 uttamangula; 72 em . Must/ (97) Fist, a measure of 3 angu/am; also known as parva.
•
Ko.ti (236) Diagonal (oblique line); also the hip rafter. •

K~etra (42) Plot of land, alpak$efra is small plot or small temple,

K$efravastu :architecture of temples.
Kumuda (194) The part of the basement above jagati with b ered in 1 nBdika by walking Which IS 1000 daQrja .. .
octagonal or circular section; also water lily.
Kii.ta (239) Pendant ; solid wooden piece to which the top ends of
all the rafters of a ko$fha type of roof or the top ends of slanting
rafters and the end of ridge piece of a sabha type of roof are
durgas. 0
f the 27 constellations in the sky.
Naksatra (27) Star; any one
connected.
Nlmitta (15) Cause;~ omen . a er
Lambam (254) Vertical ; lambarekha vertical line. Nivra (259) Eave; nivraphalaka IS eave-re p .
Lak$mi (273) Goddess of wealth and prosperity.
Lupa (234) Rafter; kotilupa is hip rafter; rju/upa or prak[filupa is of an shape In a mar:rcfa a
Straight rafter, upakofilupa is the inclined rafter other than hip rafter,
also known as vi~rtilupa; lupalamba is drop of the rafter from the
wall plate .
Madhyaprarfiddha (150) System of centre line measurement of
uttara.
Mallikakuttima (194) Platform for the jasmine plant . outside ·dth which are obtatne Y
Mana(86) Measurement ; specifically the horizontal measurement ; •
Padadhtka (142) Ratios of length to WI
mana is divided into prama!Ja the measurement of width , diameter
etc . and parimaQa the measurement of circumference or perimeter. P3damana (207) The height between
Manangu/a(95) The standardised measure of angula, by equating \ bottom of wall plate . 337
336
 Man u~yalayacandrikah ha~'·ya11z
Padayoni (121) A rule for proportioning rectangle, or determining
__a_n_us~·y_a_la~y-ac_·a_n_d_ri_k_ah_l_za~~~a-In_____________
. _____________M
the right dimension of linear elements to satisfy the yoni rule. Puccha (45) Tail , rear.
Padona (142) Ratios of length to width which are obtained by Puru$anjali(147) Reach of standard puru~a ; 10 pada; 80 angula .
subtracting ~ from integers above 1, eg. 1 A, 2 A ....
3 3
Rajju (46) Rope; also diagonal in maQgala .
Paduka(195) Ground course; th~ lowest course of the basement. Randhra (239) Hole. mortice .
Pak~a (39) 15 days denoting the lunar phases of waxing and RiiSi (75) Stellar constellation ; 12 numbers from Anes (me$a) . to
,.
waning of moon; waxing phase is suklapak$a and waning phase Pisces (mina).
is kr~rap?Jksa.
Pancaprakara (1 04) The five defined boundaries of a temple; Sa1a (54) Rectangular hall with gable roof. . .
Pararriapu (86) The smallest linear measurement equal to the Samatata (142) A rectangle with length equal to an 1nteger multiple
diameter of the minute aerosol seen in a dark room when sun's of its width. .
rays creep into it through crevices; a-sof 1 angu/a. Samhita (9) Compilation (e .g. Brhtsamhita) ; a genenc name for
Paramasayimappala(138) Square mandala of 9 x 9 grid divisions. Vaisnava agamas.
Parva (200) Linear measurement equal to 3 angu/a; 1/8 part of sainJkarana (40) Levelling operation .
Hasta, also known as musti . Sandhipaia (276) Reaper placed to conceal the gaps between
•
Paryantasiitra (133) Bounding Perimeters. the door panels; , _ . . for
Patramana (168) The horizontal distance from outside of uttara Sanku (39) Gnomon; pole; Sankusthapana: fl~mg gnomon _
to the outside of the basement; offset of plinth from the plane of marking the centre of the vastu and /or fmdmg the cardmal
uttara. directions. .. ·· ·
P~f.ta (219) belt; also paf.ti. Santikarma (71) The traditional rite;. to propitiate the deitieS m a
Pifha (1 02) seat; elevated square seat; also a square mar)~ala of • mandala ~ also refered to as vastupuJa .
3 x 3 grid. saigaprakriya (15) Job of creat1on . dt
Potika (207) Same as bodhika, decorated bracket of pillar. Sayana (19) Literally means a couch or bed stead , but IS use o
Pracya (89) Hasta measure of length equal to 28 standard denote all furniture . .
uttamangula. · · · . IVIStOns ;
Prajapatya (87) Hasta measure of length equal to 25 standard
uttamangula . sthapati, siitragr8hi, vardhakl and tak~aka .
Prakara (1 04) Boundary; boundary wall classically 5 in number Siista (150) Combined. . b ·ld StM.pana is the
viz- antarmaf)cjala, antahara, madhyahflra, bahyahara, and sthapaka (93) One who establishes or ut s.
maryada, starting from the inner altar line to outer wall of temple; act of building . h.t t engineer or master builder occupying
same as pancaprakara or pancako~!hi; in Vai~ravism, the prakaras Sthapati (11) T~~ arc I ec - 4 divisions of Silpins; one who is
are 7,.with madhyamaryada and mahamaryada added.
Prakirpa (89) Hasta measure of length equal to 31 standard empowered to design an d f Atharvaveda dealing With bUIIdmg
uttamangula. Sthapatyaveda (8) Upave a o
Prasada (64) That which is pleasing; large buildings like temple , science. d ,.. Otravist8ra is thickness of line ; sUtra also
palaces etc; the word is also used to denote the vimana of temple.
ut
5 ra ( 13) T hrea 1n e , s
Alpaprasada: small temple with width of garbhagrha not exceeding
means formula , theory etc.f f s of Silpins· superviser of works ;
•
15 Hasta.
Prasadavastu (190) Temples, palaces or any symbolic building ;
literally means a vastu (artefact) which pleases the mind of the
on-looker or user.
Prati (204) Stereobate, the topmost course of a plinth. T8/a (98) Palm of the han , m
33Y
•

33X
 Manu~yiilayacandrikabna~yam
iconography in terms of face length which is equal to length of
palm; fa/amana is the proportionate system of measurement using
tala as a module.
Tantra (8) Ritualistic practice generally related to worship of sakti;
applied knowledge.
Tejas (3) Lustre; splendour, energy.
Tila (86) The diameter of the til oil seed; 1/64 of angula; 0.47mm.
Tiryak (222) Cross wise (placing of JTlembers).
Trisala (135) A combination of 3 ekasalas.
Tulapada (226) Projecting end of joist. · Vastusthapana (12) Design and construction of vastu.
Upanaha (190) Course below the paduka; the top most levelling
course of foundation.
-
l!.papifha (191) Course or platform below the basement.
Urdhvapa.(ti (274) Lintel; plank kept above the door frame to
support the masonry portion above it.
Uttama (93) Best; maximum.
Uttamanga (300) Head;
Uttara (122) North; also wall plate, categorised as khar:u:fottara,
pattrottara, rupottara; kshudrottara is purlin supporting the roof
and bearing on the uttara; ankal)oftara is purlin at the eave.
Utthana (76) Face up position
Vaideha (89) Hasta measure of length equal to 29 standard
uttamangula.
Vaipulya(89) Hasta measurement of length equal to 30 standard
uttamanagula .
Vajana (204) Fillet; projection from the vertical plane; wing-like
treatment on basement, walls or roof elements;derived from vaji,
meaning horse.
Valabhi (226) Decorative moulding for beams, door frames etc.
Vamsa (237) ridge to which all rafters join; literally mean clan;
also called agradhani.
Vardhaki (12) One of the 4 divisions of silpins who assembles
the different building components; literally vardhaki means 'one
who increases or joins'.
Var(la (11) Class of people, the four classes being brahmapa,
k$atriya, vaisya and sOdra; also colour.
Vastu (10) Dwelling place; derived from the Samsk.rt word vas
meaning "to dwell".
Vastumapflala (46) Specified region for the planning of building
and other artefacts.
Vastupuru~a (15) The mythological being which is believed to
34()
Manusyalayacandrikahhasyatn
occupy all VastumaQ9ala . The symbolic figure of a man overlaid
or depicted on vastu.
Vastupuru$ama1Jf}ala (77) The Vastumar:u;Jala with the figure of
Vastupuru~a superimposed on it indicating the position of
padadevatas.
- ,_ ~
Vastusastra (3) The prescriptions for building ; generally, the term
is used to denote traditional Indian building technology.
Vastuvidya (8) The knowledge of building science: the term is
used to denote tradtionallndian architecture.
Vayu(22) God of wind ; regent of norht-west direction, also callled
ana/a.
Vedha (54) lntersection ;affliction.
Vedi (289) Platform.
Vidik(21) Corner direction, generally inclined at 45° to the cardinal
directions: Analysis is taken up to 32 divisions of a circle.
Vi mana (1 04) Structure of the sanctum sanctorum ; vehicle used
for the procession of deities: literally menas that which is measured
proportiontely.
Viskambha (232) Intermediate beam in a roof section ;
viikambhap§da is the strut supporting vi~kambha. . .
Vitanarekha(242) horizantalline, used to denote the sloptng wtdth
of a rafter.
Vlthi(201 path; enveloping shell; vas~umar;uj~Ja_is gener~lly divid~d
into 4 vithis but in an 18 x 18 gnd , 9 VJfh1s are g1ven as 1n
Manu~yalayacandrika . Vlth\vinayasa , analysis of margala by
enveloping regions.
Vrk~a (25) Tree; in general terms it is used to i.ncl.ude all plan~s ;
classified traditionally into antassara , (hard core 1ns1de) , saNasara
(hard wood thoughout) , bahissara (hard wood outside) and nissara
(hard wood nowhere). .
Vyama (87) Anthropometric measure betwe~n the t1ps of the
middle fingers with hands outstretched to two stdes ; 8 pada or 64
angula.
Yajamana (11) Owner of building ; patron ; one who leads yajna .
Yana (19) Vehicle used for travel.
Yava (86) Grain of barley ; a linear measur~me~t equal to 1/8 of
•
angula, approximately 3.75 mm ; yavodara 1s wtdth of yava.
Yojana (1 01) Linear measurement equal to 1000 raJJU or 8000
~n~ . .
Yoni ( 106) Architectural formula for orientation ; literally yont means
'origin'.
341
 •

Manu~syalayacandrikO,bhasyatn
- -
. ' •

(Regd. under the Societies Registration Act XXI of 1860 Reg. No. 558/1193. Kozhikode)
MAIN OB,JECTIVE
1. To provide for and promote the study and research of Vcistuvidya,
the traditional architecture of India and its allied fields, with spe-
cial reference to Kerala.
2. To execute programmes for education and training including aware-
ness courses, seminars, symposia, workshops, conferences on
building sciences, rural and urban planning and related subjects .
•

3. To train craftsmen in the application of the principles and paractices

of vastuvidya.
4. To arrange ofr publication of monographs, jou~nals, reading materi-
als, reference books.
5. To take up design and construction of different kinds of Vastu as
part of research on V§stuvidya.
6. To institue fellowships, studentships etc. for pursuing research
on Vastuvidya.
7. To co-operate with other organisations including Universitites,
Govt. agencies in promoting and achieving the objectives men-
. tioned above.
FIELDS OF ACTIVITIES •

1. Conducting research in Vastuvidya and related subjects and

publishirng research documents, monographs, reference books,
instruction aids, periodicals etc.
2 .. Arranging and conducting awareness courses, workships, semi-
nars, symposia, long term courses etc. on building construction
and rural and urban planning.
3. Designing and executing training programmes with aview to
help the technicians in gaining theoretical and practical knowl-
edge on building science in general and vastuvidya in particular.
4. Analysing and evaluating the principles processes and practices
of Vastuvidya using scientific methology and integrate them with
the developments in engineering science and material science.
5. Undertaking the construction of different types of ttastu as part
•

of the research.
6. Organising training centres, library and museum.

342